JP2016137357A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing it effectively that the amusement of a specific performance to be executed on the basis of the time period measured by timing means drops.SOLUTION: In a pachinko game machine 1, it is decided whether or not a special game advantageous for a player is executed, and the special game is executed in accordance with the decision result. When a time period timed by timing means satisfies a predetermined time condition, there is executed a specific performance composed of three partial performances to be executed in the order of a first partial performance, a second partial performance and a third partial performance. This specific performance can change performance modes of at least the second partial performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 122

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with effect execution means.

  For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins at the start opening, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game, and after the special symbol is variably displayed on the special symbol display, a special symbol indicating the result of the determination is displayed. Is stopped. Then, when a special symbol indicating that it is determined that the special game is to be executed is stopped and displayed, a special game for opening the normally closed big prize opening is executed. In addition, as the display of the special symbol is started and ended on the special symbol display device, the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display means such as a liquid crystal display device after the decorative symbol is variably displayed. A variable effect for stopping and displaying, various notice effects, etc. are performed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-14593 A

  By the way, in the configuration in which a specific effect is executed fixedly at a specific timing, there is a risk that the interest of the game will be reduced.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can effectively suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  The present invention employs the following configuration in order to solve the above problems.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player and executes the special game according to the determination result, and is based on a predetermined operation. A setting screen display means for displaying the setting screen and a specific effect composed of a first partial effect and a second partial effect performed after the first partial effect can be executed at a predetermined specific timing. A specific effect executing means, and the specific effect executing means does not execute the specific effect and displays the setting screen when the specific timing comes when the setting screen is displayed. When the specific timing is reached when not, the specific effect is executed.

  According to this invention, it is possible to effectively suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Schematic front view of pachinko machine 1 Schematic plan view showing a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. Schematic perspective view showing the internal structure of the specific region 9 Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot and gaming state Explanatory drawing for demonstrating schematic structure of the rotation light apparatus 8. FIG. Explanatory drawing explaining the outline | summary of the light effect by the rotation light apparatus 8. System configuration diagram showing a configuration example of a gaming system of the mobile communication terminal 300 and the server 500 via the Internet The figure which shows the sequence of the game system Schematic diagram of a gaming system in which a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 are installed Explanatory drawing illustrating the flow of RTC production Explanatory diagram for explaining the execution start timing of performance performance, game performance, and drop performance Explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration example of performance series production Explanatory drawing showing the flow of performance series production Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of the display mode accompanying execution of a performance series production Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the performance performance performed with the pachinko machine 1 Explanatory diagram for explaining the public management table Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of performance performances after all new songs are released Explanatory diagram for explaining the presentation order management table Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a production sound data selection table Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a practice scenery direction data selection table Explanatory diagram for explaining the performance start notice effect data selection table Explanatory drawing for explaining the performance data selection table Explanatory diagram for explaining the next performance notice effect data selection table Explanatory diagram for explaining performance end effect data Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the loop group for new song A Explanatory diagram for explaining the schedule for the performance end performance of new song A before the release of all songs Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the performance end production schedule table of new song B before all songs are released Explanatory drawing for explaining the performance end production schedule table after all songs are released Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the result judgment process performed during a light effect Explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the change of the character which emerges by operation | movement of the rotation light apparatus 8, and its character color Explanatory drawing for demonstrating another example of the change of the character which emerges by operation | movement of the rotation light apparatus 8, and its character color A screen for explaining the setting of installation position information Screen diagram for explaining the flow of the drop effect Explanatory diagram illustrating the correspondence between the installation position information and the delay time with respect to the reference timing The 1st screen figure which illustrates the aspect of the drop effect started in order of an installation position in the plurality of pachinko machines 1 installed in the horizontal line The 2nd screen figure which illustrates the aspect of the drop effect started in order of an installation position in the plurality of pachinko machines 1 installed in the horizontal line The 3rd screen figure which illustrates the aspect of the drop effect started in order of an installation position in the plurality of pachinko machines 1 installed in the horizontal line The 4th screen figure which illustrates the mode of the drop production started in order of installation position in the plurality of pachinko machines 1 installed in the horizontal line Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the drop point determination table for determining the game point provided by execution of a drop effect. Explanatory diagram for explaining game series effects Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a game opening order pattern table Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a pattern number selection table Explanatory diagram for explaining the characteristics of each game effect Screen diagram showing an example of a bingo game display screen A screen diagram illustrating a state in which a bingo game is simultaneously performed in a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed in a horizontal row Screen shot illustrating the flow of a quiz game Screen diagram illustrating a state in which a quiz game is simultaneously performed in a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed in a horizontal row Screen diagram illustrating the flow of obstacle race Screen diagram illustrating a situation in which obstacle races are simultaneously performed in a plurality of pachinko machines 1 installed in a horizontal row Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the determination method of a support character Screen diagram showing an example of a ring-throw game display screen Explanatory drawing for demonstrating ring-throwing effect data Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a reproduction start point selection table The 1st screen figure which illustrates a mode that a ring-throw game is performed simultaneously in the plurality of pachinko machines 1 installed in a horizontal row The 2nd screen figure which illustrates a mode that a ring throwing game is performed simultaneously in the plurality of pachinko machines 1 installed in the horizontal line. The block diagram which shows the structural example of the control apparatus with which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. The block diagram which shows the structural example of the image sound control board 140 The flowchart which shows an example of the main process performed in the game control board 100 Detailed flowchart of the power-off monitoring process in step S914 in FIG. Detailed flowchart of the recovery processing in step S911 in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the game control board 100 A block diagram showing a configuration example of the main RAM 103 and various information stored in the main RAM 103 62 is a detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the pre-determination process in step S218 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. 64 is a detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S23 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the special symbol process in step S3 of FIG. 69 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S307 in FIG. 69 is a detailed flowchart of the stop process in step S319 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of normal symbol processing in step S4 of FIG. 62 is a detailed flowchart of the electric tulip process in step S5 of FIG. 62 is a detailed flowchart of the specific area release control process in step S6 of FIG. 62 is a detailed flowchart of the specific area release control process in step S6 of FIG. 62 is a detailed flowchart of the special winning opening opening control process in step S7 of FIG. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the special winning opening 13 and the production during the special game Detailed flowchart of long hit game control processing in step S72 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the short hit game control process in step S76 of FIG. 78 is a detailed flowchart of the game state setting process in step S745 in FIG. 78 and step S780 in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the production control board 130 81 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 of FIG. 81 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 of FIG. 81 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 of FIG. Block diagram showing a configuration example of the control ROM 144 The flowchart which shows an example of the main process performed in the image sound control board 140 Detailed flowchart of the initial setting process in step S2000 of FIG. 86 is a detailed flowchart of the installation position information setting process in step S2100 of FIG. 86 is a detailed flowchart of the elapsed time counting process in step S2200 of FIG. 86 is a detailed flowchart of the drop effect control process in step S2300 of FIG. 86 is a detailed flowchart of the game sequence effect control process in step S2400 of FIG. 91 is a detailed flowchart of the bingo game start process in step S2410 of FIG. 91 is a detailed flowchart of the quiz game start process in step S2430 of FIG. 91 is a detailed flowchart of the obstacle race start process in step S2450 of FIG. 91 is a detailed flowchart of the ring-throw game start process in step S2460 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the performance series effect control process in step S2500 of FIG. 96 is a detailed flowchart of the sound effect control process in step S2510 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the practice scenery effect control process in step S2530 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the performance start notice effect control process in step S2550 of FIG. 96 is a detailed flowchart of the performance effect control process in step S2570 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the next performance notice effect control process in step S2590 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the performance end effect control process in step S2610 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the RTC effect prohibition control process in step S2700 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of image output control processing in step S2800 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the effect sound output control process in step S2900 of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the image sound control board 140 106 is a detailed flowchart of the hold icon display process in step S3010 of FIG. 106 is a detailed flowchart of the change effect start process in step S3030 of FIG. Schematic diagram of the default table Schematic of new song A main table Schematic of new song B main table Schematic diagram of new song C main table Schematic diagram of new song D main table Schematic diagram of new song E main table Schematic diagram of new song L main table Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of the image data used for drawing of a background image Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the change of the appearance rate of various background images Schematic diagram of all-mode table Detailed flowchart of the opening effect start process in step S3050 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the short hit effect start processing in step S3070 of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the light effect control process performed in the lamp control board 150 Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of performance series production

  Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Example of schematic configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1]
First, a schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Here, FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is a schematic plan view showing a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1 / type 2 mixed type. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a game board 2 provided with an accessory related to winning or determination, and a frame member 3 surrounding the game board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined interval. The glass board and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which a game ball can flow down. Has been.

  When the player grasps the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 in the clockwise direction, the game balls stored in the tray 28 are guided to the launching device (not shown), and the game is performed with the hitting force according to the rotation angle of the handle 20. Fired into region 10. This game area 10 is provided with game nails, windmills, etc. (not shown), and the launched game balls are guided to the upper position in the game area 10 and contacted with the game nails, windmills, etc. It falls along the game board 2 while changing the moving direction. Note that the game ball is temporarily stopped when the player operates the stop button 22.

  The upper plate 28 stores game balls and prize balls supplied to the launching device. Below the upper plate 28, a lower plate 29 for collecting prize balls is provided. When the player operates the take-out button 23 arranged close to the lower plate 29, a part of the lower surface of the lower plate 29 is opened, and the game balls accumulated in the lower plate 29 are arranged below the lower plate 29. Drop into a box not shown.

  When the player performs a so-called “left strike” in which the handle 20 is rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 10 as exemplified by the arrow 31. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called “right strike” in which the handle 20 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right region in the game region 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32.

  A first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, two normal winning ports 14, and an electric tulip 17 are provided in the passing path of the left-handed game ball as a winning and determining role. In addition, in the passing path of the right-handed game ball, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 13, the two normal winning ports 14, the gate 16, the electric tulip 17, A blade member 90 is provided.

  The game ball launched into the game area 10 enters the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the big winning port 13, and the normal winning port 14 in the process of flowing down along the game board 2. And can win. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the winning location are paid out to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29. The game balls that have not won a prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

  The first start opening 11 as the first winning area is a start opening that is always open, and the second start opening 12 as the second winning area is operated by the electric tulip 17 as an ordinary electric accessory. It is a starting port that is opened only when In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball wins through the first start port 11 or when a game ball wins through the second start port 12, a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) Is determined, and the determination result is displayed on the display 4 (see FIG. 3) described later.

  In the following description, the determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the first start port 11 is referred to as “first special symbol determination”, and the game ball wins on the second start port 12 is a condition. The determination to be executed is referred to as “second special symbol determination”, and these determinations are collectively referred to as “special symbol determination”.

  The special winning opening 13 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the big prize opening 13 is provided at the opening of the big prize opening 13. The special winning opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when a predetermined jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot is stopped and displayed on the display 4, that is, when one kind of jackpot has occurred, the plate is operated to win a big prize opening. A special game of opening 13 is executed. For this reason, the player can obtain more prize balls by making a right strike during the special game compared to when the special game is not being performed. When a predetermined small winning symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small bonus is stopped and displayed on the display 4, the blade member 90 described later is operated to activate the specific winning opening 19 (see FIG. 4). A small hit game that releases) is executed. During the small hit game, the V winning opening 92 (see FIG. 4) is temporarily opened, and a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during this time, thereby generating two types of big wins. The big winning opening 13 is also opened when two types of jackpots are generated.

  The electric tulip 17 is disposed close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 is configured to change its posture between a closed posture (see FIG. 1) in which the pair of blade members closes the second starting port 12 and an open posture (not shown) in which the second starting port 12 is opened. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the second start port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 16, it is determined whether or not the second start port 12 is to be opened, although no prize ball is paid out. Here, when it is determined that the second start port 12 is to be opened, the operation of returning to the closed posture after the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 has maintained the open posture for the specified time is performed a predetermined number of times. As described above, the second starting port 12 is in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to win when the electric tulip 17 is not operated, whereas the game ball is easily won by operating the electric tulip 17. Become. In the following description, the determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the gate 16 is referred to as “ordinary symbol determination”.

  The normal winning opening 14 is always open like the first start opening 11 and is a winning opening through which a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out by winning a game ball. Unlike the first starting port 11 and the like, even if a game ball wins the normal winning port 14, no determination is made.

  On the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 5 to be described later, a specific area 9 that is temporarily opened according to the result of the special symbol determination is provided. The specific area 9 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

[Configuration example of operation means of the pachinko gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 2, the frame member 3 is provided with an effect button 26 and an effect key 27 as operation means operated by the player. The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information when pressed by the player. The production button 26 has a normal position where the upper surface is substantially the same height as the upper surface of the frame member 3 and a protrusion whose upper surface protrudes upward from the upper surface of the frame member 3 by a predetermined height (eg, 10 cm) The height can be changed between positions. The effect button 26 can be pressed at any height between the normal position and the protruding position. The production key 27 is a so-called cross key for the player to perform a selection operation. The up key for instructing up, the down key for instructing down, the left key for instructing left, It consists of a right key for indicating the right. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is a case where an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is performed. The effect buttons 26 and the effect keys 27 are also used for various setting operations.

[Configuration Example of Display 4]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. The display 4 mainly displays information related to special symbol determination and normal symbol determination. As shown in FIG. 3, the first special symbol display 41, the second special symbol display 42, and the first special symbol display. It has a symbol hold display 43, a normal symbol display 45, a normal symbol hold display 46, a game state display 47, and the like.

  When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 41 displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol, thereby displaying the first special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. The first special symbol display 41 has a jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit (1 type big hit), or a lost symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a loss. Is stopped.

  When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 displays the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol, thereby displaying the second special symbol determination. The determination result is notified. The second special symbol display 42 has a jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot (1 type jackpot), and a small hit indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot A losing symbol indicating that the symbol or the result of the second special symbol determination is losing is stopped and displayed.

  By the way, when a game ball is newly won at the first starting port 11 during the symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination or during the special game, the first special symbol determination and the symbol variation display are immediately triggered by this winning. Can not be executed. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment seems to hold the right of the first special symbol determination when the first special symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even if a game ball wins the first starting port 11. It is configured. The first special symbol hold indicator 43 displays the number of hold of the first special symbol determination held in this way.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, even if a game ball wins at the second starting port 12, the second special symbol determination and the symbol variation display cannot be executed immediately, that is, during the symbol variation display related to the special symbol determination or If a new game ball is won at the second starting port 12 during the special game, the second special symbol determination is not executed, and the right of the second special symbol determination is not held. For this reason, the display device 4 is not provided with a display device that displays the number of reserved second symbol determinations.

  When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by suspending and displaying the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol. Note that the normal symbol determination and the symbol variation display related to the normal symbol determination cannot be immediately executed even if the game ball passes through the gate 16, such as during the symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 45, for example. Judgment rights are withheld. The normal symbol hold display 46 displays the number of hold for normal symbol determination held in this way. The game state display 47 displays the game state at the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. The gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 is called “special symbol”, and the symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 45 is “normal symbol”. Shall be called.

[Configuration Example of Specific Area 9]
FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the specific region 9. The vertical direction 34 and the width direction 35 in FIG. 4 correspond to the vertical direction 34 and the width direction 35 in FIG. The specific area 9 is an area where the game ball is opened so as to be able to enter when a small hit occurs, and a blade member 90 that opens and closes the specific prize opening 19 is provided in the specific prize opening 19 that is the entrance. Yes.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a jackpot symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is “big hit” is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. And, the first special game is executed with one kind of big hit.

  In the present embodiment, as the first special game, two types of special games, a long winning game and a short winning game, are provided.

  The long winning game is a state in which the grand prize opening 13 is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, nine game balls are awarded to the big prize opening 13 or 29 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening 13 is opened). A long open round game in which the special winning opening 13 is closed after being maintained is executed a prescribed number of times. In the present embodiment, two types of long games, 4R long games where long open round games are executed four times and 7R long games where long open round games are executed seven times, are games per long for one kind of big hit. A winning game is provided. In the long open round game, if the large winning opening 13 is long open so that a plurality of game balls can enter, the large winning opening 13 is opened and closed with an opening pattern different from the opening pattern exemplified in the present embodiment. You may do.

  The short win game is a short-opening round game in which the big prize opening 13 is closed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) has elapsed after the big prize opening 13 is opened and then the big prize opening 13 is closed. Is a 15R short game that executes a specified number of times (for example, 15 times). The prescribed number of times is not limited to 15 as long as it is plural. Further, in the short open round game, if the game ball is opened shortly so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter, the open game opening 13 is opened and closed with an open pattern different from the open pattern exemplified in the present embodiment. It may be.

  On the other hand, when the small hit symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is “small hit” is stopped and displayed as the determination symbol on the second special symbol display 42, the blade member 90 is operated to operate the specific region 9. A small hit game that releases is executed. In this small hit game, the operation of the blade member 90 that closes the specific area 9 after maintaining the state in which the specific area 9 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 3.2 seconds) elapses after the specific area 9 is opened. It is executed a prescribed number of times (for example, once). In this way, when the small hit occurs, the game ball can enter the specific area 9.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the specific region 9 is provided with a guide member 91, a V winning opening 92, a lose winning opening 93, and a slide member 94. The guide member 91 guides the game ball that has entered the specific area 9 from the specific winning opening 19 to the V winning opening 92 or the lost winning opening 93. When a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 or the lose winning opening 93, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out. The lose prize opening 93 is always open, whereas the V prize opening 92 is normally closed by the slide member 94 and is opened only for a predetermined period after the specific prize opening 19 is opened. Specifically, in this embodiment, for example, 0.5 seconds after the specific winning opening 19 is opened, the slide member 94 slides to open the V winning opening 92, and 0.2 V from the opening of the V winning opening 92. When the second elapses, the slide member 94 returns to the original position shown in FIG. 3, and the V winning opening 92 is closed.

  Then, two kinds of big wins are generated when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 (V winning) during the opening period of the V winning opening 92, and the second special game including the already played small winning game is executed. The That is, when two types of big hits occur, the long hit game is executed following the small hit game. Specifically, following the small hit game that opens the specific area 9 for 3.2 seconds, the long win game consisting of three long open round games that open the long winning opening 13 long, or the big winning opening 13 A long hit game consisting of 14 long open round games that are long open is executed. That is, a total of 4R special games including one small hit game and three long open round games, or a total of 15R special games including one small hit game and 14 long open round games are executed. Is done.

  As described above, in the special game based on the 1st type jackpot, the first special game composed of the round game in which only the winning prize opening 13 is opened, whereas in the special game based on the 2nd type jackpot, the specific area 9 is opened. A second special game composed of a small hit game and a round game that opens the big prize opening 13 is executed. Note that if the game ball does not win the V winning opening 92 during the opening period of the V winning opening 92, the big winning opening 13 will not be opened following the small hit game, so the second special game is small. It will end with 1R of only winning games.

  In this embodiment, the case where the V winning opening 92 is opened and closed by the slide member 94 will be described. However, the V winning opening 92 is opened and closed by a blade member that rotates about the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an axial direction. It may be. In addition, the operation pattern of the blade member 90 during one small hit game (time and number of times for opening the specific winning opening 19) and the like can be appropriately changed.

[Description of changes in gaming state]
Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot and the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 5, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, the game is controlled in the “normal game state” or the “time-saving game state”.

  The “normal game state” is a normal game state in which a so-called electric chew support function is not given. Specifically, in the “normal game state”, when the second start port 12 is opened, the rate determined in the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively low rate (for example, 1/12), and the variation time of the normal symbol is set. A relatively long time (for example, 25 seconds) is set, and when it is determined that the second start port 12 is to be opened, the opening time of the second start port 12 is relatively short (for example, 0.1 second × 1). Game state set to (times).

  The “time saving gaming state” is a gaming state to which an electric chew support function is provided. Specifically, in the “short-time gaming state”, when the second start port 12 is opened, the rate determined in the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high rate (for example, 12/12), and the variation time of the normal symbol is set. A relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds) is set, and when it is determined that the second starting port 12 is to be opened, the opening time of the second starting port 12 is relatively long (for example, 0.3 seconds × 5). Game state set to (times). In other words, the “short-time gaming state” is a gaming state in which the second start port 12 is more easily controlled to the open state than in the normal gaming state.

  Due to the board configuration of the game board 2, a game ball launched into the left area of the game area 10 can win the first starting port 11, whereas a game ball launched into the right area of the game area 10 There will never be a prize at the starting port 11. Further, the second start port 12 is unlikely to be in an open state in the “normal game state”. For this reason, there is no merit of making a right strike in the “normal game state”. In this way, the “normal game state” is a left-side advantageous state in which it is easier to hit a jackpot than hitting a game ball in the left area of the game area 10 than in the right area. 5 is left-handed according to the message displayed at 5 and the voice guidance output from the speaker 24.

  When the player makes a left strike in the “normal game state” and the game ball launched into the left area of the game area 10 wins the first start port 11, the first special symbol determination is performed and the first special symbol is determined. After the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display 41, the determination symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when it is determined that the first special symbol is determined to be one type of big win, the first special symbol display 41 is stopped and the big special symbol indicating that is stopped and the first special game that opens the special winning opening 13 is performed. Executed. The gaming state is set at the end of the first special game in accordance with the type of jackpot symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 at the start of the first special game. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 5, the “normal gaming state” is continued at a rate of 50% after the first special game is finished, while the remaining 50% is changed from “normal gaming state” to “ The gaming state changes to “short-time gaming state”.

  In this embodiment, after the first special game is completed, the game is controlled in the normal game state, and as shown in FIG. 5, after seven long open round games are performed, as illustrated in FIG. There is a short per 7R when the normal gaming state is entered, and 50% of the one type large per 7R per short at this time. In addition, 15 times per 4R with time reduction that becomes short-time game state after four long open round games are performed as per time-short game where the game will be controlled in short-time game state after the end of the first special game. There are two types of short-acting short-term games that become short-time game states after the short-opening round game is completed, and 50% of the one-type game is one of these two types of short-timed games.

  When the gaming state shifts to the “time-saving gaming state”, the second start port 12 is more likely to be in the open state than in the “normal gaming state”. In addition, since most of the results of the second special symbol determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the second starting port 12 is a small hit, two types of big hits are likely to occur. As described above, the “short-time gaming state” is a right-side advantageous state in which a player hitting a game ball in the right region of the game area 10 is more likely to win a big hit than in a left-side region. 5 is performed in accordance with the message displayed on the screen 5 and the voice guidance output from the speaker 24.

  When the player makes a right strike in the “short-time gaming state” and the game ball launched into the right area of the game area 10 passes through the gate 16, normal symbol determination is performed. When it is determined that the second starting port 12 is opened when the normal symbol determination is performed in the “short-time gaming state”, the opening time of the second starting port 12 is longer than that in the “normal gaming state”. A game ball launched into the right area of the game area 10 easily wins the second starting port 12.

  In the “short time gaming state”, when the special symbol is not variably displayed and the game ball is won at the second starting port 12 when the special game is not being performed, the second special symbol determination is performed and the second special symbol display is performed. After the special symbol is variably displayed on the device 42, the determination symbol indicating the result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when it is determined that a small winning is determined by the second special symbol determination, the small special symbol indicating that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, and the specific area 9 and the V winning opening 92 are temporarily displayed. The small hit game to be opened is executed, and the game ball is won in the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game, so that two kinds of big hits are made, and the second special game including the small hit game is executed. Then, the game state is set at the end of the second special game according to the type of the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 at the time of the small hit game. In the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 5, the “short-time gaming state” is continued at a rate of 70% after the second special game is finished, while the remaining 30% is “from the short-time gaming state” to “ It will be returned to the “normal gaming state”.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5, as one short hit game and three long open times, the game will be controlled in the normal game state after the end of the second special game. There is a short time 4R per game that is in a normal gaming state after a round game is performed, and 30% of the two kinds of big time is per short 4R at this time. In addition, after the second special game, the game will be controlled in the short-time game state. As the short-time game, after one small hit game and 14 long open round games are performed, There are 2 types per 4R with a short time after a small hit game and 3 long open round games are performed per 15R with a short time, 70% per 2 types Is one of these two types of time savings.

  In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, even when the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) is performed 100 times in the “short-time gaming state”, the gaming state is not The “normal game state” is returned from the “short-time game state”.

[Configuration example of presentation means of pachinko gaming machine 1]
As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 has various effects such as a main liquid crystal display device 5, a sub liquid crystal display device 6, a rotating light device 8, a speaker 24, a board lamp 25, A frame lamp 37 (see FIG. 57) and the like are provided. The frame lamp 37 is not shown in FIG. 1 because it is built in the frame member 3.

  The main liquid crystal display device 5 (hereinafter abbreviated as “main liquid crystal 5”) is an image display device that displays an effect image, and is provided at a position that is easily visible by a player. The main liquid crystal 5 has, for example, a decorative symbol for notifying the result of the special symbol determination, a character or item for performing a notice effect, a hold display image indicating that the first special symbol determination is held (hereinafter referred to as “hold icon”). An effect image including various display objects such as “)” is displayed. Note that the hold icon according to the first special symbol determination is different from the normal display mode (for example, the color is different from normal) for the purpose of suggesting that the reliability for the jackpot may be relatively high. May be displayed.

  The sub liquid crystal display device 6 (hereinafter abbreviated as “sub liquid crystal 6”) is an image display device that displays an effect image, and is provided below the main liquid crystal 5. As the sub liquid crystal 6, one having a display screen smaller than that of the main liquid crystal 5 is used. The hold icon related to the first special symbol determination may be temporarily displayed on the sub liquid crystal 6 instead of the main liquid crystal 5.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 6 are both configured by a liquid crystal display device will be described. However, both or one of them is provided by another image display device such as an EL display device. It may be configured.

  The speaker 24 outputs music, sound, sound effects, etc. so as to synchronize with the display effect performed in the main liquid crystal 5 or the sub liquid crystal 6 and performs the effect by sound. The panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 perform various effects by light, such as changing a lighting or blinking pattern and changing a light emission color.

[Schematic configuration of rotating light device 8]
FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a schematic configuration of the rotary light device 8. As illustrated in FIG. 6, the rotating light device 8 includes a rotating body 80 that is formed in a rectangular shape that is longer in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and has an opening on the inside (FIG. (See (B)). A large number of color LEDs 811 and 821 are arranged outside the first support portion 81 and the second support portion 82 of the rotating body 80 in the longitudinal direction of the support portions 81 and 82 (vertical direction in FIG. 6). (See FIGS. 6A and 6C). A rotating shaft 84 is fixed below the base end portion 83 of the rotating body 80. The rotary shaft 84 is connected to a rotary light motor 85 (see FIG. 57) configured by, for example, a stepping motor so as to be able to transmit the drive, and the driving force of the rotary light motor 85 rotates via a drive transmission mechanism (not shown). By being transmitted to the shaft 84, the rotating body 80 rotates with the longitudinal direction of the support portions 81 and 82 as the axial direction.

  The rotating light device 8 causes the color LED 811 to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern in a state where the outside of the first support portion 81 is maintained in a posture (see FIG. 6A) in which the outside of the first support portion 81 faces the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , Perform with light. In addition, the rotating light device 8 causes the color LEDs 811 and 821 to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern while rotating the rotating body 80, so that characters appear in an area including the locus of the color LEDs 811 and 821, as in a so-called swing ride. Is possible. The rotating light device 8 causes the color LED 821 to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern in a state in which the outer side of the second support portion 82 is maintained in a posture (refer to FIG. 6C) facing the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By doing so, it is also possible to produce effects by light.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of the light effect by the rotating light device 8. FIG. 7A illustrates a state in which three characters “S”, “U”, and “R” are raised by the light effect by the rotary light device 8. FIG. 7B shows that eight characters “S”, “U”, “R”, “P”, “R”, “I”, “S”, and “E” are changed depending on the lighting effect by the rotating light device 8. The state which surfaced is illustrated. As illustrated in FIGS. 7A and 7B, in this embodiment, the color LEDs 811 and 821 emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern while rotating the rotating body 80, so that one Roman character is obtained. A light effect is performed in which the characters “SURPRISE” (surprise) are finally completed. This light effect is executed with a performance start notice effect and a performance effect (see FIG. 13), which will be described later.

[Variation production]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, when a game ball wins at the first start port 11, a first special symbol determination for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game is performed. In the first special symbol display 41, after the special symbol is variably displayed, the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the main liquid crystal 5, a variation effect is performed in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed as the special symbol is variably displayed (see FIG. 1), and the determination symbol is stopped and displayed. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination.

  During the fluctuating effects using such decorative symbols, various notice effects such as step-up effects and pseudo continuous notice effects are performed in addition to the so-called reach effects.

[Displaying the hold icon]
By the way, as described above, during the variation display of the special symbol related to the first special symbol determination or during the jackpot game, even if a new game ball is won at the first starting port 11, the first time triggered by this winning is the first. The special symbol determination and the special symbol variation display cannot be executed immediately. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the first special symbol determination or the special symbol variation display cannot be immediately executed even if a game ball wins at the first starting port 11, the first is within a range not exceeding a predetermined number. The special symbol determination is suspended, and the number of suspensions is displayed on the first special symbol retention display 43.

  On the other hand, the main liquid crystal 5 is provided with a hold icon display area for displaying a hold icon indicating that the first special symbol determination is put on hold, and the hold icon display area has a first special symbol hold display. The same number of hold icons as the number of holds indicated by the device 43 are displayed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the hold icon is newly displayed in the hold icon display area, the hold icon is displayed differently from the normal display in order to increase the player's expectation for the jackpot. There is a case where a so-called hold pre-reading effect is performed in which the display is performed in a mode or the display mode of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is changed as the game progresses.

  On the other hand, when the RTC effect to be described later is performed, the main liquid crystal 5 is used for the RTC effect, so that the RTC effect is being performed (for example, during the performance start notice effect shown in FIG. 13). Or during the performance performance), the hold icon is displayed not on the main liquid crystal 5 but on the sub liquid crystal 6. At this time, the hold icon is displayed smaller than when it is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5. For this reason, during the RTC effect in which the hold icon is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 6, the above-described hold prefetch effect is not performed.

[Game system configuration example]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the gaming system will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 8 is a system configuration diagram showing a configuration example of a gaming system of the mobile communication terminal 300 and the server 500 via the Internet.

  A portable communication terminal 300 possessed by a player playing a game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 can access a server 500 that stores a game history of games played on the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the Internet. Here, the “game history” includes the determination result of special symbol determination, the number of special symbol fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the number of times that jackpots are continuously played without changing the gaming state (number of consecutive chants), pachinko games It shows the history of various games such as points accumulated by games in the machine 1, but if it contains points, it does not necessarily need to contain all these information, only some information is included. There may be.

  In addition, although detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is comprised so that a point may be provided, for example, whenever the frequency | count of symbol fluctuation reaches a predetermined frequency. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is awarded points according to the fact that the performance performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 satisfies a predetermined condition, for example, a reach occurs continuously for two fluctuations.

  When a predetermined game start operation is performed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player, accumulation of game history information indicating a game history is started in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When a predetermined game end operation is performed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the player, the game history information accumulated between the game start operation and the game end operation is stored in the server 500. A QR code (registered trademark) is generated based on an access address (so-called homepage address), and the generated QR code is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5.

  The mobile communication terminal 300 is, for example, a camera-equipped mobile phone or a smartphone that can read a QR code, and reads the QR code displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 to access the server 500.

  On the other hand, when there is an access from the mobile communication terminal 300, the server 500 acquires game history information from the mobile communication terminal 300 and stores the game history information. More specifically, the server 500 receives terminal-specific information of the mobile communication terminal 300 (for example, a user ID for a mobile phone or the like, hereinafter referred to as “UID”) from the mobile communication terminal 300, and registers the information for each terminal-specific information. When the processing or authentication processing is performed and the authentication processing is successful, the game history information received from the mobile communication terminal 300 is stored. The concept of these processes will be described later based on the game system sequence of FIG.

  The server 500 includes a WEB server 501 for displaying game history information of a player on the screen of the mobile communication terminal 300, an application server 502 for performing player registration processing and authentication processing, and player game history information. And a database server 503 for storing. In this embodiment, the server 500 is composed of three servers. However, the server 500 may be composed of one server, or the server 500 may include a server having another function.

  In addition, although detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment, the game privilege according to the point which the player acquired may be provided. Here, as the game privilege, for example, a privilege that the player can arbitrarily change the background image displayed on the sub liquid crystal 6, or the player selects a predetermined music and plays the music As an example, a privilege that it is possible to make it possible to do so. Note that this game privilege includes execution of a jackpot game (acquisition of a game ball as a prize ball).

[Sequence in game system]
Next, the sequence in the gaming system described with reference to FIG. 8 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a sequence of the gaming system. In FIG. 9, the left column exemplifies the player's action or the processing executed by the portable communication terminal 300 possessed by the player, the center column exemplifies the processing executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the right column illustrates the server. The process which 500 performs is illustrated.

  A player carrying the mobile communication terminal 300 performs a predetermined game start operation using the effect button 26 and the effect key 27 when starting a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  When a predetermined game start operation is performed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 clears the game history information stored in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S401), generates a first QR code, and displays it on the main liquid crystal 5 (Step S402). Then, accumulation of game history information is permitted.

  On the other hand, the player reads the first QR code displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 with the mobile communication terminal 300 and accesses the server 500.

  When there is an access from the mobile communication terminal 300, the server 500 obtains the terminal unique information (UID) of the mobile communication terminal 300 that has accessed and the identification code (QR identification counter) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 included in the first QR code. A QR registration process is performed to register the acquired terminal unique information and identification code acquired from the mobile communication terminal 300 (step S501). And the display process for displaying the result of QR registration process on the portable communication terminal 300 is performed (step S502). Specifically, success image data for notifying successful registration is transmitted to the mobile communication terminal 300 when registration in the QR registration process is successful, and failure image data for notifying failure is registered when registration in the QR registration process fails. It transmits to the communication terminal 300.

  After confirming that the successful image data has been displayed on the mobile communication terminal 300, the player starts the game by rotating the handle 20. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs game processing such as special symbol determination, special symbol variation display, jackpot game, and various effects (step S403). The pachinko gaming machine 1 accumulates game history information corresponding to the game processing in step S403 from when the game start operation is performed until the game end operation is performed (step S404). Although detailed description is omitted, in this embodiment, game history information is accumulated in a control RAM 143 (see FIG. 57) provided in the image sound control board 140 described later.

  When the player quits the game, the player performs a predetermined game end operation on the pachinko gaming machine 1 by using the effect button 26 and the effect key 27.

  When a game end operation is performed by the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 generates a second QR code obtained by encoding the game history information stored in the control RAM 143, and displays the generated second QR code on the main liquid crystal 5. (Step S405).

  When the second QR code is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, the player reads the second QR code using the mobile communication terminal 300 and accesses the server 500 again.

  When the server 500 is accessed again from the mobile communication terminal 300, the server 500 newly acquires the terminal-specific information and the identification code of the pachinko gaming machine 1 included in the second QR code from the mobile communication terminal 300 that has accessed. It is authenticated whether or not the terminal unique information and the identification code correspond to the terminal unique information and the identification code of the pachinko gaming machine 1 registered in the process of step S501 (step S503). If the authentication process succeeds, the game history information included in the second QR code is stored in the database server 503 (step S504). Here, when the authentication in the authentication process is successful, the game history image data generated based on the game history information is transmitted to the mobile communication terminal 300 in order to display the game history information of the player on the mobile communication terminal 300 ( Step S505). On the other hand, when authentication in the authentication process fails, error image data for displaying on the mobile communication terminal 300 that the authentication has failed is transmitted to the mobile communication terminal 300.

  In addition, the player directly accesses the server 500 when he / she wants to confirm the game history information so far.

  When there is an access from the mobile communication terminal 300, the server 500 acquires the terminal specific information of the mobile communication terminal 300 that has accessed, and authenticates whether the acquired terminal specific information is registered in the database (step) S506). If it is terminal-specific information already registered in the database, game history image data for displaying game history information corresponding to the terminal-specific information is transmitted to the mobile communication terminal 300 (step S507).

  Up to this point, an example of a sequence in the gaming system has been described. However, the sequence in the gaming system is not limited to that described here, and other sequences can be used as long as the game history information can be appropriately stored in the server 500. You may make it accumulate | store game history information.

[Island composition]
FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of a gaming system in which a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 are installed. As illustrated in FIG. 10, in the so-called pachinko hall, one island is configured by arranging a plurality of (for example, 20) pachinko gaming machines 1 described above side by side. Each pachinko gaming machine 1 installed on this island is electrically connected to the island power supply device 600 through a common island power supply line. Therefore, by turning on the power of the island power supply device 600 with the individual power switch of each pachinko gaming machine 1 set to “ON”, a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on one island can be combined. Can be activated. As will be described in detail later, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment uses such a starting method to start the same performance all at once on all pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on the same island, or It has a configuration that allows the same productions to be started in order.

  In the following description, a total of pachinko gaming machine 1A, pachinko gaming machine 1B, pachinko gaming machine 1C, pachinko gaming machine 1D, pachinko gaming machine 1E, pachinko gaming machine 1F, pachinko gaming machine 1G, and pachinko gaming machine 1H. The effects performed using the eight pachinko gaming machines 1 will be described.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects are performed using the above-described activation method in accordance with the elapsed time from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 satisfying a predetermined time condition. In the description, these effects are collectively referred to as “RTC effects”.

[RTC production flow]
FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the RTC effect. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining execution start timings of a performance effect, a game effect, and a drop effect.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, an elapsed time counting process for counting an elapsed time since the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on is performed (see FIG. 89). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the RTC effect is performed when the elapsed time from power-on obtained by the elapsed time counting process satisfies a predetermined time condition. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, roughly divided, three types of RTC effects are performed: a performance effect, a game effect, and a drop effect.

  The performance performance (new song movie playback in the present embodiment) is an effect of announcing a new song as unpublished content in the pachinko machine 1, and the elapsed time from power-on is M hours (M is a natural number) It starts every time. For this reason, a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on one island are simultaneously activated using the island power supply device 600 to perform in these pachinko gaming machines 1 (for example, pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H). It is possible to start production simultaneously. In the present embodiment, twelve songs, new song A to new song L, are prepared as songs used for the performance performance, and the performance performance of the same new song is simultaneously started in a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1. This performance effect will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS.

  The game effect is an effect in which a game different from a normal game is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is started every time the elapsed time from power-on becomes M hours (M is a natural number) 30 minutes. For this reason, a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on one island are simultaneously activated using the island power supply device 600, so that a game is performed on these pachinko gaming machines 1 (for example, pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H). It is possible to start production simultaneously. In the present embodiment, there are four types of game effects, a bingo game, a quiz game, an obstacle race, and a ring throw game. Game effects for the same game are started simultaneously on a plurality of pachinko machines 1. Is done. This game effect will be described later in detail based on FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the performance effect and the game effect are alternately started every 30 minutes after the power is turned on. In addition, since it is an effect of announcing a new song, the effect is higher than the game effect. For this reason, it is preferable to perform the game effect first after performing the performance effect, rather than performing the game effect before the performance effect. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the performance performance and the game performance are alternately performed after the first performance performance is performed one hour after the power is turned on (see FIG. 11). For this reason, at the timing when 30 minutes have elapsed since the power was turned on, the performance effect has not been performed yet, so the game effect is not performed.

  The drop effect is an effect that drops the points described above and gives the points. For example, with respect to the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H shown in FIG. 10, the dropping effect is started immediately when a predetermined time condition is satisfied and a reference timing is reached in the pachinko gaming machine 1A installed at a predetermined reference position. . On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machines 1B to 1H are installed at positions different from the reference position, and information indicating that (installation position information described later) is set for each. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machines 1B to 1H, the drop effect is not immediately started even when the reference timing is reached, and the drop effect is started at a timing delayed by a time corresponding to the installation position from the reference timing. For this reason, in the following description, first, the start timing of the drop effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1A installed at the reference position will be described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1A, as shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, a drop effect is started every time the elapsed time from power-on is N hours 15 minutes (N is an integer). In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, a drop effect is started every time the elapsed time from power-on becomes N hours 45 minutes (N is an integer). Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the drop effect is started when the above-described game effect is completed. Thus, the drop effect is performed following the game effect, but the game effect is not performed as described above at the timing when 30 minutes have elapsed since the power was turned on. For this reason, only the drop effect of the game effect and the drop effect is performed at the timing when 30 minutes have elapsed since the power was turned on.

  In addition, as described above, this drop effect is an effect whose production start timing differs according to the installation position of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this embodiment, the start timing of the drop effect in the pachinko gaming machines 1B to 1H is set to a time delayed with respect to the start timing (reference timing) of the drop effect in the pachinko game machine 1A. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 35, the start timing of the drop effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1B is set to a time delayed by 0.5 seconds with respect to the reference timing, and the start of the drop effect in the pachinko game machine 1C is started. The timing is set to a time delayed by 1 second with respect to the reference timing, the start timing of the drop effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1D is set to time delayed by 1.5 seconds with respect to the reference timing, and the drop effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1E Is set to a time delayed by 2 seconds with respect to the reference timing, and the start timing of the drop effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1F is set to a time delayed by 2.5 seconds with respect to the reference timing, in the pachinko gaming machine 1G The start timing of the drop effect is set to a time delayed by 3 seconds with respect to the reference timing. It is set to a time that is delayed 3.5 seconds for start timing reference timing dropping effect in co gaming machine 1H. Every time 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the drop effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1A is started, the drop effects in the pachinko game machines 1B to 1H are started in order from the closest to the pachinko machine 1A.

  For this reason, a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed on one island are simultaneously activated using the island power supply device 600, so that the dropping effect is a pachinko gaming machine 1A, a pachinko gaming machine 1B, and a pachinko gaming machine. 1C, pachinko gaming machine 1D, pachinko gaming machine 1E, pachinko gaming machine 1F, pachinko gaming machine 1G, and pachinko gaming machine 1H are started in the order of 0.5 seconds.

  As described above, the drop effect is an effect in which the effect start timing can be delayed according to the installation position of each pachinko gaming machine 1. This drop effect will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

[Outline of performance series production]
Hereinafter, performance series effects including performance effects will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration example of performance series effects. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of performance series effects. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the change in the display mode accompanying the performance series performance.

  As described above, the start timing of the performance production is fixed at the timing when the elapsed time from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes M hours (M is a natural number). Production, practice scenery production, performance start notice production will be performed. In addition, when the performance effect is finished, the next performance notice effect and the performance end effect are performed. These partial effects that make up the performance series effects are effects that are not based on installation position information to be described later.

  The audio effect is an effect in which an effect sound for exciting the performance effect is output from the speaker 24 before the performance effect is started. Specifically, this audio effect is an effect in which, for example, a sound that one of members singing a new song reproduced in a performance effect calls to the audience is output from the speaker 24.

  The practice scenery effect is an effect that is performed next to the sound effect before the performance effect is started. In this embodiment, the practice scenery effect is performed so as to be continuous with the sound effect. Specifically, this practice scenery direction is an expression that expresses a scene in which a member who sings a new song to be reproduced in a performance production, for example, is practicing to complete the new song. This is performed using the speaker 24.

  The performance start notice effect is an effect performed next to the practice scenery effect before the performance effect is started. In the present embodiment, the performance start notice effect is performed continuously with the practice scenery effect. This performance start notice effect is specifically an effect for increasing the player's expectation for the start of the performance effect that will start soon, for example, mainly using the main liquid crystal 5 and the speaker 24. Is called.

  The next performance notice effect is an effect performed after the performance effect, and in the present embodiment, it is performed so as to be continuous with the performance effect. The next performance notice effect is specifically an effect for notifying the player of the next new song to be reproduced in the performance effect, and is mainly performed using the main liquid crystal 5 and the speaker 24.

  The performance end effect is an effect that is performed after the next performance notice effect. In the present embodiment, the performance end effect is performed continuously with the next performance notice effect. More specifically, this performance end effect is an effect showing that a member who sings a new song used for the performance effect looks back on the performance effect using the new song, and mainly the sub liquid crystal 6 and the speaker 24. It is done using.

[Regular production]
For example, when a game ball is won at the first starting port 11 and the first special symbol determination is performed in the “normal game state”, the special symbol fluctuates on the first special symbol display 41 in the main liquid crystal 5. As it is displayed, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner (see FIG. 15A). At that time, although not shown in the figure, various notice effects (for example, step-up effects) are performed using the main liquid crystal 5 and / or the sub liquid crystal 6, and predetermined fluctuations from the speaker 24. Sound is output. After that, as the special symbol indicating the result of the big hit determination is stopped and displayed on the first liquid crystal display 5, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the normal time, a normal performance using the main liquid crystal 5, the sub liquid crystal 6, the speaker 24, and the like is performed along with the game using the game ball. Here, the normal effect includes a variation effect associated with the above-described special symbol variation display, an effect associated with the jackpot game, and the like. These normal effects are effects that are not based on the installation position information.

[Flow of performance series production]
When the start timing of the sound effect is reached, as illustrated in FIG. 14, the process of outputting the sound effect of the sound effect from the speaker 24 is started. When the audio effect is finished, a process for displaying the effect image of the practice scenery effect on the main liquid crystal 5 and outputting the effect sound of the practice scenery effect from the speaker 24 is started.

  If the game is not progressing at the start timing of the practice scenery effect, that is, if, for example, a decorative pattern is not variably displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, the effect image of the practice scenery effect is immediately displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 in full screen. There is no particular problem. The same applies to the case where the jackpot game is not progressing at the start timing of the practice scenery effect.

  For this reason, when the game is not progressing at the start timing of the practice scenery effect, full screen display of the effect image of the practice scenery effect is started at the start timing (see FIG. 15C). Along with this, the decorative pattern that is displayed largely on the main liquid crystal 5 is displayed small, for example, in the lower left corner of the screen, and a slot effect using the sub liquid crystal 6 is performed. This slot effect is, for example, an effect that suggests a jackpot by gathering three predetermined bonus symbols, or suggesting the occurrence of a pseudo-continuous notice effect by gathering three predetermined replay symbols.

  On the other hand, in the case where the decorative design is variably displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 at the start timing of the practice scenery effect, if the full screen display of the effect image of the practice landscape effect on the main liquid crystal 5 is started at this start timing, the decoration design is displayed. Will be changed during the change, and there is a possibility that the game will be hindered.

  For this reason, when the decorative pattern is variably displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 at the start timing of the practice scenery effect, the effect image of the practice scenery effect is reduced and displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 (FIG. 15B). )reference). Then, after the decorative symbol variation display is completed (for example, at the start of the next variation), the display of the effect image of the practice scenery effect is switched from the reduced display on the main liquid crystal 5 to the full screen display (FIG. 15 ( B) and (C)).

  In the present embodiment, for the practice scenery effect, when the new song used for the subsequent performance effect changes, the effect content changes accordingly, but the effect execution time is fixed to 20 seconds ( (See FIG. 21).

  When the practice scenery effect is completed, a process of displaying the effect image of the performance start notice effect on the main liquid crystal 5 in full screen and outputting the effect sound of the performance start notice effect from the speaker 24 is started. In addition, since the main liquid crystal 5 is continuously used in the performance start notice effect, for example, a slot effect is performed in the sub liquid crystal 6 in accordance with a variable display of decorative symbols.

  In this embodiment, the practice execution time of the practice scenery effect is set to a relatively short time of 20 seconds. For this reason, when the decorative design is displayed in a variably displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 at the start timing of the practice scenery effect, a situation may occur in which the change display does not end even when the practice landscape effect ends. That is, the display of the decorative symbols can be continued until the performance start notice effect. In such a case, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, the effect image is always reduced and displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 while the practice scenery effect is being executed. Then, at the start timing of the performance start notice effect, the reduced display of the effect image on the main liquid crystal 5 is started. Then, after the decorative symbol variation display ends (for example, at the start of the next variation), the performance image display of the performance start notice effect is switched from the reduced display on the main liquid crystal 5 to the full screen display.

  Also, if the decorative symbol variation display does not end even when the performance performance start timing is reached, the performance image is always reduced and displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 during the performance start notice performance. Then, at the start timing of the performance effect, the reduced display of the effect image on the main liquid crystal 5 is started. After the decorative symbol variation display is completed (for example, at the start of the next variation), the performance image display of the performance effect is switched from the reduced display on the main liquid crystal 5 to the full screen display.

  In the present embodiment, there is one piece of effect data used for the performance start notice effect. For this reason, in the performance start notice effect, even if a new song reproduced in the performance effect changes, the content of the effect does not change, and the effect execution time is fixed to 90 seconds (FIGS. 13 and 22). reference).

  When the elapsed time from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is M hours (M is a natural number), for example, 10 seconds before, an effect display that counts down the remaining time until the performance effect is started is This is performed in the main liquid crystal 5 as a part.

  When this countdown effect ends and the elapsed time from power-on becomes M hours, a performance effect using the main liquid crystal 5 and the speaker 24 is started. Twelve new songs A to L are prepared as new songs to be used for this performance. These new songs have different playback times. For this reason, when the new music reproduced in the performance effect changes, the execution time of the performance effect changes (see FIG. 23).

  When the performance effect ends, the next performance notice effect using the main liquid crystal 5 and the speaker 24 is started. Thereby, for example, when the new song reproduced in this performance production is the new song A, the next new song is the new song B and the remaining days until the new song B is released for the first time are announced. Become.

  In addition, since this next performance notice announcement is to notify about the next new song used for the performance production, the production data is prepared for the number of new songs used for the performance production. The time is fixed at 15 seconds (see FIG. 24).

  When the next performance notice effect ends, the performance end effect using the sub liquid crystal 6, the speaker 24, etc. is started. As will be described in detail later, the performance content and the performance execution time of the performance end performance change each time the performance performance is performed (see FIG. 25).

  In addition, while the next performance notice effect is being performed, the slot effect is performed in the sub liquid crystal 6 in accordance with the change display of the special symbol. For this reason, if the performance end effect using the sub liquid crystal 6 is started immediately after the next performance notice effect is ended, the slot effect performed in the sub liquid crystal 6 is interrupted, which hinders the normal performance. There is a risk of it coming.

  For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the normal effect is being executed at the start timing of the performance end effect, the performance end effect is not the sub liquid crystal 6 until the normal effect being executed ends. The main liquid crystal 5 is used. Specifically, at the start timing of the performance end effect, the effect image of the next performance notice effect is displayed in full screen on the main liquid crystal 5. Therefore, the effect image of the performance end effect is reduced with respect to this effect image. The performance end effect is started in a superimposed manner. When the decorative display variation display and the slot effect are completed, the reduced display of the performance end effect effect image on the main liquid crystal 5 is switched to the full screen display of the performance end effect effect image on the sub liquid crystal 6. Along with this, the fluctuating effect performed in a state in which the decorative design is displayed large on the main liquid crystal 5 is resumed, and the state where the hold icon is displayed small on the sub liquid crystal 6 is changed to a state where the hold icon is displayed larger on the main liquid crystal 5. return.

[Details of performance performance before all songs are released]
Hereinafter, the details of the performance effect before the release of all songs will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of performance performance performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the state after the performance performance of the new song L to be released last for one week is “after the release of all songs”, and the above “before the release of all songs” refers to the state before the transition to this state.

  FIG. 16 illustrates a schedule of only the performance effects among the various RTC effects shown in FIG. In FIG. 16, the audio production, the practice scenery production, the performance start notice production, the next performance notice production, and the performance end production that constitute the performance series production together with the performance production are omitted. Also, the time shown in FIG. 16 indicates the start time of each performance effect on the assumption that the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on at 9:30 am on each day.

  For example, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on at 9:30 am on Saturday, May 10, 2014, the first time that the new song A is played at 10:30, one hour has passed since the power was turned on. The performance production is started (see FIG. 16A). Thereafter, the performance of the same new song A is started every time 1 hour elapses at 11:30, 12:30, and 13:30. In the present embodiment, such a performance effect of reproducing the new song A is continued for two weeks from May 10 (Sat), 2014 to May 23 (Fri) in the same year.

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, performance performance is performed at intervals of one hour, and for the new song A, this is continued for two weeks. For this reason, the player can enjoy the performance effect of reproducing the new song A over the above two weeks.

  Next, on May 24, 2014 (Saturday), the first performance effect of playing the new song B is started at 10:30 when one hour has passed since the power was turned on (see FIG. 16B). . Thereafter, the performance performance of the same new song B is started each time one hour elapses at 11:30, 12:30, and 13:30. In the present embodiment, such performance performance for reproducing the new song B is continued for one week from May 24, 2014 (Sat) to May 30 (Fri) in the same year.

  Thereafter, the process of performing the performance of the new song every time one hour has passed since the power-on is performed for one week for each new song, like the performance of the new song B. That is, when it is assumed that the pachinko machine 1 was introduced into the hall on May 10, 2014 (Saturday) as shown in FIG. 16 (A), the first week and the second week on the basis of this day Performs a performance using the new song A, performs a performance using the new song B in the third week, performs a performance using the new song C in the fourth week, and uses the new song D in the fifth week. Performance performance is performed, performance performance using the new song E is performed in the sixth week, performance performance using the new song F is performed in the seventh week, performance performance using the new song G is performed in the eighth week In the 9th week, performance performance using the new song H is performed, in the 10th week performance performance using the new song I is performed, in the 11th week performance performance using the new song J is performed, and in the 12th week. Performs a performance effect using the new song K, and a performance effect using the new song L is performed in the thirteenth week.

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, all 12 new songs are released one by one for about 13 weeks.

  By the way, when the music used for the performance effect is fixed, the player is bored with the performance effect by repeating the performance effect, and as a result, the interest of the performance effect may be lowered. Such a problem can also occur when a performance performance using the same musical piece is performed over a long period of time, for example, exceeding two weeks.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, since the new song used for the performance production is switched every week except for the performance performance of the new song A, the player gets bored with the performance production. It is possible to enjoy the performance performance without any problems, and it is possible to effectively suppress a decrease in the interest of the performance performance.

[Regarding the management of new song release]
FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a public management table stored in a control ROM 144 (see FIG. 58) of the image sound control board 140 described later. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the 13 weeks described above, the type of new song used for the performance performance is determined with reference to the public management table.

  As illustrated in FIG. 17, in the public management table, a new song type indicating the type of new song and a date and time at which performance performance is permitted are associated with each new song and stored with each new song. ing.

  For example, for the new song A, it is defined that the current date and time will shift to a state in which performance performance using performance performance data for the new song A is permitted at 7:00 am on May 10, 2014. Yes. In other words, unless the current date and time is past 7:00 am on May 10, 2014, performance performance itself is not permitted.

  Also, for example, for new song B, it is stipulated that the current date and time will shift to a state in which performance performance using performance performance data for new song B is permitted at 7:00 am on May 24, 2014. Has been. For this reason, when the current date and time is 7:00 am on May 24, 2014, performance performance data for new song B is obtained from the state in which performance performance using performance performance data for new song A is permitted. The state transitions to a state where execution of the performance performance to be used is permitted.

  Also, for example, for new song C, it is stipulated that the current date and time will shift to a state where performance performance using performance performance data for new song C is permitted at 7:00 am on May 31, 2014. Has been. For this reason, when the current date and time is 7:00 am on May 31, 2014, performance performance data for new song C is obtained from the state in which performance performance using performance performance data for new song B is permitted. The state transitions to a state where execution of the performance performance to be used is permitted. This is the same for the new songs D and later.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, specifically, the following processing is performed. That is, when the elapsed time from power-on becomes M hours (M is a natural number), information indicating the current date and time is acquired from the RTC 134 (see FIG. 57), and the current date and time indicated by this information corresponds to the permission state of which new song It is specified whether to do. For example, when the current date and time indicated by the RTC 134 is 10:30 am on May 12, 2014, the date and time is later than the date and time when the new song A is first released and before the date and time when the new song B is first released. Therefore, it is specified that it corresponds to the permission state of the new song A. For example, when the current date and time indicated by the RTC 134 is 3:30 pm on July 23, 2014, the date and time is later than the date and time when the new song K is first announced and the date and time when the new song K is first released. Therefore, the new song J is identified as being in the permitted state. In this way, when it is specified which new song is permitted, a performance effect is performed using the specified performance data for the new song.

[Regarding changes in regular performance as new songs are released]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a characteristic that the effect mode of the normal effect may change when the first performance effect of each new song is performed.

  For example, when the first performance performance of the new song A is performed (in the example shown in FIG. 16, the performance performance started at 10:30 am on Saturday, May 10, 2014), the content of each performance is as follows. It changes as follows. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 17, for example, only the default background image appeared until the first performance performance of the new song A was performed as the background image displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 during the special symbol variation display. However, after the first performance performance of the new song A is performed, the new song A background image created using the background image data related to the new song A appears. The same applies to new songs after the new song B. More details are as follows.

  That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has two types of background images, a first default background image and a second default background image, as background images displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 in a state where the performance performance has never been performed. Stored in advance. In this embodiment, before the first performance performance is performed on May 10, 2014 (Saturday), that is, the time before 10:30 am on May 10, 2014 (Saturday), or 2014 When it is necessary to display a background image on the main liquid crystal 5 on a day before May 10, 2012, either the first default background image or the second default background image is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5.

  On the other hand, when the first performance production of the new song A on Saturday, May 10, 2014 is performed, only one of the two background images of the first default background image and the second default background image can be used. The new song A background image created in advance based on the image data constituting the performance effect data (for example, movie data) for the new song A reproduced in the performance effect can be newly used.

  The new song A background image has a higher selection rate than the first default background image and the second default background image during the two weeks when the performance of the new song A is performed. It is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 at a higher rate than the background image.

  In this way, when the first performance performance of a new song is performed, a background image related to the new song can be displayed, so that the performance feels as if the performance performance had an effect on the normal performance. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of normal performance. The same applies to the opening effect of the long hit game and the ending effect of the long hit game, which will be described below.

  Also, in the opening of the long hit game, the default opening production was performed until the first performance performance of the new song A. The first performance performance of the new song B after the first performance performance of the new song A was performed. Until the performance performance is performed, an opening performance using image data and sound data related to the new song A is performed. The same applies to the ending effect of the long hit game. Thus, the opening effect and the ending effect in the long hit game are fixed to those based on the new song used for the current performance effect until the first performance effect of the new song to be released next is performed. That is, for example, after the first performance effect of the new song C is performed until the first performance effect of the new song D is performed, the opening effect and the ending effect of the new song C specification are performed.

  In addition, for example, in the selection of a song to be played in the 15R long hit game, only the default song that is not used for the performance performance can be selected until the first performance performance of the new song A is performed. After the first performance, the new song A can be selected. This is the same for new songs after the new song B, and every time the first performance performance is performed, new songs that can be selected by the player in music selection increase. For this reason, for example, the first performance of the new song L is the only song that can be selected for the first week after the first performance of the new song B is performed, the default song, the new song A, and the new song B. After the performance is performed, it is possible to select a default song and 13 songs including the new songs A to L.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the types of music that can be selected by the player during the long play or the like increase as the number of points increases regardless of whether or not the first performance performance of each new song is performed. It is configured as follows. The music increased here is different from the new music A to new music L used for performance performance. In this way, as the number of points increases, the number of songs that can be selected by the player increases. In actuality, it is possible to select 14 or more songs according to the total points earned by the player. is there.

  So far, how the production changes with the first performance production as an opportunity has been briefly described. However, in this embodiment, the change in production is a display list creation table (in order to create a display list ( This is realized by switching (see FIG. 85).

  In this embodiment, there are twelve new songs used for performance performances. However, in other embodiments, the number of new songs may be other than “12”. In addition, the case where the performance effect of the new song A is performed for two weeks and the performance effect of the new song B to the new song L is performed for one week will be described. These periods are exemplified in this embodiment. The period is not limited to this period, and may be another period.

  In this embodiment, the initial announcement permission time is set to 7:00 am for all new songs. However, in other embodiments, the first announcement permission time may be a time other than 7:00. In this embodiment, the initial announcement permission time is set to the same time for all new songs. However, in other embodiments, a different initial announcement permission time is set in advance for each new song. May be.

  In this embodiment, the new songs are announced in the order of the new songs A to L. In other embodiments, the new songs are announced in the order of announcements other than the announcement order illustrated in the disclosure management table. You may make it announce a new song.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the case where a performance production is performed from the first day of introduction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is described as an example, in another embodiment, a predetermined period (for example, one week) from the introduction Even if the elapsed time becomes M hours, a configuration in which the performance effect is not started may be adopted.

  In another embodiment, each new song may be announced at random. However, when such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to start a performance performance on a plurality of pachinko machines 1 at the same time, but the new songs played in the performance performance will be different from each other. There is a risk that the interest of the performance performance performed simultaneously in the pachinko machine 1 will be significantly reduced. For this reason, as described in the present embodiment, it is preferable that each new song is sequentially released according to a preset schedule.

[Details of performance performance after all songs are released]
Hereinafter, the performance performance after all songs are released will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of performance effects performed after the release of all the new songs where all the new songs have been announced. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the presentation order management table.

  FIG. 18 illustrates a schedule for only the performance effect among the various RTC effects shown in FIG. 11, as in FIG. 16. In FIG. 18, the audio production, the practice scenery production, the performance start notice production, the next performance notice production, and the performance end production that constitute the performance series production together with the performance production are omitted. Further, the times shown in FIG. 18 indicate the start times of the performance performances on the assumption that the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on at 9:30 am on each day.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is in a state in which all songs are released after the performance performance of the new song L to be released last is performed for one week from August 2, 2014. In other words, the new song used for the performance production was updated every week before the transition to the full song release state (two weeks for the new song A). New songs are updated every hour. For this reason, the performance performances of the new songs A to L performed over 13 weeks (= 2 weeks + 1 week × 11 songs) before the entire songs are released are performed within one day.

  For example, as illustrated in FIG. 18 (A), on August 9, 2014 (Saturday) corresponding to the first day after the transition to the all-track open state, one hour has elapsed since the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 The performance performance of the new song A started at 10:30, and the performance performance of the new song B started at 11:30 when 2 hours passed from turning on the power, and at 12:30 when 3 hours passed after turning on the power. As the performance production of the new song C is started, the new song used for the performance production changes every time the performance production is performed. The same applies to the day after August 10, 2014 (Sunday).

[Changes in performance performance after all songs are released]
The presentation order management table illustrated in FIG. 19 is a table for managing the type of new song used for performance performance in the state where all songs are open, and is stored in advance in the control ROM 144. In the presentation order management table, as shown in FIG. 19, the elapsed time from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the performance performance for each date after 8/9 (Sat), which is the first day of the release of all songs. Is associated with the type of new song used. In the present embodiment, the case where the presentation order management table is configured on the assumption that the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on around 9:30 am will be described as an example.

  For example, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on at 9:30 am on Saturday, August 9, the performance performance of the new song A starts at 10:30 one hour later, and 11 Performance performance of the new song B is started at 30:30, performance performance of the new song C is started at 12:30 three hours later, and performance performance of the new song D is started at 13:30 four hours later. Then, performance performance of the new song K started at 20:30 after 11 hours, performance performance of the new song L started at 21:30 after 12 hours, and at 22:30 after 13 hours have passed, The second performance of the new song A will begin.

  Regarding the determination of the performance performance in the state where all songs are open, the processing performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is as follows. That is, the type of new song used for the performance performance is determined by reading from the presentation order management table the type of new song corresponding to the elapsed time since power-on and the current date indicated by the RTC 134. For example, when the current date indicated by the RTC 134 is 8/11 and the elapsed time from power-on is 5 hours, “new song G” is read from the presentation order management table. In addition, when the current date indicated by the RTC 134 is 8/17 and the elapsed time from power-on is 8 hours, “new song D” is read from the presentation order management table.

  By the way, for 8/10 and later, if you consider adopting a configuration that performs performances on the same schedule as 8/9 (Sat), no matter what day the player plays, the hall opens. If you continue to play from closing to closing, you can enjoy the performance performance of all new songs.

  However, some players can play only during a specific time period (for example, after 18:00). If the above configuration is adopted for this, even if the game continues every day, The problem of not being able to enjoy the performance performance of all new songs arises. For example, regarding 8/9 (Sat), if the player starts playing from around 18:00, he can enjoy the performances of the new songs I to L and A, but cannot enjoy the performance of the new songs B to H. . On the other hand, if the reproduction schedule of the new song in the performance production is the same after the next day, the situation that the performance production of the new songs B to H cannot be enjoyed does not change.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 19, the order of the new songs is preliminarily shifted so that the order of the new songs used for the performance is regularly shifted one by one every day. It is prescribed. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 18 (A) to 18 (E), new songs A, New Song B, New Song C, New Song D are used for the performance performance that is performed first after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. , Will change with the new song E.

  For this reason, for example, performance performances of new songs B to D that could only be enjoyed after noon on 8/9 (Saturday) will be performed after 18:00 on 8/12 (Tuesday) three days later. (See FIG. 19). As described above, even a player who can play only in a specific time zone can enjoy performance performances of all new songs by continuing to go to the hall for some time.

  In this embodiment, in the state where all songs are open, a case will be described in which the type of new song used for performance production is determined with reference to the presentation order management table, but in other embodiments, by random lottery, You may make it determine the classification of the new music used for performance performance. However, when such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to start a performance performance on a plurality of pachinko machines 1 at the same time, but the new songs played in the performance performance will be different from each other. There is a risk that the interest of the performance performance performed simultaneously in the pachinko machine 1 will be significantly reduced. For this reason, as described in the present embodiment, it is preferable that each new song is sequentially released according to a preset schedule.

  The configuration of releasing each new song according to a preset schedule can also be realized without using the presentation order management table. Specifically, for example, information that can identify a new song used for the first performance after the power is turned on in a certain day is stored in the FeRAM 1451, and the first performance after the power is turned on the next day, A new song next to the new song indicated by the information stored in the FeRAM 1451 is selected and the reproduction is started. For example, when a performance performance is performed in the order of a new song A, a new song B, a new song C, a new song D,... On one day, information indicating the new song A is stored in the FeRAM 1451, and the next day, By starting the performance production from the new song B next to the new song A indicated by the information, the playback order of the new song can be easily shifted.

[Details of audio production]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 20, the audio production (see FIG. 13) performed first in the performance series production will be described. Here, FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect sound data selection table.

  Although not shown in the figure, in the control ROM 144 (see FIG. 58) of the image sound control board 140, the effect sound data selection table before release of all songs (see FIG. 20A) and the effect sound data after release of all songs. A selection table (see FIG. 20B) is stored in advance.

(All sound release effect sound data selection table)
The effect sound data selection table before the release of all songs is a table that is referred to in order to determine the effect sound data used for the audio effect in the state before the release of all songs, and the effect execution date on which the sound effect is executed. The type of effect sound data stored in the acoustic ROM 146 (see FIG. 58) is associated with the reproduction time required for reproducing the effect sound data.

  Although not shown in the figure, the sound ROM 146 stores 14 types of effect sound data for the new song A as effect sound data used for the sound effect performed before all songs are released. For new song B to new song L, seven types of effect sound data are stored respectively.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the state before the release of all songs, that is, from May 10, 2014 (Saturday) to August 8, 2014 (Friday), the effect sound data selection table before the release of all songs (FIG. 20A). Referring to (see), the effect sound data used for the sound effect is determined.

  As described above, the performance performance of the new song A is performed for two weeks from May 10 (Sat), 2014 to May 23 (Fri) in the same year (see FIG. 16). On the other hand, in the acoustic ROM 146, 14 types of effect sound data are stored in advance for the new song A, and in the effect sound data selection table before the release of all songs, a new song is recorded for May 10, 2014. The first effect sound data for A is associated, the second effect sound data for new song A is associated with May 11, 2014, and the third effect sound for new song A is associated with May 12, 2014. The data is associated, and the 14th effect sound data for new song A is associated with May 23, 2014.

  For this reason, in the above two weeks when the performance effect of the new song A is performed, the performance sound data used for the sound effect changes every day while the performance effect data used for the performance effect does not change. That is, the production mode of the audio production changes at intervals of one day, as is clear from the notation of FIG.

  As described above, the performance performance of the new song B is performed for one week from May 24, 2014 (Saturday) to May 30, 2014 (Friday) (see FIG. 16). On the other hand, in the acoustic ROM 146, seven types of effect sound data are stored in advance for the new song B, and the first effect sound data for the new song B is associated with May 24, 2014. The second effect sound data for new song B is associated with May 25, 2014, the third effect sound data for new song B is associated with May 26, 2014, and May 30, 2014 The seventh effect sound data for new song B is associated with the day.

  For this reason, in the above-mentioned one week when the performance effect of the new song B is performed, the performance sound data used for the sound effect changes every day while the performance effect data used for the performance effect does not change. The same applies to the effect sound data of the new song C to new song L.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the start timing of the performance effect is fixed to a timing at which the elapsed time from power-on is M hours (M is a natural number) (FIG. 12). reference). In addition, the performance execution time of the performance start notice performance performed immediately before the performance performance is fixed at 90 seconds (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Also, the execution execution time of the practice scenery effect performed immediately before the performance start notice effect is fixed to 20 seconds (see FIGS. 13 and 21). In the present embodiment, the sound effect, the practice scenery effect, the performance start notice effect, and the performance effect are continuously executed. For this reason, the end timing of the audio effect is fixed at a timing 110 seconds (= 20 seconds + 90 seconds) before the start timing of the performance effect.

  On the other hand, as is apparent from the notation of FIG. 20A, 91 types (= 14 types + 7 types × 11 songs) of effect sound data changed every day have different playback times. For example, the production sound data for the new song A changes depending on the day, such as a playback time of 83 seconds, 56 seconds, 67 seconds,.

  As described above, the end timing of the sound effect is fixed 110 seconds before the start timing of the performance effect, and the playback time of each effect sound data is different from each other. Further, the effect sound data used for the sound effect is used. Can be switched daily. For this reason, when considering the performance series production as a whole, the start timing of the performance series production changes every day based on the start timing of the performance production. For this reason, the production execution time of the entire performance series production also changes every day.

(Direction sound data selection table after all songs are released)
The effect sound data selection table after the release of all songs is a table that is referred to in order to determine the effect sound data used for the sound effect in the state after the release of all songs (all songs released state), and is used for the performance effect. The song types of the new songs A to L, the types of effect sound data stored in the acoustic ROM 146 (see FIG. 58), and the reproduction time required for reproducing the effect sound data are associated with each other.

  Although not shown in the figure, the sound ROM 146 stores four types of effect sound data for each of the new songs A to L as effect sound data used for sound effects performed after all songs are released. (See FIG. 20B). As is clear from the comparison between the reproduction time exemplified in FIG. 20A and the reproduction time exemplified in FIG. 20B, the sound ROM 146 has effect sound data used after all songs are released. However, it is stored separately from the production sound data used before all songs are released.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when all songs are released, for example, the performance effect of the new song A is started after 1 hour, and the performance effect of the new song B is started after 2 hours, The performance of the new song C starts 3 hours later, and the performance of the new song D starts 4 hours later. The new song used for the performance changes every hour.

  For this reason, when performance performances are executed in the order described above, the audio production of the new song A is performed prior to the performance performance of the new song A, and the performance of the new song B is performed prior to the performance performance of the new song B. Audio production is performed, audio production of new song C is performed prior to performance production of new song C, and audio production of new song D is performed prior to performance production of new song D. Specifically, for example, the first effect sound data for new song A is reproduced prior to the performance effect of the new song A, and the first effect sound data for new song B is reproduced prior to the performance effect of the new song B. Prior to the performance effect, the first effect sound data for the new song C is reproduced, and prior to the performance effect of the new song D, the first effect sound data for the new song D is reproduced.

  As described above, after all songs are released, the production mode of the sound effect changes at intervals of about one hour.

  By the way, the end timing of the audio effect is fixed to the timing 110 seconds before the start timing of the performance effect as a reference, not only before the release of all songs but also after the release of all songs. This is because the playback time of practice scenery effect data, which will be described later, and the playback time of performance start notice effect data do not change before and after the release of all songs (see FIGS. 21 and 22).

  On the other hand, in the all-music open state, as described above, the performance effect of the new song B is started at the timing when one hour has passed since the performance effect of the new song A was started. In order to correspond to this, before the performance of the new song A is started, the first performance sound data for the new song A is played after the release of all songs whose playback time is 72 seconds, and the performance of the new song B is started. The first effect sound data for the new song B after the release of all songs having a playback time of 63 seconds is played.

  Accordingly, the start timing of the performance series production changes every day before the opening of all songs, whereas the start timing of the performance series production changes every hour when the performance song production starts. It will change along with. In this way, as the state transitions from the state before the release of all songs to the state after the release of all songs, the span for changing the start timing of the performance series production based on the start timing of the performance production is greatly reduced. become. In addition, after all the songs are released, the performance execution time (time from the start to the end) of the entire performance series production also changes as the performance production starts every hour.

  In the state where all songs are released, the production sound data is switched every time the performance production of the same new song is performed. For example, an audio production related to the new song A will be described as an example. When the performance production of the new song A is performed after the audio production of reproducing the first production sound data for the new song A is performed after the release of all songs, the next is after the release of all songs. The performance of the new song A is performed after the sound effect for reproducing the second effect sound data for the new song A is performed, and then the sound effect for reproducing the third effect sound data for the new song A is performed after all the songs are released. The performance sound data is switched each time the performance performance of the same new song is performed such that the performance performance of the new song A is performed.

  Such effect sound data switching is performed by storing the previous sound in the storage means (for example, FeRAM 1451: see FIG. 58) that can hold information even when power is not supplied from the island power supply device 600 to the pachinko gaming machine 1. This is possible by holding information that can identify the type of production sound data used for production, and determining the type of production sound data used for the next audio production based on that information. is there.

  In this embodiment, regarding the sound production of the same new song, different production sound data is used before and after the release of all songs, but in the other embodiments, the same production sound data is used. It may be.

[Details of the practice scenery production]
Hereinafter, the practice scenery effect (see FIG. 13) performed second in the performance series effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the practice scenery effect data selection table.

  Although not shown in the figure, the CGROM 148 and the acoustic ROM 146 (see FIG. 58) include practice landscape effect data for new song A, practice landscape effect data for new song B, practice landscape effect data for new song C, and practice for new song D. As shown in the landscape effect data,..., Practice landscape effect data for each new song of the new songs A to L is stored for each new song (see FIG. 21).

  The control ROM 144 stores a practice scenery effect data selection table in advance. This practice scenery effect data selection table is a table that is referenced both before and after the release of all songs. As illustrated in FIG. 21, the song types of the new songs A to L, the CGROM 148, and the sound are selected. The type of practice scenery effect data stored in the ROM 146 is associated with the reproduction time required to reproduce the practice scenery effect data.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, regardless of whether or not all songs are released, practice scenery effect data corresponding to the new song used for the performance effect is selected. Specifically, before the elapsed time from power-on becomes M hours, the type of the new song used for the performance production that starts at the timing when the M time is reached is the public management table (or the presentation order management table). ) To identify. Then, by reading out the type of the practice scenery effect data corresponding to the specified new song from the practice scenery effect data selection table, the practice scenery effect data used for the current practice scenery effect is determined.

  For example, when it is specified that the performance effect of the new song B is performed at the timing when the elapsed time from the power-on is 1 hour, “practice scene effect data for new song B” is set as the type of effect data corresponding to the new song B. Read from the practice scenery effect data selection table. Further, for example, when it is specified that the performance performance of the new song C is performed at the timing when the elapsed time from the power-on is 2 hours, “practicing scene performance data for new song C” as the type of production data corresponding to the new song C Is read from the practice scenery effect data selection table.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, with respect to the practice scenery effect data prepared for each new song, the effect contents differ depending on the type of the new song, but the playback time is fixed to 20 seconds. (See FIG. 21). For this reason, the execution execution time of the practice scenery effect remains unchanged regardless of which new song the practice scenery effect is to be performed and whether or not all songs are released.

  On the other hand, the production content of the practice scenery production changes as follows. That is, before the release of all songs, during the first two weeks when the performance of the new song A is performed, the content of the practice scenery effect is fixed to the one dedicated to the new song A. As for the performance performance of the new songs after the new song B, since the new songs are switched every week, the production contents of the practice scenery effect also change every week.

  In addition, after the release of all songs, every time the elapsed time from power-on becomes M hours, a new song for the performance performance is switched. For this reason, the production content of the practice scenery production also changes as the performance production starts every hour.

[Details of performance notice]
Hereinafter, the performance start notice effect (see FIG. 13) performed third in the performance series effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the performance start notice effect data selection table.

  Although not shown in the figure, the CGROM 148 and the acoustic ROM 146 (see FIG. 58) store one type of performance start announcement data used regardless of the type of the new song.

  The control ROM 144 stores a performance start notice effect data selection table in advance. This performance start notice effect data selection table is a table that is referred to both before and after the release of all songs, and as shown in FIG. 22, the type of performance start notice effect data, the performance start notice, and the like. The reproduction time required for reproducing the effect data is associated with the reproduction data.

  As is clear from the notation of FIG. 22, there is one performance start notice effect data used for the performance start notice effect, and its reproduction time is 90 seconds. For this reason, regarding the performance start notice effect, both the effect execution time and the effect content are unchanged.

[About the performance data selection table]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 23, performance performance data used for the performance performance performed fourth in the performance series performance will be described. Here, FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the performance effect data selection table.

  Although not shown in the figure, the CGROM 148 and the sound ROM 146 (see FIG. 58) store performance performance data used for the performance performance one by one for each of the new songs A to L.

  The performance ROM data selection table is stored in the control ROM 144 in advance. This performance effect data selection table is a table that is referred to both before and after the release of all songs. As illustrated in FIG. 23, the music types of new songs A to L and the performance effect data The type and the reproduction time required for reproducing the performance performance data are associated with each other.

  In the pachinko machine 1, when starting the performance production, the type of new song used for the performance production is determined with reference to the public management table (see FIG. 17) or the presentation order management table (see FIG. 19). . As described above, when the type of the new song is determined, the performance effect data type corresponding to the new song type is read from the performance effect data selection table, and the performance effect data used for the current performance effect is selected. It will be.

  By the way, in this embodiment, performance production data for each new song has different production contents. For this reason, in the state before the release of all songs, the performance content of the performance performance is fixed to that of the new song A for the first two weeks, and the performance content changes every week for the performance performance after the new song B. Become. In addition, in the state after the release of all songs, every time a performance effect is performed, the type of new song that is reproduced in the performance effect changes, so the content of the effect changes every hour.

  Further, as is clear from the notation of FIG. 23, the performance performance data have different playback times. Therefore, when viewed as the performance series production as a whole, the performance execution time of the performance series production (from the start to the end) every week, except for the first two weeks, before the release of all songs, as with the performance contents of the performance production. The performance execution time of the performance series production changes every hour after all songs are released.

[Details of the next performance notice]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the next performance notice effect (see FIG. 13) performed fifth in the performance series effect will be described. Here, FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the next performance notice effect data selection table.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the CGROM 148 and the sound ROM 146 (see FIG. 58) store the next performance notice effect data used for the next performance notice effect one by one for each of the new songs A to L. ing.

  The control ROM 144 stores a next performance notice effect data selection table in advance. This next performance notice effect data selection table is a table that is referred to both before and after the release of all songs. As illustrated in FIG. 24, the song types of the new songs A to L and the next performance are displayed. The type of the notice effect data is associated with the reproduction time required for reproducing the next performance notice effect data.

  In the pachinko machine 1, at the end of the performance production, a new song next to the new song reproduced in the performance production is specified. For example, when the performance performance of the new song A ends, the new song B is specified as the next new song, and when the performance performance of the new song J ends, the new song K is specified as the next new song. In this way, when the next new song is specified, the type of the next performance notice effect data corresponding to the type of the new song is read from the next performance notice effect data selection table and used for the next performance notice effect of the next performance. Next performance announcement data will be selected.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the next performance notice effect data for each new song has different contents of the effect. In the state before the release of all songs, the performance of the next performance notice announcement performance is fixed to that of the new song B for the first two weeks when the performance performance of the new song A is performed. The contents of the notice effect change every week. In addition, in the state after all songs are released, every time a performance effect is performed, the type of new song to be played in the next performance effect changes, so the effect content of the next performance notice effect also changes every hour. Become.

  On the other hand, as is apparent from the notation of FIG. 24, the reproduction time of the next performance notice effect data is all fixed to 15 seconds. For this reason, the production execution time of the next performance notice production is unchanged.

[Details of performance end performance]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25 to FIG. 29, the performance end effect (see FIG. 13) performed in the sixth (last) performance series effect will be described. FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining performance end effect data. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a loop group for new song A. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a schedule of performance end effects of the new song A before all songs are released. FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a performance end effect schedule table for the new song B before all songs are released. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a performance end effect schedule table after all songs are released.

[Performance end performance of new song A before all songs are released]
In the CGROM 148 and the acoustic ROM 146 (see FIG. 58), as shown in FIG. 25, 12 types of performances from the first performance end effect data for the new song A to the twelfth performance end effect data for the new song A corresponding to the new song A End effect data is stored, and six types of performance end effect data from the first performance end effect data for new song B to the sixth performance end effect data for new song B corresponding to new song B are stored. As for new song C to new song L, similar to new song B, six types of performance end effect data are stored in CGROM 148 and acoustic ROM 146, respectively.

  When the next performance announcement effect following the performance performance of the new song A is finished, in order to start the performance end effect corresponding to the new song A, reproduction of any of the above 12 types of performance end effect data for the new song A is started. . In addition, when the next performance announcement effect following the performance performance of the new song B ends, reproduction of any of the above six types of performance end effect data for the new song B starts in order to start the performance end effect corresponding to the new song B Is done. The same applies to the performance end effects of the new songs C to L.

  The control ROM 144 stores a loop group table for new song A (see FIG. 26). Here, the loop group indicates a combination of some performance end effect data among the 12 types of performance end effect data from the first performance end effect data for new song A to the twelfth performance end effect data for new song A. It is. As illustrated in FIG. 26, in the loop group table for new song A, a group type indicating the type of loop group and a group configuration indicating a combination of performance end effect data constituting the loop group are stored in association with each other. ing.

  For example, as illustrated in FIG. 26, for example, the first group includes the first performance end effect data for new song A, the second performance end effect data for new song A, the third performance end effect data for new song A, and the new song A use. 4th performance end effect data, 5th performance end effect data for new song A, and 6th performance end effect data for new song A. In addition, for example, the third group includes the third performance end effect data for new song A, the fourth performance end effect data for new song A, the fifth performance end effect data for new song A, the sixth performance end effect data for new song A, and the new song A. 7th performance end effect data for the new song A and 8th performance end effect data for the new song A.

  For example, on Saturday, May 10, 2014, when the first performance performance of the new song A is performed, every time the performance end performance is performed, by switching and using the performance end performance data constituting the first group, The production mode (production content and production execution time) of the performance end production is changed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 27, the performance effect of the new song A started at the timing when the elapsed time from the power-on is 1 hour ends, and the performance end effect with the next performance notice effect. Is performed, the first performance end effect data for new song A constituting the first group is reproduced. Next, if the performance effect of the new song A that starts at the timing when the elapsed time from power-on is 2 hours is finished and the performance end effect is performed with the next performance notice effect, the first group is formed. The second performance end effect data for the new song A is reproduced. Then, when the performance effect of the new song A started at the timing when the elapsed time from power-on is 3 hours is finished and the performance end effect is performed with the next performance notice effect interposed therebetween, the first group is formed. The third performance end effect data for new song A is reproduced.

  Thus, on the first day when the performance performance of the new song A is performed for the first time, the performance end performance used for the performance end performance in the order of the first, second, third, fourth, fifth and sixth. Data is switched. When the use of the performance end effect data constituting the first group is completed, the performance end effect data is switched again in the order of the first, second, third, fourth, fifth and sixth. become. Therefore, on the first day, although the first to sixth performance end effect data for the new song A are used, the seventh to twelfth performance end effect data for the new song A are not used.

  The performance end effect data based on the loop group is switched in the same manner on and after the second day, but the performance end effect data of different loop groups is used depending on the day. For example, the performance end effect data constituting the second group is used on the second day, May 11, 2014 (Sunday). Specifically, the performance end effect data used for the performance end effect is switched in the order of the seventh, eighth, ninth, tenth, eleventh, and twelfth. When the use of the performance end effect data constituting the second group is completed, the performance end effect data is switched again in the order of the seventh, eighth, ninth, tenth, eleventh, and twelfth. (See FIG. 26 and FIG. 27).

  As shown in FIG. 25, the performance end effect data of each new song has different times required for reproduction of the performance end effect data. In addition, even in the performance end effect data of the same new song A, the effect contents are different from each other. For this reason, by switching the performance end effect data based on the loop group as described above, the performance content of the performance end effect of the new song A every time the performance effect of the new song A started every hour is performed, It is possible to change both the production execution time and the production execution time.

  In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 27, even if the elapsed time from power-on when the performance effect is started is the same, the performance end effect is performed using the performance end effect data different depending on the day. For example, the performance end effect corresponding to the performance effect of the new song A started at the timing when 3 hours have passed since the power-on will be described as an example. The third performance end effect data is used on the first day (5/10). On the second day (5/11), the ninth performance end effect data is used, and on the third day (5/12), the fifth performance end effect data is used. Data is used.

  Therefore, even a player who can play only during a specific time period can enjoy the performance end effects of various new songs A.

  By the way, from the 1st day to the 14th day, since the new song used for the performance production is fixed to the new song A, the performance performance may be repeated, so that the interest of the performance series production may decrease.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the state before the release of all songs, the production content and production execution time of the audio production change every day, and the production content and production execution time of the performance end production are of the new song A. It changes each time the performance is performed. For this reason, it is possible to suppress effectively the fall of the production effect by the performance production of the new music A being repeated.

[Performance end performance of new song B before opening all songs]
The control ROM 144 stores a performance end effect schedule table for new song B for managing the performance end effect of the new song B before the release of all songs (see FIG. 28). In the performance end effect schedule table for the new song B, the execution date when the performance end effect for the new song B is executed before the release of all songs corresponds to the elapsed time since the start of the performance end effect for the new song B It is attached.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, the following processing is performed at the start of the performance end performance of the new song B before all songs are released. That is, first, the current date is specified based on information from the RTC 134. Moreover, the elapsed time from power-on when the performance effect of the same new song B performed prior to the performance end effect of the new song B is started is specified. Then, referring to the performance end effect schedule table for new song B, the type of performance end data for new song B corresponding to the identified current date and the elapsed time since the power on of the performance effect of new song B is read out. .

  For example, on the first day (5/24) when the first performance performance of the new song B is performed, if the performance performance of the new song B is performed at the timing when three hours have passed since the power is turned on, the next performance performance is finished. Information indicating the third performance end effect data is read as the type of the performance end effect data used for the performance end effect executed with the performance notice effect interposed therebetween. Also, for example, on the third day (5/26), when the performance performance of the new song B is performed at the timing when 9 hours have passed since the power is turned on, the performance performance is performed after the performance performance is finished, with the next performance notice effect. As the type of performance end effect data used for the performance end effect, information indicating the fifth performance end effect data is read.

  Thus, for the new song B, the performance end effect data used for the performance end effect is switched every time the performance end effect is performed, so the performance effect of the performance series effect by repeating the performance effect of the new song B is performed. Can be effectively suppressed.

  Although not shown in the figure, a performance end effect schedule table similar to the new song B is also provided for the new song C to new song L. Like the new song B, each time a performance effect is performed, it corresponds. The content of the performance of the performance to be performed changes. For this reason, also with regard to the performance end effect after the new song C, it is possible to expect an effect of suppressing a decrease in performance effect of the performance series effect.

[Ending performance of new song A to new song L after all songs are released]
The control ROM 144 stores a performance end effect schedule table for managing performance end effects corresponding to each performance effect after all songs are released (see FIG. 29). In this performance end production schedule table, after all the songs have been released, the performance end performance of the new song A to new song L is executed, the elapsed time from the power-on when the performance production starts, and the new song A to new song L Are associated with information indicating the type of performance end effect data of each new song.

  As illustrated in FIG. 29, for example, on the first day (8/9), which is the first day of the release of all songs, it corresponds to the performance effect of the new song A that starts at the timing when one hour has passed since the power was turned on. The first performance end effect data for new song A is selected as the performance end effect data. Also, the first performance end effect data for new song F is selected as performance end effect data corresponding to the performance effect of new song F that starts at the timing when 6 hours have passed since the power-on on the same day. The same applies to the second and subsequent days.

  As illustrated in FIG. 29, for example, for the new song C, performance end effect data used for the performance end effect of the new song C from the first day (8/9) to the third day (8/10). However, the first performance end effect data for the new song C, the second performance end effect data for the new song C, and the third performance end effect data for the new song C change. That is, by changing the execution date, the content of the effect and the execution time of the effect are different even if the performance is the end performance of the same new song.

  In addition, the method for selecting the performance end effect data for the performance end effect after the release of all songs is the same as the method for selecting the performance end effect data for the performance end effect of the new song B before the release of all songs, except that the referenced table is different. Therefore, detailed description here is omitted.

  In this embodiment, the main liquid crystal 5 is basically used for the practice scenery effect, the performance start notice effect, the performance effect, and the next performance notice effect, and the sub liquid crystal 6 is used for the last performance end effect. (See FIG. 14). That is, the image display means used for the performance series production is switched from the main liquid crystal 5 to the sub liquid crystal 6 as the performance end production is started after the next performance notice production is finished. That is, the production execution means used for the performance series production changes during the performance series production. Thereby, a big change can be brought about in a performance series production, As a result, the interest property of a performance series production can be improved effectively.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal 5 is continuously used to perform the practice scenery effect, the performance start notice effect, the performance effect, and the next performance notice effect. There is a problem that it cannot be used for normal productions. On the other hand, when the main liquid crystal 5 is used also with respect to the performance end effect, the above-described period becomes further longer, and the problem may be further increased.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal 6 is used for the performance end effect, so that the normal effect using the main liquid crystal 5 may be resumed with the start of the performance end effect. As a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a problem that the period during which the main liquid crystal 5 cannot be used for normal production becomes longer.

[Details of light production]
Next, a light effect performed using the rotary light device 8 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a result determination process performed during the light effect. FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a change in characters and the character color that emerges due to the operation of the rotary light device 8. FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining another example of the change of the character that appears due to the operation of the rotary light device 8 and the character color.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the light effect whose outline is described based on FIG. 7 is performed over the execution period of the performance start notice effect and the execution period of the performance effect. More specifically, this light effect is obtained by rotating the rotator 80 in a predetermined rotation pattern while causing the color LEDs 811 and 821 (see FIG. 6) to emit light in a predetermined light emission pattern in the rotating light devices 8 on the left and right sides of the main liquid crystal 5. It is an effect that is performed by rotating.

  As illustrated in FIG. 30 (A), the light effects in the present embodiment are the turn stage, the first stage, the second stage, the third stage, the fourth stage, the fifth stage, the sixth stage, and the seventh stage. , And the ninth stage of the eighth stage.

  Here, the roaring stage is a stage in which a roaring effect operation using the rotary light device 8 is performed for the purpose of increasing the player's expectation for the performance effect. In this embodiment, the turning effect operation of the rotary light device 8 in the turning stage is performed during the performance start notice effect execution period.

  The effects of the first to eighth stages in the light effect are effects in which the character color is changed step by step while increasing the characters that appear by the operation of the rotary light device 8 one by one. There are a plurality of performance patterns.

(Result judgment processing)
During the light effect, a result determination process is executed when starting the effect at each stage. This result determination process includes the result determination process and the hold result determination process. Here, in the result determination process, specifically, when the variation display of the symbol related to the first special symbol determination is being performed, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed when the variation display of the symbol ends. This is a process for determining whether or not. In other words, it is a process for determining whether or not the so-called change is a big hit before the change ends (during the change).
On the other hand, when the first special symbol determination is held, the hold result determination process is determined to be a jackpot, whether or not there is anything to be determined to be a jackpot in the hold. This is a process for determining whether or not there is a hold having a relatively high reliability with respect to the jackpot of something that does not exist.

  The result determination process is not performed when the symbol related to the first special symbol determination is not variably displayed when the stage effect is started. Further, the hold result determination process is not performed when there is no hold of the first special symbol determination when the stage effect is started.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when starting the stage of each stage of the light stage, both the above result determination process and the hold result determination process are performed, and the result of the process is determined. Based on this, the effect mode during the light effect (in this embodiment, the light emission pattern of the rotary light device 8) is controlled.

(When there is no big hit)
Regarding the first stage to the eighth stage, if the result of the result determination process performed when starting the stage effect is not confirmed at any stage, the light effect is produced in the following effect mode. Executed. That is, as shown in FIGS. 30A and 31, one white character “S” appears in the first stage effect, and two blue “SU” characters appear in the second stage effect. In the third stage, three yellow “SUR” characters emerge, in the fourth stage, four orange “SURP” characters emerge, and in the fifth stage, the green “SURPR” 5 characters emerged, 6 characters of purple “SUPRIR” emerged in the 6th stage production, 7 characters of red “SURPRIS” emerged in the 7th stage production, red in the 8th stage production The effect aspect of the light effect changes so that the seven characters “SURPRIS” emerge.

  As described above, when the presence of the jackpot cannot be confirmed at any stage, the character “SURPRISE” is not completed finally, and the character color is developed only to red. Hereinafter, such a pattern of a light effect is referred to as a “basic pattern”.

(If you can confirm the presence of jackpot in the 8th stage)
When the result of the result determination process performed when starting the stage 1 to stage 7 stage productions is that there is no jackpot, the stage 1 to stage 7 stage effects As is clear from a comparison between FIG. 30A and FIG. 30B, it is performed in the same manner as the effects from the first to the seventh stage in the basic pattern (see FIG. 31 and FIG. 32A). ). Then, as a result of the result determination process performed when starting the stage 8 stage production, if the presence of the “big hit” can be confirmed, stage 8 is different from the stage pattern production in the 8th stage. Production is performed in a manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30B and FIG. 32A, an effect is produced in which eight characters of “SURPRISE” in rainbow colors emerge.

(If you can confirm the presence of jackpot in the fifth stage)
If the result of the result determination process performed when starting the stage 1 to stage 4 stage effects is that no jackpot exists, the stage 1 to stage 4 stage effects As is clear from the comparison between FIG. 30A and FIG. 30C, it is performed in the same manner as the effects from the first to the fourth stage in the basic pattern (see FIG. 31 and FIG. 32B). ). Then, as a result of the result determination process performed at the start of the fifth stage production, if the presence of the “big hit” can be confirmed, the fifth stage is different from the production in the fifth stage of the basic pattern. Production is performed in a manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30C and FIG. 32B, an effect is produced in which eight characters of “SURPRISE” in rainbow colors emerge.

  In FIG. 30C and FIG. 32B, the light effect ends in the fifth stage because the rotating light device 8 is used for the jackpot effect, but in other embodiments. Even if the jackpot game is started, the use of the rotary light device 8 is not used for the production, and the fifth stage production is performed until the performance production is completed (for example, until the eighth stage production of the basic pattern is finished). ) It may be continued.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the presence of a jackpot cannot be confirmed even if the stage is developed during the light effect, the effect is performed with the basic pattern. On the other hand, if the presence of a jackpot can be confirmed when starting the stage production, an irregular pattern production mode different from the basic pattern in which 8 characters of “SURPRISE” appear in rainbow colors. A light production will be performed. Thus, the light effect performed by the rotating light device 8 has a function as a suggestion effect that suggests the existence of a jackpot during the RTC effect (here, during the performance effect). If the presence of a jackpot is confirmed, a light effect in the irregular pattern production mode is not necessarily performed, and whether or not the light production in the irregular pattern production mode is performed using random numbers You may make it determine by lottery. As a specific method, when the presence of a jackpot is confirmed, the first lottery for determining whether or not to switch the production mode from the basic pattern to the irregular pattern is performed, and when it is determined to switch to the irregular pattern For example, performing the second lottery on which stage to switch to the irregular pattern is given.

  This light effect can be started at the same time in a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 by using the activation method described above. For example, in any of the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H (see FIG. 10), if none of the pachinko gaming machines 1 is confirmed to have a jackpot during the light production, the light of the basic pattern is used in all the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H. The production is performed in synchronization. For this reason, it is possible to effectively enhance the performance effect of the performance start notice effect accompanied by the light effect and the performance effect.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machines 1 </ b> A to 1 </ b> H, when the presence of a jackpot is confirmed during the light production in any of the pachinko gaming machines 1, only the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a production mode different from other pachinko gaming machines 1. A light production will be performed. In the present embodiment, as the rotary light device 8 emits light in rainbow, the frame lamp 37 built in the frame member 3 also emits light in rainbow, and the effect buttons 26 in the normal position are displayed simultaneously or slightly. Jump out to move to the protruding position with a delay. On the other hand, when the player depresses the effect button 26, for example, a not-shown effect actor performs a predetermined operation, which suggests that a jackpot exists. For this reason, the pachinko gaming machine 1 with which the jackpot is reserved can be made to stand out, and the player who is playing with the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the jackpot can clearly recognize the existence of the jackpot, It is possible to obtain a high production effect.

  In this embodiment, the effect button 26 that can change the state between the normal position and the protruding position is used as an input means for causing the player to clearly recognize the presence of the jackpot. It may be a thing. For example, an effect button that is partly or wholly configured to be rotatable with respect to the frame member 3 is provided as input means, and as the rotary light device 8 emits light in rainbow colors, a part of the effect button or All of them may be rotated, and in response to this, when the player depresses the effect button, the effect actor performs a predetermined operation. In addition, for example, an optical sensor capable of detecting a player's hand held over the game board 2 is provided, and an effect of prompting the player to hold the hand as the rotating light device 8 emits light in rainbow colors. It is also conceivable to perform control such that a display is performed, and when the player's hand is detected by the optical sensor, the effector performs a predetermined operation. As described above, the input means used for the light effect in the irregular pattern may be any as long as it can input information indicating that the player has performed some action. Absent.

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal 5 is used for the performance start notice effect and the performance effect during the performance period, so the first special symbol determination is performed during the performance period. The hold icon related to is displayed in a small size on the sub liquid crystal 6 instead of the main liquid crystal 5, and as a result, the hold pre-reading effect using the hold icon is not performed. In other words, execution of the hold prefetching effect using the hold icon is suppressed by executing the performance start notice effect or the performance effect.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the effect mode of the light effect may be changed based on the result of the result determination process described above. That is, in the performance performance execution period, the performance execution means used for the performance based on the result of the reservation prefetching is changed from the main liquid crystal 5 to the rotating light device 8. For this reason, it is possible to perform a prefetch effect that changes to a hold prefetch effect using a hold icon, and a rotating light with higher visibility than the hold icon displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 outside the performance effect execution period. Since the pre-reading effect is performed using the device 8, the effect of the pre-reading effect can be effectively enhanced.

  In the above description, the case where the effect mode of the light effect is changed to a pattern different from the basic pattern only when the presence of the jackpot is confirmed as a result of the above-described result determination process has been described. As a result, even if a loss is reported, but the determination result that the first special symbol determination with a relatively high reliability for the jackpot is put on hold is obtained, the effect pattern of the light effect is the basic pattern May be controlled in a different pattern.

  Although not shown in the figure, for example, when the result of the hold result determination process indicating that a high-reliability hold exists when starting the stage 3 effect shown in FIG. For example, the same effect as the fifth stage effect in the basic pattern is performed. That is, in the third stage, the third stage effect and the fourth stage effect in the basic pattern are skipped, and the fifth stage effect in the basic pattern is performed. Explaining in more detail, in the third stage, there is an effect in which three yellow “SUR” characters appear, but instead, an effect in which five green “SURPR” characters emerge. Is called.

  In this way, when there is a highly reliable hold, the light effect is performed in a pattern different from the basic pattern. On the other hand, in the other adjacent pachinko gaming machines 1, since the basic pattern light effect is basically performed, only the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a high-reliability hold exists in other pachinko gaming machines. The light effect will be performed in a different manner from the machine 1.

  For this reason, the player is playing the game based on the fact that the effect mode of the light effect in the other pachinko machine 1 is different from the effect mode of the light effect in the other pachinko machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it can be easily recognized that there is a possibility that the jackpot is refraining.

  Here, a case has been described in which step skipping is performed in which a stage in the basic pattern is performed at a stage after the presence of a highly reliable hold has been confirmed. On the other hand, at the stage where the existence of a high-reliability hold was confirmed, the number of characters that emerged at that stage was not changed, but only the character color was changed to a higher one. Also good.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, if the presence of the jackpot is confirmed, the production mode is changed from the stage production, but in other embodiments, the stage after the stage where the presence of the jackpot can be confirmed. The stage of the light effect may be changed from the stage. Further, when the presence of a highly reliable hold can be confirmed, the same control may be performed.

  In addition, it is needless to say that the lighting effects described in the present embodiment are merely examples, and the lighting effects (rotation patterns, emerging characters, emission colors, etc.) may be other effects. Yes.

[About installation location information]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to set installation position information and execute an effect based on the installation position information (in this embodiment, an RTC effect). Here, the installation position information is information indicating a position where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the hall. More specifically, for example, when a position where a pachinko gaming machine 1A or another pachinko gaming machine 1 can be installed is set as a reference position (see FIG. 10), each pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed with respect to the reference position. Information indicating a relative position.

As will be described in detail later, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to delay the start of production with respect to a predetermined reference timing based on the installation position information. As this effect, for example, a “drop effect” described later is given as an example.
Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is configured to be able to change a part of the effect based on the installation position information. An example of this effect is an “obstacle race” described later.
Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to change the reproduction start point of the effect data used for the effect based on the installation position information. An example of this effect is a “ring-throwing game” to be described later.

[Setting method of installation position information]
Next, a method for setting the installation position information will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 33 is a screen diagram for explaining the setting of the installation position information.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment has a RAM clear switch 104 (see FIG. 57). This RAM clear switch 104 is a switch for instructing deletion of information stored in the main RAM 103 (see FIG. 57), and as shown in FIG. 57, a game control board 100 for controlling the progress of the game. It is mounted directly on.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the individual power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned “ON” while the RAM clear switch 104 is being pressed, a power recovery screen (an example of a setting screen) indicating that the RAM clear preparation state is set is main. It is displayed on the liquid crystal 5 (see FIG. 33A). As shown in FIG. 33 (A), this power recovery screen indicates that the wording “RAM clearing in preparation” and the effect button 26 may be pressed when initializing the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. A message, a message prompting the RAM clear switch 104 to be pressed again, and the like.

  On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is pressed while the power recovery screen is displayed, the initial setting or the like is performed inside the pachinko machine 1, and the screen of the main liquid crystal 5 is not displayed from the power recovery screen. The normal screen shown in FIG.

  If the RAM clear switch 104 is not pressed and the effect button 26 is not pressed while the power recovery screen is displayed, the display of the power recovery screen is maintained. That is, when neither the RAM clear switch 104 nor the effect button 26 is pressed, the display of the power recovery screen is continued for one hour or two hours.

  On the other hand, when the effect button 26 is pressed while the power recovery screen illustrated in FIG. 33A is displayed, an installation position setting screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 (see FIG. 33B). This installation position setting screen is a setting screen for setting the number of pachinko gaming machines 1 arranged in a row and the installation position where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed with respect to a predetermined reference position.

  As illustrated in FIG. 33B, the installation position setting screen displays a first cursor indicated by a solid right triangle, and the upper key (or the lower key) of the effect key 27 is pressed. As a result, the first cursor moves upward (or downward). Thereby, a state in which the number of pachinko gaming machines 1 arranged in one row can be selected (a state illustrated in FIG. 33B) and a state in which the installation position of the pachinko gaming machines 1 can be selected (FIG. 33 ( It is possible to switch between a state illustrated in C), a state where the determination button can be selected, and a state where the return button can be selected.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (B), when the first cursor is positioned on the upper side, that is, in a state where the number of pachinko gaming machines 1 arranged in a row can be set, the left key of the effect key 27 The number can be reduced by pressing the button, and conversely, the number can be increased by pressing the right key of the effect key 27. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, the upper limit number that can be selected as the number of pachinko gaming machines 1 arranged in a row is set to “8”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (C), when the first cursor is positioned on the lower side, among the number of pachinko gaming machines 1 arranged in a row, this pachinko gaming machine 1 is from the left. It is possible to select the order of position. Specifically, by depressing the left key of the effect key 27, the numerical value indicating the position from the left can be decreased, and conversely, from the left by depressing the right key of the effect key 27. The numerical value indicating the position of the position can be increased.

  In addition, on the installation position setting screen, an effect image in which a plurality of images simulating the pachinko gaming machine 1 are arranged in the horizontal direction is displayed, and a second cursor (upward pointing) that can be moved in the left-right direction is displayed below the effect image. Of white triangles: see FIG. 33C). The second cursor moves to the left and right with respect to the effect image by increasing or decreasing a numerical value indicating the position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the left.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the upper limit number that can be selected as the number of pachinko gaming machines 1 arranged in a row is set to “8”, a numerical value indicating the number from the left The upper limit is also “8”.

  For example, when setting the installation position in the pachinko gaming machine 1B (see FIG. 10), as illustrated in FIG. 33 (C), the number of units arranged in one row is selected as “8”, and from the left The lower key of the effect key 27 is pressed in a state where the numerical value indicating the second position is selected as “2”. As a result, the first cursor is not displayed and the enter button is highlighted. On the other hand, when the effect button 26 is pressed to instruct the selection of the decision button, eight pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H are installed in one row, and from the left of these pachinko gaming machines 1 The installation position information indicating that it is the second pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored.

  Further, for example, when setting the installation position in the pachinko gaming machine 1F, the number arranged in one row is selected as “8”, and the numerical value indicating the position from the left is selected as “6”. What is necessary is just to perform selection operation of a determination button. Further, for example, when setting the installation position in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the number arranged in one row is selected as “8”, and the numerical value indicating the position from the left is selected as “1”. What is necessary is just to perform selection operation of a determination button.

  As described above, the number of units arranged in one row and the numerical value indicating the position from the left are the pachinko machine 1 installed position information for which the setting operation for the installation position setting screen has been performed. It is stored in the storage means of the gaming machine 1.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, FeRAM 1451 (see FIG. 58) is used as a storage unit that stores installation position information. For this reason, even if it will be in the state where electric power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the outside, it is possible to hold the installation position information.

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, it is possible to set the installation position information stored in the FeRAM 1451 based on a predetermined operation.

  In order to set the installation position information, it is necessary to display the installation position setting screen using the RAM clear switch 104 that can be operated only when the frame member 3 is opened. For this reason, basically, the player cannot set the installation position information. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the player from arbitrarily changing the installation position information, and as a result, an effect based on the installation position information is not appropriately performed.

  On the other hand, in the case where there is an effect that does not hinder the player from arbitrarily changing the installation position information, the player can arbitrarily set the installation position information for the effect. May be adopted. That is, it is possible to set the installation position information by operating the effect button 26 and the effect key 27 without using the individual power switch or the RAM clear switch 104 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that cannot be basically operated by the player. Various configurations may be adopted.

  In the present embodiment, the position where the pachinko gaming machine 1A located at the leftmost of the eight pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H arranged in the horizontal row is set as the reference position. However, the reference position may be another position. That is, the reference position may be a position where the pachinko gaming machine 1H located on the rightmost side among the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H is installed. Further, the reference position may be a position where the pachinko gaming machine 1D (or pachinko gaming machine 1E) located near the middle of the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H is installed.

[Details of the drop effect]
Next, the drop effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 39. Here, FIG. 34 is a screen diagram for explaining the flow of the drop effect. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the correspondence between the installation position information and the delay time with respect to the reference timing. FIG. 36 is a first screen diagram illustrating an example of a drop effect that starts in the order of installation position in a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed in a horizontal row. FIG. 37 is a second screen diagram illustrating an example of a drop effect that starts in the order of installation positions in a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed in a horizontal row. FIG. 38 is a third screen diagram illustrating an aspect of a drop effect that starts in the order of installation positions in a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed in a horizontal row. FIG. 39 is a fourth screen diagram illustrating an example of a drop effect that starts in the order of installation position in a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed in a horizontal row.

  The drop effect is an effect that drops the points described above and gives the points. In the present embodiment, the drop effect is performed in the following manner. That is, at the start timing of the drop effect, first, the first character of three characters imitating a so-called UFO appears on the upper left of the screen of the main liquid crystal 5 (see FIG. 34A). These three characters move rightward on the screen of the main liquid crystal 5 while being connected to each other. For this reason, as time passes, all three characters appear in the main liquid crystal 5 (see FIGS. 34B and 34C), and finally disappear from the screen of the main liquid crystal 5. (See FIG. 34D).

  In the process of moving these three characters, a numerical value indicating the points necessary for the player to obtain a gaming privilege at the timing of moving from these three characters to the center in the width direction on the screen of the main liquid crystal 5 is included. A heart mark image (hereinafter referred to as a “heart image”) is dropped (see FIG. 34C). This heart image falls as time passes.

  Although not shown in the figure, the main liquid crystal 5 displays point information indicating the total value of points acquired by the player, and the point information indicates when the above heart image falls down. The point indicated by the heart image is added to the total value, and processing for updating the point information is performed. Then, every time the point information satisfies a predetermined condition, game benefits given to the player are added. For example, when the point indicated by the point information reaches 200 points, the first music piece can be selected and played back, and when the point indicated by the point information reaches 400 points, the second music piece is selected and played back. It becomes possible.

  In the present embodiment, the time from when the three characters appear on the screen of the main liquid crystal 5 until they disappear is set to about 0.5 seconds.

  This drop effect is an effect that starts at a start timing according to a predetermined time condition and installation position information stored in the FeRAM 1451. Here, as shown in FIG. 12, the predetermined time condition is that the elapsed time from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 30 minutes, the elapsed time from the power-on is N hours (N is an integer) It is either 15 minutes, the elapsed time from power-on is N hours (N is an integer) 45 minutes, or the game effect end timing.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when installation position information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed at a predetermined reference position is stored in the FeRAM 1451, it is dropped at a timing that satisfies any of the above three time conditions. Production will be started. Here, “installation position information indicating that the apparatus is installed at a predetermined reference position” is the position from the left on the installation position setting screen illustrated in FIGS. 33 (B) and 33 (C). Is the installation position information stored in the FeRAM 1451 in response to the determination operation being performed in a state where “1” is selected as the numerical value indicating “”.

  On the other hand, when the installation position information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed at a position different from the predetermined reference position is stored in the FeRAM 1451, the timing that satisfies any of the above three time conditions (Hereinafter referred to as “reference timing”), the drop effect is not started, and the drop effect is started at a start timing delayed by a time corresponding to the installation position information with respect to the reference timing.

  Hereinafter, the start timing of the drop effect in the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H will be described based on FIG. In the following description, in any of the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H, the number arranged in one row is set to “8”, and in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the number is located from the left. Is set to “1”, and in the pachinko gaming machine 1B, the numerical value indicating what position is located from the left is set to “2”, and in the pachinko gaming machine 1C is located from the left. Is set to “3”, and in the pachinko gaming machine 1D, the numerical value indicating the position from the left is set to “4”, and in the pachinko gaming machine 1E, the position from the left is positioned. Is set to “5”, and in the pachinko gaming machine 1F, the numerical value indicating the position from the left is set to “6”, and in the pachinko gaming machine 1G, the position from the left is positioned. Or Be numerical values are set to "7", in the pachinko machine 1H numerical value indicating whether located number from the left is assumed to be set to "8". That is, the description will be made on the assumption that the installation position information is appropriately set in each of the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H.

  In the control ROM 144 (see FIG. 58) of each pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 35, a numerical value indicating the position from the left relative to the reference position and the start of the drop effect for the reference timing A delay time table in which timing delay times are associated is stored. In each pachinko gaming machine 1, the start time of the drop effect is determined by reading the delay time corresponding to the installation position indicated by the installation position information stored in the FeRAM 1451 from this delay time table.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1A, installation position information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1A is installed at a predetermined reference position (the leftmost position on the island in FIG. 10) is stored in the FeRAM 1451. For this reason, the delay time of the start timing of the drop effect with respect to the reference timing is 0 seconds, and in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the drop effect is started at the reference timing. That is, the timing when the elapsed time from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is 30 minutes, the timing when the N hours (N is an integer) is 15 minutes, and the elapsed time is N hours (N is an integer) 45 minutes. The drop effect is started at the timing or the end timing of the game effect.

  That is, in this embodiment, there are three types of reference timings related to the drop effect, and when any one of these three types of reference timings is reached, the drop effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1A is started. .

  The power-on here is not the timing when the individual power switch of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is “ON”, but the state where the individual power switch of each of the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H is “ON”. This is the timing when the island power supply 600 is turned on. The same applies to the other pachinko gaming machines 1B to 1H described below.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1B, installation position information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1B is installed at the second position from the left is stored in the FeRAM 1451 with reference to the reference position where the pachinko gaming machine 1A is installed. The delay time of the start timing of the drop effect with respect to the reference timing is 0.5 seconds (see FIG. 35). For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1B, the drop effect is started at the timing when 0.5 seconds have elapsed with respect to the reference timing. That is, when the elapsed time from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1B reaches N hours (N is an integer) 15 minutes, a drop effect is started 0.5 seconds later. When the elapsed time is N hours (N is an integer) 45 minutes, the drop effect is started 0.5 seconds later. When the game end effect ends, the drop effect starts 0.5 seconds after the end timing.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1C, installation position information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1C is installed at the third position from the left is stored in the FeRAM 1451 with reference to the reference position where the pachinko gaming machine 1A is installed. The delay time of the start timing of the drop effect with respect to the reference timing is 1.0 second (see FIG. 35). For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1C, the drop effect is started at the timing when 1.0 second has elapsed with respect to the reference timing. That is, when the elapsed time from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1C becomes N hours (N is an integer) 15 minutes, the drop effect is started 1.0 seconds later. When the elapsed time reaches N hours (N is an integer) 45 minutes, the drop effect is started 1.0 seconds later. When the game end effect ends, the drop effect starts 1.0 seconds after the end timing.

  In the pachinko machines 1D to 1H, the start timing of the drop effect with respect to the reference timing is different from 1.5 seconds, 2.0 seconds, 2.5 seconds, 3.0 seconds, and 3.5 seconds, respectively. Is started at the start timing delayed with respect to the reference timing, similarly to the pachinko gaming machines 1B and 1C. For this reason, the description regarding the start timing of the drop effect performed in the pachinko gaming machines 1D to 1H is omitted.

[Flow of drop production]
First, at the reference timing, a drop effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1A is started (see FIG. 36A). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 36A, the first of the three characters appears on the upper left of the screen of the main liquid crystal 5. The first character moves to the right as time passes, and accordingly, the second character and the third character appear in order (FIG. 34A and FIG. 34). (See (B)).

  When about 0.25 seconds have elapsed since the start of the drop effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1A (= reference timing), the three characters displayed on the screen of the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A are displayed in the width direction on the screen. It reaches the center (see FIG. 36B). Along with this, dropping of a heart image (hereinafter also referred to as “point drop”) for giving points to a player who plays a game with the pachinko gaming machine 1A is started. In FIG. 36B, in the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the heart image for giving “3” points to the player starts to fall. A method for determining the points to be given to the player will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 36C illustrates a state when 0.4 seconds have elapsed from the reference timing. As described above, when 0.4 seconds elapse from the reference timing, only the last one of the three characters appears on the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and the heart image is displayed. Is lowered to a position slightly below the center of the screen in the vertical direction of the main liquid crystal 5.

  As is clear from the notation of FIG. 36C, in the pachinko gaming machine 1B in which the start timing of the drop effect is delayed by 0.5 seconds with respect to the reference timing, the drop effect has not yet started. The same applies to the pachinko gaming machine 1C whose start timing is delayed by 1.0 second with respect to the reference timing and the other pachinko gaming machines 1D to 1H.

  When 0.5 seconds have elapsed from the reference timing, a drop effect in the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B is started (see FIG. 36D). At this time, in the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the heart image falls to the lower end of the screen, and immediately after that, as the heart image is erased from the screen, the main liquid crystal of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The point information (not shown) displayed in 5 is updated.

  When 0.75 seconds have passed since the drop effect was started in the pachinko gaming machine 1A at the reference timing, the three characters displayed on the screen of the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B are displayed in the center in the width direction on the screen. (See FIG. 37A). Accordingly, point dropping is started in the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B. FIG. 37A shows a state in which a heart image for giving 30 points to a player starts to be dropped. The point throwing performed on the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B is different from the timing at which point dropping is started and the points given to the player are different (they may be the same). This is performed in the same manner as the drop effect performed on the main liquid crystal 5 of the machine 1A.

  FIG. 37B illustrates a state when 0.9 seconds have elapsed from the reference timing. Thus, when 0.9 seconds elapse from the reference timing, only the last one of the three characters appears on the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B, and the heart image is displayed. Is lowered to a position slightly below the center of the screen in the vertical direction of the main liquid crystal 5.

  As is clear from the notation of FIG. 37 (B), in the pachinko gaming machine 1C in which the start timing of the drop effect is delayed by 1.0 second with respect to the reference timing, the drop effect has not yet started. The same applies to the pachinko gaming machine 1D whose start timing is delayed by 1.5 seconds with respect to the reference timing and the other pachinko gaming machines 1E to 1H.

  When 1.0 second elapses from the reference timing, a drop effect in the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1C is started (see FIG. 37C). At this time, in the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B, the heart image falls to the lower end of the screen, and immediately after that, as the heart image is erased from the screen, the main liquid crystal of the pachinko gaming machine 1B. The point information (not shown) displayed in 5 is updated.

  When 1.25 seconds have elapsed since the drop effect was started in the pachinko gaming machine 1A at the reference timing, the three characters displayed on the screen of the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1C are centered in the width direction on the screen. (See FIG. 37D). Accordingly, point dropping is started in the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1C. FIG. 37D shows a state in which a heart image for giving 48 points to a player starts to be dropped. The point dropping performed on the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1C is different from the timing at which point dropping is started and the points given to the player are different (they may be the same). This is performed in the same manner as the drop effect performed on the main liquid crystal 5 of the machine 1A.

  In the present embodiment, in each of the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H, when a drop effect is started, a result determination process similar to that performed in the light effect described above is performed. This result determination process includes the result determination process and the hold result determination process.

Here, in the result determination process, specifically, when the symbol variation display for the first special symbol determination is being performed at the start of the drop effect, the jackpot symbol is stopped when the symbol variation display ends. This is a process for determining whether or not to be displayed. In other words, it is a process for determining whether or not the so-called change is a big hit before the change ends (during the change).
On the other hand, when the first special symbol determination is held at the start of the drop effect, the hold result determination process is a big hit whether or not there is anything to be determined to be a big hit in the hold. This is a process of determining whether there is a high-reliability loss hold in which a loss is notified after an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is performed, for example, although there is nothing.

  The result determination process is not performed when the symbol related to the first special symbol determination is not variably displayed at the start of the drop effect. Further, the hold result determination process is not performed when there is no hold of the first special symbol determination at the start of the drop effect.

  In each pachinko gaming machine 1A to 1H, at the start of each drop effect, either or both of the result determination process and the hold result determination process are performed. Based on the result of the process, the point is dropped. Points awarded to the player are determined.

  As described above, since the point is determined based on the result of the result determination process, the same dropping effect as that performed in other adjacent pachinko gaming machines 1 is performed, but the point actually dropped is other In some cases, the point is different from the point dropped in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when compared with a drop effect performed in another pachinko gaming machine 1, a drop effect in which a part of the drop effect is different is performed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1C, since there is a relatively high possibility of being determined to be a big hit in the first special symbol determination that is held at the start of the drop effect, “48” points (See FIG. 37D, FIG. 38A, and FIG. 38B).

  FIG. 38A illustrates a state when 1.4 seconds have elapsed from the reference timing. Thus, when 1.4 seconds elapse from the reference timing, only the last one of the three characters appears on the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1C, and the heart image is displayed. Is lowered to a position slightly below the center of the screen in the vertical direction of the main liquid crystal 5.

  As is clear from the notation of FIG. 38A, in the pachinko gaming machine 1D in which the start timing of the drop effect is delayed by 1.5 seconds with respect to the reference timing, the drop effect has not yet started. The same applies to the pachinko gaming machine 1E whose start timing is delayed by 2.0 seconds with respect to the reference timing, and the other pachinko gaming machines 1F and 1H.

  When 1.5 seconds have elapsed from the reference timing, a drop effect in the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1D is started (see FIG. 38B). At this time, in the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1C, the heart image falls to the lower end of the screen, and immediately after that, as the heart image is erased from the screen, the main liquid crystal of the pachinko gaming machine 1C. The point information (not shown) displayed in 5 is updated.

  When 1.75 seconds have elapsed since the drop effect was started in the pachinko gaming machine 1A at the reference timing, the three characters displayed on the screen of the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1D are displayed in the center in the width direction on the screen. (See FIG. 38C). Accordingly, point dropping is started in the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1D. FIG. 38 (C) shows a state in which a heart image for giving 10 points to a player starts to be dropped. The point throwing performed on the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1D is different from the timing at which point dropping is started and the points given to the player are different (they may be the same). It is performed in the same manner as the drop effect performed on the main liquid crystal 5 such as the machine 1A.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1D, a pre-reading effect is performed at the start of the dropping effect, but here there is no hold of the first special symbol determination with a relatively high reliability for the jackpot, so a low point of 10 points Is dropped (see FIG. 38C).

  FIG. 38D illustrates a state when 1.9 seconds have elapsed from the reference timing. As described above, when 1.9 seconds have elapsed from the reference timing, only the last one of the three characters appears on the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1D, and the heart image is displayed. Is lowered to a position slightly below the center of the screen in the vertical direction of the main liquid crystal 5.

  As is clear from the notation of FIG. 38D, in the pachinko gaming machine 1E in which the start timing of the drop effect is delayed by 2.0 seconds with respect to the reference timing, the drop effect has not yet started. The same applies to the pachinko gaming machine 1F whose start timing is delayed by 2.5 seconds with respect to the reference timing and the other pachinko gaming machines 1G to 1H.

  When 2.0 seconds have elapsed from the reference timing, a drop effect in the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1E is started (see FIG. 39A). At this time, in the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1D, the heart image falls to the lower end of the screen, and immediately after that, as the heart image is erased from the screen, the main liquid crystal of the pachinko gaming machine 1D. The point information (not shown) displayed in 5 is updated.

  When 2.25 seconds have elapsed since the drop effect was started in the pachinko gaming machine 1A at the reference timing, the three characters displayed on the screen of the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1E are displayed in the center in the width direction on the screen. (See FIG. 39B). Accordingly, point dropping is started in the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1E. FIG. 39B shows a state in which a heart image for giving 480 points to the player starts to be dropped. The point throwing performed on the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1E is different from the timing at which point dropping is started and the points given to the player are different (they may be the same). It is performed in the same manner as the drop effect performed on the main liquid crystal 5 such as the machine 1A.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1E, the pre-reading effect is performed at the start of the dropping effect, but there is a suspension of the first special symbol determination that will be determined as a big hit when the first special symbol determination is digested. Therefore, point dropping is performed to give a high point of 480 points (see FIG. 39C). The high point of 480 points is a point that is given only when the presence of a jackpot can be confirmed by the result determination process performed at the start of the drop effect. For this reason, when 480 points are dropped, the jackpot is notified after the drop effect is finished.

  When 2.5 seconds have elapsed from the reference timing, the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1E is in a state where the heart image has dropped to the lower end of the screen, and immediately after that, the heart image is erased from the screen. The point information (not shown) displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1E is updated. Although not shown in FIG. 39, when 2.5 seconds have elapsed from the reference timing, a drop effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1F is started.

  In FIG. 36 to FIG. 39, for the convenience of explanation, a drop effect performed by five pachinko gaming machines 1 </ b> A to 1 </ b> E among eight pachinko gaming machines 1 of pachinko gaming machines 1 </ b> A to 1 </ b> H. Although not shown in the drawing, the dropping effects are similarly performed for the pachinko gaming machines 1F and later.

[About counting elapsed time]
By the way, the elapsed time information indicating the elapsed time since the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in a volatile memory such as the control RAM 145 (see FIG. 58), and the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off. In such a case, when the configuration that does not back up the elapsed time information is adopted, the elapsed time information is lost due to the power supply being cut off, and not only the drop effect but also various RTC effects are appropriately started. There is a problem that it will not be possible to start with.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the elapsed time information is held in the FeRAM 1451 that can hold various types of information even when power is not supplied.

  However, even if the configuration in which the elapsed time information is stored in the FeRAM 1451 is employed, the elapsed time cannot be counted while the power supply is cut off. Therefore, various RTC effects are eventually started at appropriate start timings. The problem that it cannot be made remains.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration in which the elapsed time information is held in the FeRAM 1451, the following processing is performed from the power interruption to the power restoration, thereby performing the RTC effect due to the power interruption. It is intended to suppress the occurrence of a problem that it is impossible to start at an appropriate start timing.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the power supply from the island power supply device 600 is cut off, information indicating the current date and time (hereinafter referred to as “RTC” information) is acquired from the RTC 134 (see FIG. 57). Then, the RTC information is stored in the FeRAM 1451 as the first time information. Thereafter, RTC information is acquired again from the RTC 134 at the timing when the power supply from the island power supply apparatus 600 starts to be resumed, and the RTC information is stored in the FeRAM 1451 as second time information. In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, two pieces of time information are acquired before and after the power interruption, and power is supplied by obtaining the difference between the date and time indicated by the second time information and the date and time indicated by the first time information. It is possible to specify the time (interruption time) during which was interrupted.

  Here, when the difference information indicating the difference is obtained, it is determined whether or not the time indicated by the difference information is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). If it is determined that the time indicated by the difference information is less than the predetermined time, the elapsed time information stored in the FeRAM 1451 is updated to time information obtained by adding the time indicated by the difference information. As a result, the elapsed time indicated by the elapsed time information stored in the FeRAM 1451 is stored in the FeRAM 1451 of the other pachinko gaming machine 1 activated by the activation method in which the island power supply device 600 is turned on in a lump. Since it matches the elapsed time indicated by the time information, it is possible to prevent the RTC effect from being unable to be started at an appropriate start timing by restarting the counting of the elapsed time at the power recovery timing.

  When it is determined that the time indicated by the difference information is less than the predetermined time, for example, when the power supply is cut off and the power is turned on again the next day, the elapsed time information of the FeRAM 1451 is displayed when the power is turned on. After being reset, the elapsed time count starts from “0”.

  By the way, in such a configuration that the elapsed time can be restarted from an appropriate time immediately after the power supply is restored, the main liquid crystal 5 displays when the player is playing a game or waiting for a customer. When the RTC effect start timing comes when the normal screen to be displayed is not displayed, the RTC effect can be started. That is, when the RTC effect start timing is reached when a setting screen such as a power recovery screen (see FIG. 33A) or an installation position setting screen (see FIGS. 33B and 33C) is displayed. It is also possible to start the RTC effect.

  However, such a configuration causes the following problems. That is, for example, while the setting screen is displayed, the point information indicating the total points acquired by the player is not displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 because the normal screen is not displayed, and the point information can be updated. is not. For this reason, if a drop effect is performed while the setting screen is displayed, there is a possibility that appropriate processing cannot be performed. In addition, if a series of performance series effects composed of a plurality of partial effects are performed while the setting screen is displayed, for example, the setting screen is not displayed, or a part or all of the setting screen is a performance series effect. Since it is hidden in the effect image, there is a possibility that the setting screen cannot be appropriately operated. The same applies to the case where a game effect start timing described later is reached while the setting screen is displayed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the start time of the RTC effect is reached while the setting screen is being displayed (a state where the interrupt process cannot be executed), the RTC effect is started exceptionally. I will not let you.

  The RTC 134 has a storage area in which information can be held by power supplied from a built-in battery (not shown) when power is not supplied from the island power supply device 600. For this reason, in another embodiment, the installation position information may be stored in the storage area of the RTC 134 instead of the FeRAM 1451.

[Point determination method]
Next, a method for determining points to be dropped in the drop effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a drop point determination table for determining a game point given by execution of a drop effect.

  As illustrated in FIG. 40, the control ROM 144 (see FIG. 58) of each pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a jackpot point determination table as a table to be referred to when determining points to be dropped by the drop effect. A high reliability loss point determination table, a low reliability loss point determination table, and a customer waiting point determination table are stored.

  In this embodiment, there are eight types of points that can be selected in these point determination tables: 1 point, 3 points, 5 points, 10 points, 20 points, 30 points, 48 points, and 480 points. However, in all of the above four point selection tables, not all of these eight types of points can be selected, and a point selection table in which only some of these eight types of points are selected when referenced. There is also.

  As described above, in each pachinko gaming machine 1, both or one of the result determination process and the hold result determination process is performed at the start of the drop effect. Here, the result determination process is a process of determining whether or not the change (current change) is a big hit. The hold result determination process is a process for determining whether there is a hold that is determined to be a big hit or a high-reliability loss hold in the hold related to the first special symbol determination.

  On the other hand, in the jackpot point determination table, there are cases where the result determination process is performed and it is determined that the change is a jackpot, and the hold result determination process is performed and the hold is determined to be a jackpot. It is a table that is referred to when it is determined that it exists. This jackpot point determination table is configured as a table in which the production random number and the number of points are associated with each other. When points are selected with reference to this point determination table, 20 points, 30 points, 48 points, The selection ratio increases in the order of 480 points. That is, the largest number of production random numbers is assigned to 480 points, and the number of production random numbers assigned to 20 points is the smallest. Therefore, when the jackpot point determination table is referred to, 480 points are most easily selected, 48 points are most easily selected next, and 20 points are difficult to select. In this embodiment, the jackpot point determination table is configured such that low points such as 1, 3, 5, and 10 points are not selected.

  The point determination table for high reliability loss is when the result of the result determination process is notified of a loss due to the change, and it is determined that there is a high reliability loss hold as a result of the hold result determination process It is a point determination table referred to.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the first special symbol determination is suspended, whether the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit with respect to the retention of the high reliability loss related to the first special symbol determination. A pre-determination process is performed to determine in advance whether or not and the variation pattern of the special symbol related to the first special symbol determination (see FIG. 66). Then, although the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a loss, there is a prior determination result that there is a high possibility that a pattern with a relatively long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol. When the effect can be specified at the start of the production, the points to be given to the player are selected with reference to the high reliability loss determination table.

  This highly reliable lose point determination table is configured by associating a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol, an effect random number, and the number of points. This high-reliability lose point determination table is a high-reliability reach effect that allows a player to expect a big hit, although a loss will be notified when the first special symbol determination that has been suspended is digested. For example, when there is a high possibility that an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect will be performed, this is a point selection table that is referred to in order to determine points to be given to a player during a drop effect. For this reason, in the highly reliable loss point determination table, production random numbers are assigned to relatively high points such as 20 points, 30 points, and 48 points for each variation pattern. Then, a high point of 48 points is likely to be selected as the fluctuation pattern has a long fluctuation time (random number is assigned more), and conversely, 20 points are likely to be selected as the fluctuation pattern has a short fluctuation time.

  Since the highly reliable loss determination point determination table gives points to highly reliable loses, production random numbers are used for low points such as 1 point, 3 points, 5 points, and 10 points. Is not assigned. In addition, since 480 points are points that can be selected only when the presence of a jackpot is confirmed as a result of the result determination process or the hold result determination process, a production random number is also assigned to 480 points. Absent.

  The low-reliability loss point determination table has determined that the result of the result determination process is notified of a loss due to the change, and that there is only a low-reliability loss hold as a result of the hold result determination process. It is a point determination table referred to in the case.

  The determination result of the first special symbol determination is losing, and there is only a prior determination result that there is a high possibility that a variation pattern of the special symbol having a relatively short variation time is selected. When the identification is possible, the points to be given to the player are selected with reference to the low reliability loss determination table.

  This low-reliability loss point determination table is configured by associating a special symbol variation pattern (variation time), an effect random number, and the number of points. This low-reliability loss point determination table is a high-reliability point that allows a player to expect a big hit when a suspended first special symbol determination is digested. It is a point selection table that is referred to in order to determine points to be given to a player during a drop effect when there is a high possibility that a reach effect will not be performed. For this reason, in the low reliability loss point determination table, production random numbers are assigned to a relatively low number of points such as 1 point, 3 points, 5 points, and 10 points for each variation pattern. In addition, a high point such as 10 points or 5 points is easily selected for a variation pattern having a long variation time, and conversely, a low point such as 1 point or 3 points is easily selected for a variation pattern having a short variation time.

  The customer waiting point determination table is a table referred to in order to determine a point to be dropped when the customer waiting state is started at the start of the drop effect. Here, the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbol is not variably displayed, the first special symbol determination is not suspended, and the game is not a big hit game. This customer waiting state is a state in which a player is not playing a game. For this reason, it is not preferable to perform a drop effect in which a high-point heart image is dropped in such a state. For this reason, in the customer waiting point determination table, effect random numbers are assigned only to the three types of points of 1 point, 3 points, and 5 points.

  When the start timing of the drop effect is reached in the customer waiting state, the special symbol is not variably displayed and the first special symbol determination is not suspended, and there is no prior determination result to be considered. In such a customer waiting state, an effect random number is acquired at the start of the drop effect, and one point, three points, or five points are read from the customer waiting point determination table as the number of points corresponding to the effect random number. The number of points to be dropped is determined.

  As is clear from the explanation so far, when a drop effect is performed, even if the normal point acquisition conditions such as the number of fluctuations reaching a predetermined number of times or the occurrence of a specific effect during the game are not satisfied, Can earn points. And according to the increase of this point, a game privilege will be provided to a player. For this reason, it can be said that the drop effect is an effect for providing a game privilege to the player.

[Incorrect setting of location information]
So far, the drop effect based on the installation position information has been described. However, if the drop effect is performed in a state where the installation position information is set in error, the following problems may occur.

  For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1D (see FIG. 10), the drop effect is performed in a state in which installation position information indicating that it is installed at the first position (= reference position) from the left is set. In this case, since the delay time corresponding to the reference position is “0 second”, the drop effect is started at the reference timing. That is, at the reference timing, a drop effect is simultaneously started in the pachinko machine 1A and the pachinko machine 1D, and after that, a drop effect is started in the order of the pachinko machine 1B, the pachinko machine 1C, and the pachinko machine 1E. Will be.

  As described above, when installation position information indicating a position different from the actual installation position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set, it is impossible to appropriately perform the drop effect based on the installation position information. This applies not only to the drop effect but also to other effects based on the installation position information (for example, an obstacle race and a ring-throw game to be described later: see FIG. 44). For this reason, in each pachinko gaming machine 1, it is preferable to appropriately set installation position information indicating an actual installation position.

[Details of game series production]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44, a game series effect that starts at the timing when M hours (M is a natural number) 30 minutes have elapsed since the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. Here, FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game series effect. FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram for describing the game opening order pattern table. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pattern number selection table. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for describing the characteristics of each game effect.

  As described above, the start time of the game effect is fixed at a timing when the elapsed time from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes M hours (M is a natural number) 30 minutes (see FIG. 12). On the other hand, prior to this game production, an announcement of the event and a game description + countdown are performed.

  The holding notification is an effect of notifying the holding of the game effect, and is performed using the main liquid crystal 5 and the speaker 24, for example. Although detailed description is omitted, in this event announcement, the type of game performed in the game effect is notified.

  The game description + countdown is an effect for notifying the explanation about the game performed in the game effect and the remaining time until the game effect is started, and is performed using the main liquid crystal 5 and the speaker 24, for example.

  For example, the presentation execution time of the holding announcement is fixed to 30 seconds regardless of the type of the game to be played later, and the presentation execution time of the game description + countdown is fixed to 60 seconds regardless of the type of the game to be executed thereafter. The event announcement starts 90 seconds before the game production start timing, and the game description + countdown is performed 60 seconds before the game production start timing.

  Note that the announcement of the game informs the type of game performed in the game effect, and the game description explains the rules related to the game. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, there are four types of games performed in the game production: bingo game, quiz game, obstacle race, and ring-throwing game, and every time the game production start timing comes, The type is changed. For this reason, regarding the announcement and the game description that are performed prior to the game presentation, the contents of the presentation are appropriately switched according to the type of the game presentation that is started at the game presentation start timing.

  Further, the game effect is composed of a game and a result notification of the game (see FIG. 41). These games and result notification are both performed using the main liquid crystal 5 and the speaker 24. The game performs the above four types of games, and the result notification notifies the result of the game performed this time. For example, when a bingo game is performed in this game, information indicating whether or not the game has finally become a bingo is notified by a result notification.

  As described above, when a game effect is performed, a next game notice for notifying the next game type is given. For example, when a ring-throwing game is performed at the next game start timing after the game presentation of the bingo game is finished, the next-game notice for notifying the holding of the ring-throwing game is performed in the next game notice following the game presentation. This next game preview is performed using the main liquid crystal 5 and the speaker 24 in the same manner as the game effect.

  The game ROM order pattern table is stored in the control ROM 144 (see FIG. 58) of the image sound control board 140 (see FIG. 42). As illustrated in FIG. 42, in this game holding order pattern table, the pattern number for identifying the holding order of the four types of games corresponds to the contents of each game of the first to fourth game effects. It is attached.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game content is displayed each time the elapsed time from power-on is 1 hour 30 minutes, 2 hours 30 minutes, 3 hours 30 minutes, 4 hours 30 minutes, and the game production start timing. Game production is performed while changing. On the other hand, one pattern number is selected depending on the day, and the content of the game effect game is changed in the order in which the game corresponding to the pattern number is held.

  For example, on the day when the pattern number “3” (see FIG. 42) is selected, the bingo game is started at the first game effect start timing after 1 hour and 30 minutes have passed since the power is turned on. An obstacle race starts at the second game production start timing that has passed, a ring throwing game starts at the third game production start timing after 3 hours and 30 minutes, and a fourth game production after 4 hours and 30 minutes has elapsed. At the start timing, the quiz game is started.

  In this way, the game effect is started while switching the game contents every hour in the game holding order corresponding to the pattern number selected for the day.

  From the fifth time onward, the game content is selected such that the first to fourth game content loops. For example, on the day when the pattern number “3” is selected, when the quiz game is started at the fourth game effect start timing after 4 hours and 30 minutes have elapsed, the fifth time after 5 hours and 30 minutes have elapsed. At the game effect start timing, a bingo game corresponding to the first pattern number “3” is started. Thereafter, as in the second, third, and fourth times, the contents of the game are switched as appropriate, such as an obstacle race, a ring-throw game, and a quiz game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, which pattern number is selected in advance is determined depending on the day.

  A pattern number selection table is stored in the control ROM 144 (see FIG. 58) (see FIG. 43). As illustrated in FIG. 43, in the pattern number selection table, the execution date on which the game effect is executed is associated with the pattern number described above.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the pattern number selected with reference to the pattern number selection table is set in the control RAM 145 at a predetermined timing. For example, with reference to 5/10 when the first performance performance of the new song is held, on the third day (5/12), the pattern number “3” is read from the pattern number selection table and stored in the control RAM 145. Set. Thus, whenever the game production start timing is reached on 5/12, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 42, a bingo game, an obstacle race, a ring throw game, a quiz game, a bingo game, an obstacle race, a ring throw game, a quiz The game type is switched in the order of the game.

  Also, for example, on 5/15, which is the sixth day, the pattern number “5” is set in the control RAM 145. For this reason, the game type is switched in the order of a ring-throw game, obstacle race, quiz game, and bingo game.

  Next, how the game content of the first game effect changes on a plurality of execution dates will be described. For example, on 5/10 on the first day, the game type is switched in the order corresponding to the pattern number “1”, so the first game is an obstacle race and the second game is a bingo game. On 5/11 on the second day, the game type is switched in the order corresponding to the pattern number “7”, so the first game is a quiz game and the second game is a ring-throw game. On 5/12 on the third day, the game type is switched in the order corresponding to the pattern number “3”, so the first game is a bingo game and the second game is an obstacle race.

  That is, from the first day to the third day, the first game type of each day changes from an obstacle race, a quiz game, and a bingo game. In addition, from the first day to the third day, the second game type of each day changes to a bingo game, a ring-throw game, and an obstacle race.

  In this way, by controlling the type of game based on the game opening order pattern table and the pattern number selection table, different games are played even if the game effect start timing is based on power-on. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a problem that only a part of the four types of games can be enjoyed due to the fact that the player can play the game only in a short period of a specific time period. Is possible.

[About each game]
FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the presence / absence of use of the installation position information stored in the FeRAM 1451 and the characteristics of the game for each of the four types of games. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 44, four types of games, a bingo game, a quiz game, an obstacle race, and a ring throw game will be described.

<Bingo game>
The bingo game (see FIGS. 45 and 46) is an effect that is not based on the installation position information, and effect control is performed so that bingo is established when there is a big hit. Specifically, the following processing is performed at the start timing of the bingo game.

  That is, when the special symbol variation display is being performed, the result determination process for determining whether or not the jackpot symbol is to be stopped and displayed as a result of the symbol variation is performed. In addition, if there is a hold related to the first special symbol determination at the start timing of the bingo game, a hold result determination process is performed to determine whether or not a hold that becomes a big hit when digested is included. . Next, it is determined whether or not a jackpot exists based on the result of the result determination process and the result of the hold result determination process. Then, if there is a jackpot, a bingo card that finally becomes a bingo is selected. On the other hand, when there is no jackpot, any of a plurality of types of bingo cards that are not bingo-selected is randomly selected by the effect lottery.

  Thus, since the bingo game has a function as a so-called look-ahead effect, the player conventionally determines whether or not there is a big hit based on whether or not the bingo is established as a result of the bingo game. It is possible to grasp in a form that is not present.

  FIG. 45 is a screen diagram illustrating an example of a bingo game display screen. As illustrated in FIG. 45, the screen of the main liquid crystal 5 displays a bingo card, an already drawn lottery ball, a current lottery ball, the remaining number of lotteries, and a character.

  This lottery ball is a ball on which numbers are written, and is a lottery ball selected in this lottery. The already drawn lottery balls are the lottery balls selected in the lottery already performed. In the bingo game in the present embodiment, the lottery for selecting the lottery ball is performed eight times. In FIG. 45, five already drawn lottery balls “49”, “2”, “31”, “19”, “17” are displayed, and the lottery has already been performed five times. Is illustrated. In addition, the current lottery ball including the number “27” is displayed larger than the already drawn lottery balls in order to easily understand what the number is. In this manner, since the sixth lottery is performed after the fifth lottery is performed for all the eight lotteries, the remaining number of lotteries is “2”.

  The bingo card is a card in which a total of 25 squares are written, with 5 squares in the vertical direction and 5 squares in the horizontal direction. Each square has a different number. The central grid is treated as an effective free spot from the beginning. In this bingo card, the square containing the same number as the already drawn lottery ball or the current lottery ball is highlighted as an effective square with respect to the other squares. Bingo is established when the effective cells are aligned in any one of vertical, horizontal, and diagonal directions (see the right side in FIG. 46C).

  Note that a bingo game scenario of which lottery balls are selected and in what order in the bingo game is set in advance at the start timing of the bingo game.

  FIG. 46 is a screen diagram illustrating a state in which a bingo game is simultaneously performed in a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed in a horizontal row. FIG. 46 shows a state from the sixth lottery to the eighth lottery.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H are activated simultaneously by the activation method described above. For this reason, in these pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H, a bingo game is started simultaneously. As a result, the same bingo game progresses simultaneously in the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H (see FIGS. 46A to 46C). The same applies to other games.

  In FIG. 46, in the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H, the lottery ball “27” is simultaneously selected in the sixth lottery (see FIG. 46A), and the lottery ball “8” is simultaneously selected in the seventh lottery. It is selected (see FIG. 46 (B)), and a state in which “30” lottery balls are simultaneously selected in the eighth lottery is shown (see FIG. 46 (C)). In FIG. 46, for convenience of explanation, illustration of a bingo game performed in the pachinko gaming machines 1D to 1H is omitted.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, for the bingo game, a plurality of scenarios with different combinations of lottery balls selected in eight lotteries are prepared, and the scenario is changed every time the bingo game is performed. As described above, control data necessary for changing the scenario is stored in the control ROM 144 (see FIG. 58) of each of the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H.

  Thereby, the bingo game of the same day scenario can be simultaneously held in the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H. In addition, since the bingo game scenario is fixed, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of the problem that the player can easily guess which number of lottery balls will be selected. .

  This is not limited to the bingo game, and the same applies to a quiz game, an obstacle race, and a ring throw game which will be described later. That is, for the quiz game, the problem is changed every time the quiz game is performed, for the obstacle race, the first character is changed for each obstacle race, and for the ring throw game, the ring throw game is performed. The target type is changed.

<Quiz game>
As shown in FIG. 44, the quiz game (see FIGS. 47 and 48) is an effect that is not based on the installation position information. In addition, the quiz game is configured so that a plurality of questions (5 questions in the present embodiment) are given in one quiz game, and points are awarded when the quiz is answered correctly. At that time, when there is a big hit, the presentation control is performed such that the total of points acquired by the player in the quiz game may exceed 480 points.

  FIG. 47 is a screen diagram illustrating the flow of a quiz game. As shown in FIG. 47 (A), the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a quiz problem, an answer option for the problem, and an answer key selection by operating the up key or the down key. An effect key image, a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the valid period during which an option can be switched using the effect key 27, and the total number of points acquired by the player in the current quiz game are displayed.

  On the other hand, when the remaining time of the effective period becomes “0”, the effect key image and the gauge image are deleted, and a result is announced regarding the player's answer to the current problem (see FIG. 47B). . Specifically, “correct answer” (or “incorrect answer”) is displayed as a word indicating whether or not the player's answer is correct, and in the case of correct answer (incorrect answer), “○” Or “×”) is displayed.

  Then, when the player's answer is correct, the points given to the player for the correct answer are determined, and the points are displayed on the right side of the screen (see FIG. 47C). FIG. 47C shows a state where 200 points are given to the correct answer. Although not shown in the figure, when the acquired point display illustrated in FIG. 47 is performed, the points given for the current correct answer are added to the total points to display the total points. The process of updating is performed.

  The process for determining the points to be given to the player is performed every time the player answers the quiz correctly. For example, when the player answers all five questions correctly, the point determination process is performed five times, and the total points of the five points are given to the player. Specifically, the following processing is performed.

  That is, every time the player correctly answers the question of the quiz, the result determination process and the hold result determination process are performed in the same manner as is performed at the start of the drop effect or the bingo game. Then, when the presence of a jackpot is confirmed as a result of performing both or one of the result determination process and the hold result determination process, points are determined so that high points are easily given to the correct answer. . For this reason, when there is a jackpot, the total points acquired by the player at the end of the quiz game or in the middle of the quiz game tends to be 480 points or more.

  In addition, if the presence of a jackpot is not confirmed as a result of performing either or both of the result determination process and the hold result determination process, points are determined so that low points are easily given to correct answers. The Here, if the results of the result determination process and the hold result determination process performed in one quiz game indicate that there is no jackpot, the total is finally given to the player The points are determined so that the points are always less than 480 points. In other words, the number of points earned by the player in one quiz game is 480 points or more only when the player can confirm the existence of the jackpot when the player correctly answers each question.

  FIG. 48 is a screen diagram illustrating a state in which a quiz game is simultaneously performed in a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed in a horizontal row. This quiz game is also started simultaneously in the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H, as in the bingo game. In FIG. 48, in the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H, the fifth question is given at the same time (see FIG. 48A), and the result determination is performed at the end of the valid period of the answer (see FIG. 48B). Thereafter, the acquired points are displayed only in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the correct answer has occurred.

  Note that the screen illustrated in FIG. 48C shows that 480 points are awarded for the correct answer of the fifth question, which is played in the pachinko gaming machine 1A. This is because the jackpot existence was confirmed as a result of the result determination process (the result determination process and the hold result determination process) performed when the player answered the fifth question.

  For this reason, the player can easily grasp whether or not a jackpot exists based on whether or not the points acquired by the quiz are 480 points or more. That is, the player can easily grasp whether or not the jackpot exists while enjoying a game called a quiz game.

  If the answer to the quiz is incorrect, no points will be awarded even if a jackpot exists. That is, the points given to the player depend on whether or not there is a jackpot and the selection operation by the player.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, when a big hit exists, the acquired points may be 480 points or more in the middle of the quiz game. That is, for example, when the third question is correctly answered, the total points may be 480 points or more. Even if the player appropriately answers in the state where the jackpot exists, the earned points may not reach 480 points.

<Obstacle race>
The obstacle race is a game in which a plurality of characters (eight characters in this embodiment) aim at the first place by performing an obstacle race. Unlike the bingo game and the quiz game, the obstacle race is performed based on the installation position information regardless of the operation by the player (see FIG. 44). Regarding this obstacle race, basically, a character cheered by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “cheering character”) is automatically selected based on the installation position information, and for the selected character, A marker is provided so that the player can easily identify the character (see, for example, FIG. 49B). And when a jackpot exists, the support character to which the marker was given finally becomes the 1st place.

  FIG. 49 is a screen diagram illustrating the flow of an obstacle race. In the obstacle race, first, a support character is automatically selected, and the selection result is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 (see FIG. 49A). After the information about the support character is displayed in this way, the effect display of the obstacle race is performed in a state where the marker is assigned to the support character (see FIG. 49B). And the effect display which alert | reports the result of an obstacle race is performed (refer FIG.49 (C)). In FIG. 49C, the player's cheering character is ranked first.

  In each pachinko machine 1, when the obstacle race start timing is reached, the character that the player supports is automatically selected based on the installation position information stored in the FeRAM 1451 and whether or not a jackpot exists. Is done. Specifically, the following processing is performed.

  That is, at the start timing of the obstacle race, the result determination process and the hold result determination process described above are performed to determine whether or not a jackpot exists. Here, if it is determined that there is a jackpot, the character that is ranked first in this obstacle race is selected regardless of the installation position information (see FIG. 49A). That is, at the start timing of the obstacle race, which character is ranked first as a result of the obstacle race is determined in advance, and that character is automatically selected as the player's support character.

  In this case, at the end of the obstacle race, the support character becomes the first place, so that the player can recognize that the jackpot is generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which he / she is playing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no jackpot at the start timing of the obstacle race, a support character is selected based on the installation position information. Specifically, the control ROM 144 (see FIG. 58) of each pachinko gaming machine 1 associates the installation position indicated by the installation position information with the identification information of the character that is second or lower in the current obstacle race. A support character determination table is stored. If there is no jackpot, the installation position is specified based on the installation position information stored in the FeRAM 1451, and the support character is selected by reading the identification information of the character corresponding to this installation position from the support character determination table. .

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the support character determination table, among the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 where there is no jackpot, basically different characters are selected as the support characters. It is comprised so that. For example, the support character determination table is configured such that the same character is not assigned to a plurality of installation positions. For this reason, in each pachinko gaming machine 1 where there is no jackpot, each player will support different support characters.

  Thus, the effect image for realizing the effect of the obstacle race is configured to be able to change at least a part of the effect image (here, the marker position) based on the installation position information.

  FIG. 50 is a screen diagram illustrating a state in which obstacle races are simultaneously performed in a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed in a horizontal row. This obstacle race is also started simultaneously in the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H as in the bingo game and the quiz game. In FIG. 50, in the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H, the support members are simultaneously determined (see FIG. 50A), and the same obstacle race effect display is performed in agreement with different marker positions (FIG. 50). Further, the effect display of the goal scene in which any character is ranked first is performed (see FIG. 50C).

  In the example shown in FIG. 50, the character “Z” that is the support character in the pachinko gaming machine 1A is finally ranked first, but this is a big hit at the start timing of the obstacle race in the pachinko gaming machine 1A. This is because the existence of the can be confirmed.

  For this reason, the player can easily grasp whether or not there is a jackpot based on whether or not the support character in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which he / she plays is ranked first. That is, the player can easily grasp whether or not a jackpot exists while enjoying the obstacle race while cheering for the support character to be ranked first in the obstacle race.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram for describing a method for determining a support character. FIG. 51 illustrates the correspondence between the installation position, the presence or absence of a jackpot, and the support members for the obstacle race in which the character Z illustrated in FIG. 50 is finally ranked first.

  As is clear from FIG. 51 (A), there is no jackpot in any of the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H at the start timing of the obstacle race (the timing when M hours (M is a natural number) 30 minutes have passed since the power-on). In this case, a support character corresponding to the installation position indicated by the installation position information of each pachinko gaming machine 1 is selected.

  On the other hand, as is clear from FIG. 51 (B), the pachinko gaming machine 1A to 1H among the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H at the start timing of the obstacle race (the timing when M hours (M is a natural number) 30 minutes have passed since power-on). When there is a jackpot in 1A, only the pachinko gaming machine 1A is selected as a support character, regardless of the installation position indicated by the installation position information, in the current obstacle race.

  In another embodiment, the same character may be assigned to a plurality of installation positions in the support character determination table. For example, the number of characters participating in the obstacle race is fixed at eight, and seven characters that are second or lower among them are associated with the installation positions of the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H. May be. In this case, since there are seven characters for the eight pachinko gaming machines 1, one of the seven characters is assigned to two installation positions. However, in this case, in order to prevent the same character from being selected as a support character in a plurality of adjacent pachinko gaming machines 1, the support character is the same in a plurality of non-adjacent pachinko gaming machines 1. It is preferable to associate the installation position with the character type. Specifically, it is conceivable that the character R is associated with the installation position “1” and the same character R is associated with the installation position “4”. Such a configuration is adopted because the pachinko gaming machine 1A corresponding to the installation position “1” and the pachinko gaming machine 1H corresponding to the installation position “4” are separated from each other. This is because it is difficult for a player who plays a game on the gaming machine 1 to recognize that the same support character is selected.

  Further, the control ROM 144 stores a plurality of pieces of information indicating race scenarios so that the rank of each character changes each time an obstacle race is performed (in particular, the character that becomes the first place changes every time). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the obstacle race is rendered while switching the scenario every time the obstacle race is performed. For example, information indicating eight scenarios with different first rank characters and their use order are stored in the control ROM 144 in advance, and when an obstacle race is performed, the scenario used in the obstacle race is selected. When the information to be stored is stored in the FeRAM 1451 and an obstacle race is performed, a scenario in which a scenario next to the scenario indicated by the information stored in the FeRAM 1451 is read from the control ROM 144 and switched is considered.

  As a result, the player can easily guess the character that will be ranked first, and as a result, it will be easy to know whether there is a big hit in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that he / she plays before starting the obstacle race It is possible to effectively suppress the problem of being able to be made.

<Ringing game>
FIG. 52 is a screen diagram showing an example of a ring-throw game display screen. In the ring-throwing game, a player who plays a game on each pachinko machine 1 throws a ring by pressing the lower key of the production key 27, and the result of ring-throwing the target that flows from left to right on the screen of the main liquid crystal 5. This is an effect in which points corresponding to the player are given to the player (see FIG. 52).

  This ring-throwing game includes a main liquid crystal 5 of a pachinko gaming machine 1A, a main liquid crystal 5 of a pachinko gaming machine 1B, a main liquid crystal 5 of a pachinko gaming machine 1C, a main liquid crystal 5 of a pachinko gaming machine 1D, a main liquid crystal 5 of a pachinko gaming machine 1E, The main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1F, the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1G, and the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1H are characterized in that an effect display is performed so that the same target flows. . As shown in FIG. 44, in the ring-throw game, the installation position information stored in the FeRAM 1451 is used to generate this feature. That is, the ring-throw game is an effect based on the installation position information.

  In addition to the fact that the installation position information is used, the ring throwing game has the following characteristics. That is, as shown in FIG. 44, in the ring-throwing game, when the presence of the jackpot is confirmed during the ring-throwing game, the total points given to the player according to the success of the ring-throwing is 480 points or more. It is easy to use. This is to indicate the presence of a jackpot to the player when the total points are 480 points or more.

  As illustrated in FIG. 52, during the ring-throw game, the remaining time until the end of the current ring-throw game (27 seconds in FIG. 52) and a plurality of targets flow from the left side of the screen to the right side of the screen. A total point (80PT in FIG. 52) indicating the stage, the total points earned by the player in this ring-throw game, an effect key image that prompts the player to press the lower key of the effect key 27, and 480 points or more The main liquid crystal 5 displays a message suggesting that there is a possibility that something good will occur if acquired.

  On the other hand, the player can enjoy ringing by throwing a ring by pressing the lower key of the production key 27 until the remaining time becomes “0”, and is given according to success of ringing. Earned points.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining ring-throwing effect data stored in CGROM 148 (see FIG. 58). This ring-throwing effect data is effect data (for example, moving image data) having a predetermined time length. In the ring-throwing effect data shown in FIG. 53, the left end means the head of the ring-throwing effect data, and the right end means the tail of the ring-throwing effect data.

  In the present embodiment, this ring-throwing effect data is configured so that it takes 24 seconds to reproduce all the effect data. For example, when the ring-throwing effect data is reproduced from the first reproduction start point corresponding to the head of the ring-throwing effect data, the target appears on the main liquid crystal 5 in the following flow.

  That is, when the ring-throwing effect data is reproduced from the first reproduction start point, as shown in FIG. 53, “target 1” appears on the left side of the screen at the reproduction start timing (see the left figure in FIG. 55A). When 1 second has elapsed from the playback start timing, “Target 2” appears on the left side of the screen (see the left diagram in FIG. 55B), and when 2 seconds have elapsed from the playback start timing, “Target 3” appears on the left side of the screen. (Refer to the left diagram in FIG. 55C.) When 3 seconds have elapsed from the playback start timing, “Target 4” appears on the left side of the screen (see the left diagram in FIG. 56A), and 4 seconds from the playback start timing. After the elapse, “target 5” appears on the left side of the screen (see the left diagram in FIG. 56B), and “target 6” appears on the left side of the screen after 5 seconds from the reproduction start timing (see FIG. 56C). As shown in the left figure, “Target 1” to “Target 24” are It appears on the left side of the screen of the main liquid crystal 5 in.

  In contrast, when the ring-throwing effect data is reproduced from the second reproduction start point, “target 22” appears on the left side of the screen at the reproduction start timing as shown in FIG. 53 (the middle diagram of FIG. 55A). (See 23), “Target 23” appears on the left side of the screen when 1 second has elapsed from the playback start timing (see the middle diagram of FIG. 55B), and “Target 24” appears on the left side of the screen when 2 seconds have elapsed from the playback start timing. Appears (see the middle diagram in FIG. 55C), and when 3 seconds elapse from the playback start timing, “Target 1” appears on the left side of the screen (see the middle diagram in FIG. 56A), and from the playback start timing. When 4 seconds elapse, “target 2” appears on the left side of the screen (see the middle diagram in FIG. 56B), and when 5 seconds elapse from the playback start timing, “target 3” appears on the left side of the screen (FIG. 56 ( (See the left figure of C)) Target 24 "," target 1 "to" target 21 "in order to appear on the left side of the screen of the main liquid crystal 5.

  Here, at the start timing of the ring-throwing effect, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1A starts to play the ring-throwing effect data from the first reproduction start point, and the pachinko gaming machine 1B starts the second reproduction start point of the ring-throwing effect data. When reproduction from is started, the target movement in the main liquid crystal 5 of these two pachinko gaming machines 1 is as follows.

  That is, at the timing when 2 seconds have elapsed from the start timing of the ring-throwing effect, in the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, “Target 1” that has started to be displayed at the left end of the screen at the start timing moves to the right end of the screen. (See the left figure in FIG. 55C). On the other hand, at the timing when 3 seconds have elapsed from the start timing of the ring throwing effect, “Target 1” is erased from the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. In the main liquid crystal 5, “Target 1” appears at the left end of the screen (see the middle diagram in FIG. 56A).

  In this way, when playback is started simultaneously with the playback start point of the same ring-throwing effect data shifted according to the installation position, “target 1” moves across the main liquid crystal 5 of the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1. Looks like you're doing it. The same applies to the other “target 2” to “target 24”.

  Here, the movement of “target 1” has been described by taking only the movement of “target 1”, but the “target 1” that is arranged at approximately equal intervals on each main liquid crystal 5 of pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H. ”To“ May 24 ”are displayed as if they were divided into eight equal parts, and as time passes, these images flow to the pachinko machine 1 on the right. Production data is reproduced in each of the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H so that it looks as if it is going. For this reason, even if playback is started from any playback start point, usually three targets are displayed on each main liquid crystal 5 (see FIG. 55A).

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the reproduction start point selection table. A reproduction start point selection table is stored in the control ROM 144 (see FIG. 58) of each pachinko gaming machine 1 (1A to 1H) (see FIG. 54). As illustrated in FIG. 54, the reproduction start point selection table associates the installation position indicated by the installation position information with the reproduction start point in the ring-throwing effect data.

  In the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H, the ring-throw game is started at the same time using the activation method described above. At that time, the following processing is performed in each of the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, at the start timing of the game effect, the reproduction start point selection table is referred to, and the first reproduction start point is selected as the reproduction start point corresponding to the installation position “1” indicated by the installation position information. Playback is started from the first playback start point.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1B, at the start timing of the game effect, the playback start point selection table is referred to, and the second playback start point is selected as the playback start point corresponding to the installation position “2” indicated by the installation position information. Playback is started from the second playback start point.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1C, the reproduction start point selection table is referred to at the start timing of the game effect, and the third reproduction start point is selected as the reproduction start point corresponding to the installation position “3” indicated by the installation position information. Playback is started from the third playback start point.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machines 1D to 1H, the playback start point is similarly selected, and the fourth playback start point, the fifth playback start point, the sixth playback start point, the seventh playback start point, and the eighth playback start, respectively. Playback starts from the point.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H, the reproduction start point corresponding to the installation position indicated by the respective installation position information is selected, and the reproduction of the ring-throwing effect data is started from the selected reproduction start point.

  FIG. 55 is a first screen diagram illustrating a state where a ring-throw game is simultaneously performed in a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H installed in a horizontal row. FIG. 56 is a second screen diagram illustrating a state where a ring-throw game is simultaneously performed in a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H installed in a horizontal row.

  In these FIG. 55 and FIG. 56, in the pachinko machines 1A to 1H, the reproduction of the ring-throwing effect data is started simultaneously from the reproduction start point corresponding to the installation position indicated by the installation position information stored in each FeRAM 1451. In this case, it is an example of how the effect display in each pachinko gaming machine 1A to 1H changes every second. In these drawings, for convenience of explanation, illustration of a ring-throw game effect display in the pachinko gaming machines 1D to 1H is omitted.

  Paying attention to the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1C, when the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H start the reproduction of the ring-throwing effect data at the same time, the pachinko gaming machine 1A starts reproducing the effect data from the first reproduction start point. In the gaming machine 1B, the reproduction of the production data is started from the second reproduction start point, and in the pachinko gaming machine 1C, the reproduction of the production data is started from the third reproduction start point. Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 55 (A), “target 23”, “target 24”, and “target 1” are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and the main of the pachinko gaming machine 1B is displayed. “Target 20”, “Target 21” and “Target 22” are displayed on the liquid crystal 5, and “Target 17”, “Target 18” and “Target 19” are displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1C. From this state, the reproduction of the ring-throwing effect data in each of the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H is started.

  For example, focusing on the movement of “Target 1”, the movement is as follows. That is, “Target 1” is displayed at the left end of the screen at the playback start timing in the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (see the left diagram in FIG. 55A), and after 1 second, moves to the center of the screen ( (See the left diagram in FIG. 55B) After 2 seconds, the screen moves to the right edge of the screen (see the left diagram in FIG. 55C). On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1B and the pachinko gaming machine 1C, since the reproduction of ring-throwing effect data starts from the second reproduction start point and the third reproduction start point, respectively, 2 seconds from the reproduction start timing. At the elapsed timing, “Target 1” is not yet displayed.

  On the other hand, when 3 seconds elapse from the reproduction start timing, “target 1” is deleted from the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A (the left diagram in FIG. 55C and the left diagram in FIG. 56A). “Reference 1” appears at the left end of the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B (see the middle diagram in FIG. 55C and the middle diagram in FIG. 56A). Therefore, when both the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B are viewed, the “target 1” moves from the former main liquid crystal 5 to the latter main liquid crystal 5. Looks like.

  Thereafter, “target 1” moves to the center of the screen of the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B after 4 seconds from the playback start timing (see the middle diagram in FIG. 56B), and 5 seconds from the playback start timing. When elapses, it moves to the right end of the screen in the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B (see the middle diagram in FIG. 56C). Although not shown in the figure, when 6 seconds elapse from the reproduction start timing, “target 1” disappears from the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1B, and the left end of the screen in the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1C. Is displayed.

  The display position of “target 1” changes in this way, but “target 2” to “target 24” show the same movement. For this reason, the main liquid crystal 5 of the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H can be seen as one screen, and it can be seen that each target is moving within the screen. Due to the synergistic effect of the game, it is possible to produce an extremely high effect.

  Hereinafter, an internal configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and processing performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for realizing execution of the performance series effect, the dropping effect, and the game series effect as described above will be described in detail.

[Configuration of control device of pachinko gaming machine 1]
On the back side of the game board 2, a control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls to be paid out as prize balls. As illustrated in FIG. 57, the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is based on a game control board 100 that controls execution of determination, command transmission processing to the effect control board 130, and the command received from the game control board 100. An effect control board 130 for comprehensively controlling effects, an image sound control board 140 for controlling effects by images and sounds, a lamp control board 150 for controlling effects by various lamps and the rotary light device 8, and the like. . In the present embodiment, the game control board 100 functions as a game control unit that controls the progress of the game, and the effect control board 130, the image sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 function as an effect control unit that controls the effect. .

[Configuration of Game Control Board 100]
The game control board 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and a RAM clear switch 104. The main CPU 101 performs various arithmetic processes related to determination and the number of payout balls based on a program stored in the main ROM 102. The main RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 101 executes the program, or a work area for data processing. The RAM clear switch 104 is a switch for instructing clearing of data stored in the main RAM 103 and is directly mounted on the game control board 100.

  The game control board 100 includes a first start port switch 111, a second start port switch 112, an electric tulip opening / closing unit 113, a gate switch 114, a big winning port switch 115, a big winning port control unit 116, a normal winning port switch 117, The specific prize opening switch 118, the specific area opening / closing part 119, the V prize opening switch 120, the lose prize opening switch 121, the V prize opening opening / closing part 122, and the respective indicators 41 to 43, 45 to 47 constituting the display 4 are connected. Has been.

  The first start port switch 111 detects that a game ball has won the first start port 11 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The second start port switch 112 detects that a game ball has won the second start port 12 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The electric tulip opening / closing part 113 opens and closes the second start port 12 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 so as to be able to transmit driving in response to a control signal from the game control board 100. To do. The gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The big prize opening switch 115 detects that a game ball has won the big prize opening 13 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. In response to a control signal from the game control board 100, the special prize opening control unit 116 opens and closes the special prize opening 13 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to a plate that closes the special prize opening 13 so as to be able to transmit the drive. To do. The normal winning port switch 117 detects that the game ball has won the normal winning port 14, and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100.

  The specific winning opening switch 118 detects that the game ball has won the specific winning opening 19 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The specific area opening / closing unit 119 opens and closes the specific winning opening 19 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the blade member 90 so as to be able to transmit driving in response to a control signal from the game control board 100. The V winning opening switch 120 detects that a game ball has won the V winning opening 92 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The lose prize winning switch 121 detects that the game ball has won the lose prize winning opening 93 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The V winning opening / closing unit 122 opens and closes the V winning opening 92 by operating an electric solenoid coupled to the slide member 94 so as to be able to transmit driving.

  The main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 detects from the first starting port switch 111, the second starting port switch 112, the big winning port switch 115, the normal winning port switch 117, the V winning port switch 120, or the lose prize port switch 121. When the signal is input, the payout control board (not shown) is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won, and based on the information from the payout control board, Manage the number.

  This payout control board is configured to have a drive motor or the like that sends out a prize ball from a ball tank provided on the back side of the game board 2 to the tray 28.

  The main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Further, the main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. If it is determined that the winning game is a big win, the special winning opening 13 is opened and closed via the special winning opening control unit 116.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit, the main CPU 101 opens and closes the specific winning opening 19 by operating the blade member 90 via the specific area opening / closing unit 119, The V winning opening 92 is opened and closed by operating the slide member 94 via the V winning opening opening / closing section 122. When the game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the operation of the slide member 94, the big winning opening 13 is opened and closed via the big winning opening control section 116, as in the case where it is determined that the game is a big win.

  Further, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input, and executes normal symbol determination using the acquired random number. And when it determines with opening the 2nd starting port 12, the 2nd starting port 12 is opened temporarily by operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening / closing part 113.

  Further, the main CPU 101 causes the respective display devices 41 to 43 and 45 to 47 constituting the display device 4 to execute the processing described above with reference to FIG.

[Configuration of Production Control Board 130]
The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 131, a sub ROM 132, a sub RAM 133, and an RTC (real time clock) 134. The sub CPU 131 performs a calculation process when controlling the presentation based on the program stored in the sub ROM 132. The sub RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub CPU 131 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  The RTC 134 measures the current date and time (date and time). The pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated when power is supplied from the island power supply device 600 to the power supply board included in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When power is supplied to the power supply board from the island power supply apparatus 600, the RTC 134 performs a time measuring operation using the power supplied from the power supply board. On the other hand, when power is not supplied from the island power supply device 600 to the power supply board, the RTC 134 performs a time measuring operation with power supplied from a built-in battery (not shown) built in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the RTC 134 can perform a timing operation even when power is not supplied from the power supply board. The built-in battery has a lifespan of about 3 years. However, when power is supplied to the power supply board, the time keeping operation is performed by the power supplied from the power supply board without using the built-in battery. It is possible to extend the life beyond about 3 years. Further, since the timekeeping operation of the RTC 134 is more stable when power is supplied from the power supply board, an effect that the error in the timekeeping operation is reduced can be expected.

  As will be described in detail later, the overall CPU 141 (see FIG. 58) of the image sound control board 140 acquires the RTC information from the RTC 134 and controls the various RTC effects described above.

  The sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets the effect contents of the normal effect based on the game information related to the special symbol determination, the normal symbol determination, the special game, etc. transmitted from the game control board 100. In that case, the input of the operation information from the production | presentation button 26 or the production | presentation key 27 may be received, and the production | generation content according to the operation information may be set. Further, the sub CPU 131 transmits a command for instructing execution of the effect of the set effect content to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. In the present embodiment, setting of the contents of the various RTC effects described above is performed on the image sound control board 140 instead of the effect control board 130.

[Configuration of Lamp Control Board 150]
The lamp control board 150 includes a lamp CPU 151, a lamp ROM 152, and a lamp RAM 153. The lamp CPU 151 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the operation of the frame lamp 37, the rotary light device 8, and the like based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 152. The lamp RAM 153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the lamp CPU 151 executes the program, or a work area such as data processing.

  The lamp ROM 152 stores light emission pattern data and operation pattern data. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating respective light emission patterns of the light emitting elements provided in the frame lamp 37 and the panel lamp 25, the color LEDs 811 and 821 (see FIGS. 6A and 6C) of the rotary light device 8, and the like. It is. The operation pattern data is data indicating an operation pattern of the rotating body 80 (see FIG. 6).

  The lamp CPU 151 reads the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152 to the lamp RAM 153, and the light emitting elements and rotations of the frame lamp 37 and the panel lamp 25. Light emission of the color LEDs 811 and 821 of the light device 8 is controlled. In addition, the lamp CPU 151 reads the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152 to the lamp RAM 153 and operates the rotating body 80 of the rotary light device 8. The driving of the rotating light motor 85 is controlled.

[Configuration of Image Sound Control Board 140]
FIG. 58 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the image sound control board 140. The image sound control board 140 performs image display control of the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 6 and audio output control from the speaker 24. The image sound control board 140 includes a general CPU 141, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 142, an sound DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 143, a control ROM 144, a control RAM 145, an acoustic ROM 146, an SDRAM 147, a VRAM 149, and an FeRAM (Ferroelectric). 1451.

  Based on the programs and various tables stored in the control ROM 144, the commands received from the effect control board 130, the RTC information acquired from the RTC 134, the installation position information stored in the FeRAM 1451, etc., the overall CPU 141 Thus, an instruction to display the image data stored in the CGROM 148 on the main liquid crystal 5 or the sub liquid crystal 6 is issued. This instruction is mainly performed by outputting a display list.

  Here, the display list is composed of commands for instructing execution of drawing in frame units. The type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, display priority, display magnification, and rotation. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The processing for creating this display list will be described in detail later.

  The FeRAM 1451 is a non-volatile memory capable of holding information even when power is not supplied from the island power supply apparatus 600 via the power supply board. In addition to the installation position information described above, this FeRAM 1451 stores information necessary for appropriately switching the production contents of various RTC effects. Specifically, for example, with respect to each sound production of new song A to new song L performed after all songs are released, it is used for the previous sound production in order to appropriately switch the first production sound data to the fourth production sound data. Information that can specify the produced effect sound data is stored. By referring to this information, it is possible to appropriately switch effect sound data.

  Further, in FeRAM 1451, for example, when the scenario of the bingo game is switched every time the bingo game is performed, information that can identify the scenario of the previous bingo game is stored. By referring to this information when setting up a bingo game scenario, the bingo game scenario can be changed appropriately, and for example, the occurrence of a problem in which a bingo game of the same scenario is played twice in a row is suppressed. Is possible.

  Further, the FeRAM 1451 stores information that can identify a combination of problems presented in the previous quiz game regarding the quiz game. By referring to this information when determining the quiz game problem combination, it is possible to appropriately change the quiz game problem combination. For example, in this quiz game, the same problem as the previous quiz game is given. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, regarding the obstacle race, the FeRAM 1451 stores information indicating a scenario used in the current obstacle race. On the other hand, the control ROM 144 stores a plurality of race scenarios having different combinations of final ranks of the characters participating in the obstacle race and scenario information indicating the selection order. When starting the obstacle race, the scenario used for the previous obstacle race is identified based on the information stored in the FeRAM 1451, and the scenario information stored in the control ROM 144 is based on the identification result. By referencing, a race scenario different from the previous race is selected. As a result, the first-ranked character changes every time.

  The control ROM 144 also stores a support character determination table that associates the installation position indicated by the installation position information with the identification information of the character that is ranked second or lower in the current obstacle race for each race scenario. Yes. The support character determination table for each race scenario is configured such that when the race scenario is switched, the support character changes accordingly. For example, in the support character determination table corresponding to the first race scenario, the support character Y is associated with the installation position “1”, and in the support character determination table corresponding to the second race scenario, the installation position A support character S is associated with “1”. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 installed at the installation position “1”, when the race scenario is switched from the first race scenario to the second race scenario, the support character is changed from the character Y to the character. Change to S. In this manner, the change of the support character every time the race scenario is switched is the same in the other pachinko gaming machines 1B to 1H.

  Further, the FeRAM 1451 stores elapsed time information indicating the elapsed time from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 counted by the overall CPU 141. Thus, by storing the elapsed time information in the FeRAM 1451, it is possible to prevent the elapsed time information from being lost due to the power supply being cut off.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first time information is stored in the FeRAM 1451 when the power supply is cut off, and the second time information is stored in the FeRAM 1451 at the timing when the power supply starts to be restarted. The In addition, by calculating the difference between the times indicated by these two pieces of time information, the time during which the power supply is cut off (the power interruption time) is specified. If the power interruption time is less than the predetermined time (5 minutes in this embodiment), the elapsed time information stored in the FeRAM 1451 is updated to information obtained by adding the power interruption time, and the elapsed time after the update. The elapsed time is resumed for the time information. For this reason, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of a problem that the elapsed time indicated by the elapsed time information is shifted from another adjacent pachinko gaming machine 1 and the RTC effect is not synchronized as a result. It is.

  The overall CPU 141 instructs the sound DSP 143 to output the sound data stored in the sound ROM 146 from the speaker 24. The sound data includes sound data used for various RTC effects in addition to the sound data used for normal effects.

  The control ROM 144 is configured by a mask ROM, and stores a control program for the overall CPU 141, a display list generation program for generating a display list, various tables (see FIG. 85), and the like.

  The control RAM 145 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the general CPU 141 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  The CGROM 148 stores effect data (image data) necessary for executing a normal effect, a performance sequence effect, a drop effect, a game sequence effect, and the like. The CGROM 148 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and includes sprite data (one piece of image data) including a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels), and a plurality of pieces of image data. Compressed and stored movie data consisting of a collection of The pixel information is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 148 stores, without compressing, palette data or the like in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other.

  The CGROM 148 individually stores movie data for performing various RTCs.

  The VDP 142 identifies which RTC effect execution is instructed based on the display list created by the overall CPU 141, and performs processing for reading out the specified RTC effect movie data from the CGROM 148 and playing it back. Thereby, for example, a performance performance is realized.

  Further, the CGROM 148 stores normal effect data and special effect data as sprite data used for generating a normal effect image. The normal effect data is default data that can be used regardless of whether or not the performance effect is performed, and image data of the first default background image and the second default background image corresponds to this. On the other hand, the special performance data is sprite data (for example, image data of a new song A background image and a new song B background image) that can be used only after the first performance performance is performed. Is remembered. This special effect data is generated in advance by editing the image data constituting the performance effect movie data. That is, the image data constituting the performance data for the performance of the new song A is edited in advance, the special effect data corresponding to the new song A generated in advance, and the image data constituting the movie data for the performance performance of the new song B is generated in advance. Special effect data corresponding to each new song, such as the special effect data corresponding to the new song B, is stored in the CGROM 148.

  In the present embodiment, in order to increase the appearance rate of the normal effect using the newly available special effect data as much as possible, the normal effect using the normal effect data every time the usable special effect data increases. Special selection to switch the display list creation table each time a new song is performed for the first time so that the appearance rate of normal performance using normal performance data will eventually become zero, gradually decreasing the appearance rate of Is executed. This special selection will be described in detail later.

  The VDP 142 reads normal effect data or special effect data from the CGROM 148 based on the display list created by the overall CPU 141, and executes a drawing process for performing the normal effect. Since the special performance data is not read when the first performance performance has never been performed, the rendering process using the normal performance data is performed. For example, a default background image is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5. . On the other hand, for example, when the first performance performance of the new song A is performed, the special performance data for the new song A is read, and the drawing process using the special performance data is performed, for example, the background image of the new song A Is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5. Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the use restriction of the special performance data of the new song is released when the first performance performance of the new song is performed.

  Note that only a part of the image data stored in the CGROM 148 may be compressed. As a method for compressing movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The VRAM 149 is configured by an SRAM capable of writing and reading image data at high speed, and includes a display list storage area 1491, a development storage area 1492, a full screen frame buffer 1493, a reduced image frame buffer 1494, a main liquid crystal display. And a sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496.

  The display list storage area 1491 temporarily stores the display list output from the overall CPU 141. The expanded storage area 1492 stores image data that has been read from the CGROM 148 and expanded. The full-screen frame buffer 1493 is a drawing frame buffer for drawing an image (see, for example, FIG. 15A) displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 on the full screen. The reduced image frame buffer 1494 is a drawing frame buffer for drawing an image to be reduced and displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 (see, for example, FIG. 15B). The main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 is a display frame buffer that temporarily stores image data transferred from the full-screen frame buffer 1493 (and the reduced image frame buffer 1494). The sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 is a frame buffer that is used for both drawing and display for drawing and displaying image data (for example, a slot image: see FIG. 15C) displayed on the sub liquid crystal 6.

  The VDP 142 decompresses the image data stored in a compressed state in the CGROM 148 and stores the decompressed image data in the expanded storage area 1492. Also, the VDP 142 performs drawing processing using the full screen frame buffer 1493, the reduced image frame buffer 1494, or the sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 based on the display list stored in the display list storage area 1491. The VDP 142 generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the display frame buffer (main liquid crystal frame buffer 1495 or sub liquid crystal frame buffer 1496) in the VRAM 149. The processed RGB signals are output to the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 6.

  Connected to the acoustic DSP 143 are an acoustic ROM 146 for storing various acoustic data (including acoustic data related to RTC effects) related to music, voice, sound effects, etc., and an SDRAM 147 used as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP 143. ing. The acoustic DSP 143 reads the acoustic data corresponding to the instruction from the overall CPU 141 from the acoustic ROM 146 to the SDRAM 147, executes data processing, and outputs the acoustic data after the data processing to the speaker 24.

  In this embodiment, the case where the VDP 142 is responsible for drawing management and the acoustic DSP 143 is responsible for sound management has been described. However, in another embodiment, the VDP 142 is responsible for both drawing management and sound management. May be. In this case, it is not necessary to provide the acoustic DSP 143 separately.

[Main processing by game control board 100]
Next, the main process executed in the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This main process is started when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and is continuously executed while the game control board 100 is activated.

  As illustrated in FIG. 59, the main CPU 101 first waits for 1000 ms (step S901), and then permits access to the main RAM 103 (step S902). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 104 is “ON” (step S903).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the RAM clear switch 104 is “ON” (step S903: YES), the main CPU 101 transmits a predetermined power restoration screen display command to the image sound control board 140 via the effect control board 130, for example. This instructs the image sound control board 140 to display the power restoration screen (see FIG. 33A) (step S904). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 104 is “ON” during display of the power recovery screen (step S905). If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 104 is not “ON” (step S905: NO), the process returns to step S905. That is, the state where the power recovery screen is displayed is maintained until the RAM clear switch 104 is turned “ON”.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RAM clear switch 104 is “ON” during display of the power recovery screen (step S905: YES), the main CPU 101 performs RAM clear (step S906). Here, since RAM clear is a known technique, a detailed description thereof is omitted, but is a process of setting various information (for example, information indicating a gaming state) stored in the main RAM 103 to a predetermined initial state.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 33, when the effect button 26 is pressed while the power supply restoration screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, the power supply restoration screen (see FIG. 33A) is displayed at the installation position. The screen is switched to the setting screen (see FIG. 33B).

  Following the RAM clear, the main CPU 101 sets a work area when the RAM is cleared (step S907), and performs an initial setting of the peripheral portion (step S908). Here, the peripheral portion is the effect control board 130, the image sound control board 140, a payout control board (not shown), or the like. Initial setting of the peripheral portion is performed by transmitting a command instructing execution of the initial setting to each control board.

  On the other hand, when determining that the RAM clear switch 104 is not “ON” (step S903: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether the backup flag is “ON” (step S909). If it is determined that the backup flag is “ON” (step S909: YES), it is determined whether the checksum is normal (step S910).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the checksum is normal (step S910: YES), the main CPU 101 executes a recovery process described later based on FIG. 61 (step S911). If it is determined that the backup flag is not “ON” (step S909: NO), or if it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S910: NO), the process proceeds to step S904 described above. .

  When the process of step S908 is executed or when the process of step S911 is executed, the main CPU 101 sets a built-in CTC (timer counter) cycle to 4 ms, for example (step S913). The main CPU 101 executes timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 62) described later using the CTC period set here. Further, when the CTC cycle is set in step S913, the main CPU 101 executes a power shutdown monitoring process for monitoring power shutdown (step S914). The power shutdown monitoring process will be described later in detail based on FIG.

  Following the process of step S914, the main CPU 101 updates the variation pattern random number (step S915), and performs a setting for prohibiting interruption of the timer interrupt process (step S916). Then, the main CPU 101 updates the initial value random number (step S917), and performs setting to permit interruption of the timer interrupt process (step S918). The main CPU 101 repeatedly executes such a series of processing from step S914 to step S918.

[Power-off monitoring process by game control unit 100]
FIG. 60 is a detailed flowchart of the power-off monitoring process in step S914 in FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 60, the main CPU 101 prohibits the interrupt process (step S9141) following the process of step S913 or step S918, and determines whether or not a power cut-off signal is input from a power supply unit (not shown). Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is interrupted (step S9142). Here, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power supply is not cut off (step S9142: NO), the main CPU 101 permits an interrupt process (step S9143).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the power supply is cut off (step S9142: YES), the main CPU 101 clears the output port to which various information is input to the main CPU 101 (step S9144), and the main RAM 103 at the time of the power interruption is cleared. A checksum is created from the contents and stored in the main RAM 103 (step S9145). Then, the backup flag is set to “ON” (step S9146), and access to the main RAM 103 is prohibited (step S9147).

  As described above, when the process of step S9143 or step S9147 is executed, the series of power shutdown monitoring processes ends, and the process proceeds to step S915 described above. It should be noted that the processing from step S9144 to step S9147 is performed after detecting that the power supply voltage has started to decrease due to the start of power-off of the power supplied to the game control board 100 (after determining “YES” in step S9142). ) It is performed during a period until the power supply voltage becomes “0”.

[Recovery processing by game control unit 100]
FIG. 61 is a detailed flowchart of the recovery process in step S911 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 61, when the main CPU 101 determines “YES” in step S910, the main CPU 101 sets a work area of the main RAM 103 when the power is restored (step S9111). Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the information stored in the main RAM 103 to determine whether or not a big hit game is in progress when the power supply is cut off (step S9112). If it is determined that the game is a jackpot game (step S9112: YES), the jackpot state immediately before the occurrence of power interruption is restored (step S9113).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot is not a big hit when the power supply is cut off (step S9112: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether the power supply is cut off or not (time saving game state) (step S9114). ). If it is determined that the time is short (step S9114: YES), the time is restored to the state immediately before the occurrence of power interruption (step S9115).

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the time has not been shortened when the power supply is cut off (step S9114: NO), the main CPU 101 recovers to the normal state (normal game state) immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption (step S9116).

  Subsequent to the processing in step S9113, step S9115, or step S9116, the main CPU 101 performs setting of peripheral parts (not-shown payout control unit, image sound control board 140, lamp control unit 150) (step S9117), and backup. The flag is set to “OFF” (step S9118). Then, when the process of step S9118 is executed, the process proceeds to step S913 described above.

[Timer interrupt processing by game control board 100]
Next, timer interrupt processing executed in the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process executed in the game control board 100. The game control board 100 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 62 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. . Note that the processing of the game control board 100 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 62 and subsequent figures is performed according to instructions issued by the main CPU 101 based on a program stored in the main ROM 102.

  First, the main CPU 101 executes random number update processing for updating various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, a variation pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1).

  Here, the jackpot random number is a random number for determining the jackpot, the jackpot, or the loss. The jackpot design random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. The small hitting design random number is a random number for determining the type of two types of big hits generated when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small hitting game. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach when it is determined that the reach is lost. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The normal symbol random number is a random number for determining whether or not to open the second start port 12. The jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number, the variation pattern random number, and the normal symbol random number are incremented by “1” every time the process of step S1 is performed. Note that a loop counter is used as a counter for performing the processing of step S1, and each random number returns to “0” after reaching a preset maximum value.

  Subsequent to the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 executes a switch process when a detection signal is input from each switch (step S2). This switch processing will be described later in detail based on FIG.

  Following the processing of step S2, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol determination, displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and shows the result of the special symbol determination. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying the determination symbol is executed (step S3). This special symbol process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S3, the main CPU 101 includes a process of executing normal symbol determination, causing the normal symbol display unit 45 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4). This normal symbol processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the process of step S4, the main CPU 101 performs the electric tulip process for operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip opening / closing part 113 when it is determined that the second start port 12 is opened as a result of the normal symbol determination. Is executed (step S5). This electric tulip process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the process of step S5, the main CPU 101 activates the blade member 90 via the specific area opening / closing part 119 and determines the V prize opening opening / closing part when it is determined that the small symbol is won in the special symbol process of step S3. A specific area opening control process for operating the slide member 94 via 122 is executed (step S6). The specific area release control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S6, the main CPU 101 controls the big winning opening control unit 116 when it is determined that the big winning is made in step S3, or when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small winning game. Then, a special winning opening opening control process for opening the special winning opening 13 is executed (step S7). The special winning opening opening control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequent to the process of step S7, the main CPU 101 executes a prize ball process for controlling the payout of the prize ball according to the winning of the game ball (step S8).

  Subsequent to the process of step S8, the main CPU 101 transmits to the effect control board 130 information necessary to determine various commands and effect contents set (stored) in the main RAM 103 in the process step before step S8. Processing is executed (step S9). By executing the process of step S9, game information relating to special symbol determination and special games is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, the game information includes a change start command, a symbol determination command, an opening command, a round start command, an ending command, and the like, which will be described later.

[Configuration Example of Main RAM 103]
FIG. 63 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main RAM 103 of the game control board 100. 63A, the main RAM 103 includes a determination storage area 1030, a first reserved storage area 1031, a second reserved storage area 1032, a third reserved storage area 1033, and a fourth reserved storage area. 1034 is provided.

  The determination storage area 1030 is a storage area for storing various information used for the special symbol determination when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 are storage areas in which various information related to the first special symbol determination is stored.

  As illustrated in FIG. 24B, the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1034 respectively store areas for storing jackpot random numbers, areas for storing jackpot symbol random numbers, and reach random numbers acquired by the main CPU 101. It includes a region, a region for storing variation pattern random numbers, and a region for storing prior determination information.

  The pre-determination information is information obtained by a pre-determination process (see FIG. 66) described later based on the jackpot random number, the design random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number. Specifically, the pre-determination information includes information indicating whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot, information indicating what type of the jackpot if the jackpot is, a special symbol It includes information indicating a variation pattern, information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like. The prior determination information is stored in the same storage area as the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number used in the prior determination process.

  The five pieces of information described based on FIG. 63 (B) are stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 in order from the first reserved storage area 1031 every time a game ball wins the first start port 11. Stored in either. For example, when five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination are newly acquired in a state where no information is stored in any of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034, the five pieces of information are: It is stored in the first reserved storage area 1031. For example, when five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination are newly acquired in a state where five pieces of information are stored in each of the first reserved storage area 1031 and the second reserved storage area 1032, the five pieces of information Is stored in the third reserved storage area 1033.

  When the reserved first special symbol determination is digested, the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 when the first special symbol determination is executed. The information stored in the hold storage areas after the second hold storage area 1032 is shifted to the first hold storage area 1031 side. For example, when information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 in a state where information is stored in each of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the third reserved storage area 1033, the second Information stored in the reserved storage area 1032 is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031, and information stored in the third reserved storage area 1033 is shifted to the second reserved storage area 1032.

  By the way, even when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or when a random number is acquired by winning a game ball at the first starting port 11 during a big hit game, the special symbol determination or the special symbol variation display is immediately performed. I can't.

  For this reason, when various random numbers are acquired under such circumstances, the main CPU 101 stores the acquired various random numbers in the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1034 as the right of the first special symbol determination as described above. I am going to store it. On the other hand, if the special symbol is not variably displayed, the first special symbol determination is not held, and the jackpot game is not in progress, the main CPU 101 obtains various random numbers acquired with the start opening prize as a trigger. Are directly stored in the determination storage area 1030. Specifically, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers acquired when the game ball wins the first starting port 11 in the determination storage area 1030 instead of the holding storage areas 1031 to 1034.

  As described above, since the second special symbol determination is not suspended, the reserved storage area for the second special symbol determination is not provided. For this reason, when a game ball wins the second starting port 12 in a situation where the second special symbol determination can be immediately executed, various random numbers acquired in accordance with the winning are stored in the determination storage area 1030.

[Switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 64 is a detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. Subsequent to the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence / absence of a detection signal input from the first start port switch 111, as illustrated in FIG. 64, and is appropriately updated by the process of step S1. For the random numbers (big hit random number, big hit design random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number), a first start port switch process is performed to acquire a value at the time when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input ( Step S21). The first start port switch process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the second start port switch 112, and various random numbers (big hit random number, big hit symbol random number, small bonus symbol updated as appropriate by the process of step S1. For the random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number), a second start port switch process is performed to acquire a value at the time when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input (step S22). The second start port switch process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Then, the main CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate switch 114, and the value at the time when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input with respect to the normal symbol random number that is appropriately updated by the process of step S1. The gate switch process for acquiring the above is executed (step S23). This gate switch processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

[First Start Port Switch Processing by Game Control Board 100]
FIG. 65 is a detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 65, following the random number update process in step S1, the main CPU 101 detects a detection signal from the first start port switch 111 (indicating that the first start port switch 111 is “ON”). Based on whether or not an ON signal is input, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 111 is turned “ON” (step S211). Here, when it is determined that the first start port switch 111 has been turned “ON” (step S211: YES), the number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether it is less than the maximum reserved number Umax1 (in the present embodiment, “4”) of the first special symbol determination (step S212).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1 (step S212: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U1 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S213). Then, as the acquisition information used for the first special symbol determination, a jackpot random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are associated with each other and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step). S214 to S217).

  When the main CPU 101 stores the four random numbers in this way, the main CPU 101 executes a pre-determination process. Specifically, prior to the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 70) and the variation pattern selection process, which will be described later, based on the information stored in the main RAM 103 by the processes of steps S214 to S217, whether or not the jackpot is determined in advance is determined. In addition to the determination, a prior determination for acquiring a variation pattern of the special symbol that is actually selected when the first special symbol determination is executed is executed. This prior determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 101 sets a hold command, which is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination is put on hold and includes the pre-determination information obtained in the process of step S218, in the main RAM 103 (step S219). . This hold command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the result of the first special symbol determination is either a big hit or a loss, and the first special symbol determination is not determined to be a small hit that generates a small hit game. Has been. For this reason, the first start port switch process does not include a step of acquiring a small hitting design random number for determining the type of the two big hits.

[Preliminary determination processing by game control board 100]
Hereinafter, the prior determination process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 66 is a detailed flowchart of the prior determination process in step S218 of FIG.

  The main CPU 101 reads the jackpot random number table stored in the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103 following the process of step S217 in FIG. 65, and performs jackpot determination processing (step S2181). Specifically, the jackpot random number acquired in the process of step S214 is determined to be a jackpot at the start of the change based on whether or not the winning value stored in the jackpot random number table matches. It is determined whether or not.

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, prior to the jackpot determination performed at the start of the change, it is determined in advance whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result in step S2181 is information indicating that it is determined to be a big hit at the start of the change (step S2182), and indicates that it is determined to be a big hit. (Step S2182: YES), the big hit variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S2183).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not information indicating that it is determined to be a big hit (step S2182: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a reach effect is performed during the change (step S2184). Specifically, the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process in step S2181 (the reach random number acquired in the process in step S216) is selected as the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102. Whether or not a reach effect is performed during the change is determined based on whether or not the value matches.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the reach effect is to be performed (step S2184: YES), the main CPU 101 reads the reach variation pattern table from the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103 (step S2185).

  By the way, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is losing and the reach effect is not performed during the change, the change pattern of the special symbol is based on the number of the first special symbol determination held at the start of the change. It is determined. The number of first special symbol determinations may be different before and after the first special symbol determination being held is digested. For this reason, the variation pattern of the special symbol acquired before the first special symbol determination is digested may be different from the variation pattern of the special symbol selected when the first special symbol determination is actually digested. is there. That is, it is difficult to obtain an accurate variation pattern of the special symbol prior to the first special symbol determination for the right of the first special symbol determination in which the reach effect is not performed during the variation.

  Therefore, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S2184: NO), the process proceeds to step S2187 described later.

  After setting the big hit variation pattern table or the reach variation pattern table, the main CPU 101 performs a variation pattern random number determination process (step S2186). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern random number acquired at the time of winning the first start opening together with the jackpot random number used in the processing of step S2181 is the random number value specified in the fluctuation pattern table set in the main RAM 103. Based on which random number value matches, the variation pattern of the special symbol to be selected in the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variation is specified.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S2186 or determines that the reach effect is not performed (step S2184: NO), the main CPU 101 generates pre-determination information to generate the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area. 1034 (step S21987). Specifically, when both the jackpot determination process in step S2181 and the variation pattern random number determination process in step S2186 are performed as a series of processes, information indicating the results of these determination processes is used for these processes. Is stored as prior determination information in the same reserved storage area where the jackpot random numbers and symbol random numbers used in the above are stored. In addition, when the variation pattern random number determination process in step S2186 is not performed after the big hit determination process in step S2181, information indicating the result of the big hit determination process is stored as the big hit random number used in the big hit determination process. It is stored as prior judgment information in the same reserved storage area.

  As described above, the main CPU 101 obtains a jackpot random number or the like acquired when the game ball has won the first start port 11 and stored in any of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034. Based on the acquired information, the variation pattern (that is, the variation time) of the special symbol is acquired before the jackpot determination processing and the variation pattern selection processing based on the acquired information are performed.

[Second Start Port Switch Processing by Game Control Board 100]
FIG. 67 is a detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 67, the main CPU 101 detects the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 (the second start port switch 112 is turned “ON” following the first start port switch process in step S21. On the basis of whether or not an ON signal indicating that the second start port switch 112 has been turned ON is determined (step S221).

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the second start port switch 112 is “ON” (step S221: YES), for example, a long hit game flag, a short hit game flag, or a small hit game stored in the main RAM 103. Based on whether or not the flag is set to “ON”, it is determined whether or not a special game is being played (step S222).

  Here, the long win game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a long win game consisting of a plurality of long open round games that open the big winning opening 13 is long, and is set to “ON” at the start of the long win game. Is set to “OFF” at the end of the long hit game. The short win game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a short win game consisting of a plurality of short open round games that open the big winning opening 13 is short, and is set to “ON” at the start of the short win game. And set to “OFF” at the end of the short hit game. The small hit game flag is a flag indicating whether or not a small hit game for opening the specific winning opening 19 is being executed, and is set to “ON” at the start of the small hit game, and “ OFF "is set.

  When determining that the special game is not being played (step S222: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol display on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 is being displayed. (Step S223). Here, when it is determined that the special symbol variation display is not being performed (step S223: NO), as the acquisition information used for the second special symbol determination, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the jackpot symbol random number, the reach random number And the variation pattern random numbers are acquired, and these random numbers are associated with each other and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (steps S224 to S228).

  As described above, when the game ball wins the second starting port 12 when the special game is not being displayed and the special symbol is not being displayed, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers used for the second special symbol determination in the main game. The data is directly stored in the determination storage area 1030 of the RAM 103. The determination storage area 1030 is a storage area for storing various random numbers used for the special symbol determination when the special symbol determination is actually executed. When a game ball is won at the first starting port 11, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers used for the first special symbol determination in any of the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1034 of the main RAM 103, and actually When the first special symbol determination is performed and the variation display of the special symbol is started, various random numbers stored in the reserved storage area 1031 are shifted to the determination storage area 1030.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the game ball has won the second starting port 12 during the special symbol change display or during the special game, the special symbol change related to the second special symbol determination corresponding to the winning is made. When the display cannot be started immediately, the second special symbol determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 12 is not performed. On the other hand, when a game ball wins at the first start port 11, even if the variable symbol display related to the first special symbol determination corresponding to the winning cannot be started immediately, the right of the first special symbol determination is 4 is the upper limit.

[Gate switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 68 is a detailed flowchart of the gate switch process in step S23 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 68, the main CPU 101 detects the detection signal from the gate switch 114 (ON signal indicating that the gate switch 114 is “ON”) following the second start-up port switch process in step S <b> 22. It is determined whether or not the gate switch 114 is turned “ON” based on whether or not is input (step S231).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the gate switch 114 has been turned “ON” (step S231: YES), the normal symbol determination suspension number T stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the determination is less than the maximum hold number Tmax (for example, “4”) (step S232).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number T is less than the maximum hold number Tmax (step S232: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the hold number T to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S233), and is held by this process. A normal symbol random number used for normal symbol determination is acquired and stored in the main RAM 103 (step S234).

[Special symbol processing by game control board 100]
Next, the details of the special symbol process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol process in step S3 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 69, the main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 determines whether the long hit game flag, the short hit game flag, or the small hit game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON”. Whether or not a special game is in progress is determined based on the determination (step S301). Here, when it is determined that the special game is being played (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the special game is not being played (step S301: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being changed (step S302). Here, when it is determined that the special symbol variation display is not being performed (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not various random numbers related to the second start opening winning are stored in the determination storage area of the main RAM 103 ( Step S303). Specifically, various random numbers acquired in response to the game ball winning the second start opening 12 are directly stored in the determination storage area, and various random numbers related to the second start opening winning are stored. Is stored in the determination storage area. Based on whether or not this flag is stored when various random numbers are stored in the determination storage area, various types of information stored in the determination storage area are stored. It is determined whether the random number is related to the second start opening winning or the first starting opening winning. Here, when it is determined that the random number related to the second start opening winning is stored (step S303: YES), the process proceeds to step S307 described later.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the random number related to the second start opening winning is not stored in the determination storage area (step S303: NO), the main CPU 101 stores the first special symbol determination hold number U1 stored in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not “1” or more (step S304). Here, when it is determined that the hold count U1 is “1” or more (step S304: YES), the hold count U1 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S305). Then, a shift process for the storage area of the main RAM 103 is executed (step S306). Specifically, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers related to the first special symbol determination stored in the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103 are first stored in the reserved storage area. (The oldest) is shifted to the determination storage area 1030, and the remaining ones are shifted to the determination storage area side.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S306, or determines that the random number related to the second start opening winning is stored in the determination storage area 1030 (step S303: YES), the main CPU 101 stores the determination in the determination storage area 1030. Based on the stored random number, the jackpot determination process is executed (step S307). By executing this jackpot determination process, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss, and setting information of a determination symbol indicating the determination result is set in the main RAM 103. When it is determined that the game is a big hit (1 type big win), the type of the big win is determined, and when it is determined that the jackpot is a game, the game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game. The kind of two types of jackpots that will be triggered by this is determined. The jackpot determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the process of step S307, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern selection process (step S308). Specifically, referring to the variation pattern table stored in advance in the main ROM 102, the determination result of the jackpot determination in step S307, the type of determination symbol set in the main RAM 103, the current gaming state, the first special symbol The variation pattern of the special symbol is selected based on the reach random number and variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 together with the determination hold number U1 and the jackpot random number used in the process of step S307. By performing the processing in step S308, it is also determined whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach.

  Following the processing of step S308, the main CPU 101 determines whether the symbol setting information set in step S307, the symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination, or the second special symbol determination. Information indicating whether or not, a variation pattern setting information set in the process of step S308, information indicating which of the effects with reach or effects without reach, information regarding the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, etc. A change start command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S309). This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9.

  On the other hand, the effect control board 130 needs to specify the result of the special symbol determination by analyzing the variation start command received from the game control board 100, and perform either the effect with reach or the effect without reach. To determine the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by acquiring the variation time during which the special symbol is variably displayed. Then, accompanying the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, what kind of effect image is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 and what kind of sound is output from the speaker 24. Whether or not the frame lamp 37 is caused to emit light is determined, and the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 are caused to execute the effect of the determined content.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S309, the main CPU 101 starts the special symbol variation display based on the setting information included in the variation start command set in step S309 (step S310). The special symbol variation display is performed when the processing in steps S307 to S309 is performed in a state where the random number related to the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area. 41. When the process of steps S307 to S309 is performed in a state where random numbers relating to the second special symbol determination are stored, the second special symbol display 42 is used.

  Subsequent to step S310, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the customer waiting flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S311). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a customer waiting state, the right for the first special symbol determination is not reserved, and the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol is not held. It is set to “ON” at the timing when the special symbol variation display related to symbol determination is not performed, and is set to “OFF” when the special symbol variation display is started again.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the customer waiting flag is set to “ON” (step S311: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the customer waiting flag to “OFF” (step S312). Then, when the process of step S312 is executed, or when it is determined that the customer waiting flag is not set to “ON” (step S311: NO), measurement of the variation time is started (step S313).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S313 or determines that the special symbol is changing (step S302: YES), the main CPU 101 is selected by the process of step S308 from the start of the measurement of the changing time in step S313. It is determined whether or not the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (step S315). Here, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (step S315: NO), a series of special symbol processing ends, and the processing proceeds to normal symbol processing in step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the variation time has elapsed (step S315: YES), the determination symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. Is set in the main RAM 103 (step S316). This symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S9. Thereby, the process etc. which stop-display the decoration symbol which was variably displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 in the aspect which shows the determination result of special symbol determination, etc. are performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S316, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation display started in the process of step S310 (step S317). At that time, the determination symbol (big hit symbol, small bonus symbol, or lost symbol) set in the process of step S307 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display which has variably displayed the special symbol.

  Subsequent to the process of step S318, the main CPU 101 resets the variation time that started the measurement in the process of step S313 (step S318), starts the first special game if it is a big win, and if it is a small win The stop process including the process of starting the small hit game is executed (step S319). This stop process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the number U1 of the first special symbol determination is not “1” or more (step S304: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether the customer waiting flag is set to “ON”. (Step S321). If it is determined that the customer waiting flag is set to “ON” (step S321: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process in step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the customer waiting flag is not set to “ON” (step S321: NO), the main CPU 101 sets a customer waiting command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the customer waiting state in the main RAM 103. (Step S322), the customer waiting flag is set to "ON" (Step S323). This customer waiting command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9. As a result, when a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds) elapses after the customer waiting command is transmitted, the customer waiting effect is started.

[Big hit judgment processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 70 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S307 of FIG. When the main CPU 101 determines that the random number related to the second special symbol determination is stored together with the flag in the determination storage area (step S303: YES), or when the process of step S306 is executed, it is exemplified in FIG. In this manner, the jackpot determination is executed (step S3071). Here, when executing the jackpot determination relating to the second start opening winning, the jackpot determination table relating to the first starting opening winning is executed with reference to the second starting opening winning jackpot determination table stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. When doing so, the first start opening winning jackpot determination table stored in advance in the main ROM 102 is referred to.

  In the second start opening winning jackpot determination table, a determination result and a random value are stored in association with each other. Specifically, a random value for the big hit, a random value for the small hit, and a random value for the loss are stored. When the main CPU 101 executes the jackpot determination related to the second start opening winning a prize, the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area matches any random value defined in the second starting opening winning jackpot determination table It is determined whether it is a big hit (one type big hit), a small hit or a loss based on whether or not.

  In the first start opening winning jackpot determination table, a determination result and a random value are stored in association with each other. Specifically, a random value for jackpot and a random value for loss are stored. When the main CPU 101 executes the jackpot determination related to the first start opening winning prize, the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area matches any random number value defined in the first starting opening winning jackpot determination table It is determined whether it is a big hit (1 type big hit) or lost.

  As described above, the main CPU 101 determines that the various random numbers stored in the determination storage area are satisfied when the start condition is established such that various random numbers related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination are stored in the determination storage area. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not to perform the first special game.

  Based on the determination result of step S3071, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a one-type big hit (step S3072). Here, when it is determined that it is one kind of big hit (step S3072: YES), the type of big hit is determined with reference to the symbol determination table at the time of big hit stored in the main ROM 102 (step S3073).

  In the symbol determination table at the time of jackpot, the hit type and the random number value are stored in association with each other. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number stored in the determination storage area together with the jackpot random number matches a random jackpot value specified in the symbol determination table at the jackpot time. Determine the type. Examples of the type 1 big hit in the first special symbol determination include “per 7R without time reduction”, “per 4R with time reduction”, and “abrupt time reduction”. Examples of the type big hit in the second special symbol determination Examples include “per 4R without time reduction”, “per 15R with time reduction”, and “per 4R with time reduction” (see FIG. 4).

  The main CPU 101 sets the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S3073 as setting information in the main RAM 103 (step S3074). As a result, the jackpot symbol set here in the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and the first special game is executed. Will be.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the special symbol determination is not one type big hit (step S3072: NO), it is based on whether or not the flag related to the second special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area. Then, it is determined whether or not this special symbol determination is a first special symbol determination related to the first start opening prize (step S3075). Here, when it is determined that the first special symbol determination is made (step S3075: YES), if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is not a big hit, it is a loss, so the lost symbol is set in the main RAM 103 as setting information. (Step S3076). As a result, the lost symbol set here in the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the first special symbol display 41.

  When the determination result of the second special symbol determination is not a big hit, the determination result is a small hit or a loss. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not the first special symbol determination (step S3075: NO), that is, if the current special symbol determination is the second special symbol determination, the result of the jackpot determination in step S3071 It is determined whether or not is a small hit (step S3077). Specifically, based on whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area matches the random number value corresponding to the jackpot specified in the second start opening winning jackpot determination table. 2 It is determined whether the determination result of the special symbol determination is a small hit or a loss.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is not a small hit (step S3077: NO), the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3076. In this case, the lost symbol set here in the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the second special symbol display 42.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit (step S3077: YES), the main CPU 101 refers to the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. Is determined (step S3078). Specifically, the type of the small hit is determined based on which random number value specified in the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit matches the random number for small hit stored in the determination storage area To do. Then, the determined small hit symbol is set in the main RAM 103 as setting information (step S3079). Thereby, the small winning symbol set here at the time of the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the second special symbol indicator 42.

  When the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 in this way, the above-described small hit game is started. Then, when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game, two kinds of big wins are made, and the second special game is performed with the small hit game as the first round. The type of big hit of two types is determined based on the small hit symbol that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42. For this reason, the process which determines the kind of small hits can be regarded as the process which determines the kind of two types big hit. Examples of the two types of big hits include “per 15R with time reduction”, “per 4R with time reduction”, and “per 4R without time reduction” (see FIG. 4).

[Processing during stop by game control board 100]
FIG. 71 is a detailed flowchart of the stopping process in step S319 of FIG. After resetting the variation time by the process of step S318, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a type 1 big hit based on the result of the big hit determination of step S3071 as illustrated in FIG. Step S3191). Here, when it is determined that it is a type 1 big hit (step S3191: YES), it is determined whether the first special game executed for the type 1 big hit is a long hit game or a short hit game ( Step S3192). Specifically, based on the setting information, the jackpot symbol set in the main RAM 103 in the process of step S3074 determines whether a long hit game or a short hit game is performed. In the present embodiment, a short win game is played only when “suddenly a short win”, and a long win game is played for other types of big hits.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the game is a long game (step S3192: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the long game flag to “ON” (step S3193), and determines that the game is not a long game (step S3193). Step S3192: NO), the short winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S3194).

  Following the process of step S3193 or the process of step S3194, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the short-time game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S3195). The short-time game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the short-time game state, and is set to “ON” when the normal game state shifts to the short-time game state. It is set to “OFF” when returning to the normal gaming state from. If it is determined that the short-time game flag is set to “ON” (step S3195: YES), the short-time game flag is set to “OFF” (step S3196).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a one-type big hit (step S3191: NO), it determines whether or not the time-saving game flag is set to “ON” (step S3197). If it is determined that the short-time game flag is set to “ON” (step S3197: YES), the short-time game remaining number W stored in the main RAM 103 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step). S3198). The short game remaining number W indicates the remaining number of times that the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed in the short time gaming state. When the short game residual number W becomes “0”, the game The state is returned from the short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state.

  Subsequent to step S3198, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time-saving remaining game count W is “0” (step S3199). Here, when it is determined that the short time remaining game count W is “0” (step S3199: YES), the short time game flag is set to “OFF” (step S3200). As a result, the gaming state is returned from the short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state.

  The main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3200, determines that the time-saving game flag is not “ON” (step S3197: NO), or determines that the time-saving game remaining count W is not “0” ( In step S3199: NO, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit like the processing in step S3077 (step S3201). If it is determined that the game is a small hit (step S3201: YES), the small hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S3202).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S3196, determines that the time-saving game flag is not set to “ON” (step S3195: NO), or executes the process of step S3202, the main CPU 101 opens to the main RAM 103. A command is set (step S3203). Here, the term “opening” refers to a period from the start of a long win game or a short win game until the first big winning opening 13 is opened, or the first special winning opening 19 is opened after the small winning game is started. It means the period until it starts. On the other hand, the opening command is a command for notifying that the opening is started, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S9.

[Normal design processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 72 is a detailed flowchart of the normal symbol process in step S4 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 72, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” following the special symbol processing in step S3 (step S401). ). This auxiliary game flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the electric tulip 17 is in an auxiliary game in which the operation of returning to the closed posture after maintaining the open posture for a predetermined time is being performed a predetermined number of times, and is set to “ON” during the auxiliary game. It is set and set to “OFF” when it is not in an auxiliary game.

  If it is determined in step S401 that the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S401: YES), the process proceeds to the electric tulip process in step S5.

  When determining that the auxiliary game flag is not set to “ON” (step S401: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the normal symbol display on the normal symbol display 45 is being displayed (step S402). ), When it is determined that the normal symbol variation display is not being performed (step S402: NO), it is determined whether or not the number T of the normal symbol determination is “1” or more (step S403). Here, when it is determined that the number of holds T is not “1” or more (step S403: NO), the process proceeds to the electric tulip process of step S5.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of holds T is “1” or more (step S403: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the number of holds T to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S404), and executes a hit random number determination process. (Step S405). Specifically, the oldest normal symbol random number among the normal symbol random numbers stored in the main RAM 103 by the processing in step S234 (see FIG. 68) is the winning value related to the normal symbol determination stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win based on whether or not it matches any of the above.

  Following the process of step S405, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win based on the determination result of step S405 (step S406). In step S406: YES), a winning symbol to be stopped and displayed as a determination symbol on the normal symbol display 45 is set in the main RAM 103 (step S407). On the contrary, when it is determined that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is not successful (step S406: NO), the lost symbol is set in the main RAM 103 (step S408).

  Following the processing of step S407 or step S408, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal gaming state based on whether or not the time-saving gaming flag is set to “ON”. Is determined (step S409). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S409: YES), the normal symbol change time for displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 45 is set to, for example, 25 seconds (step S410). . On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (step S409: NO), the normal symbol variation time is set to 2 seconds, for example (step S411). Thus, the normal symbol variation time set by the process of step S410 or step S411 is temporarily stored in the main RAM 103.

  Following the processing of step S410 or step S411, the main CPU 101 starts normal symbol variation display by the ordinary symbol display 45 (step S412), and starts measuring the elapsed time from the start of the variation display (step S413). ).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol change display is being performed by the normal symbol display 45 (step S402: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to end the normal symbol change display (step S415). Specifically, whether or not to end the normal symbol variation display based on whether or not the elapsed time when the measurement was started by the process of step S413 has reached the normal symbol variation time set in step S410 or step S411. Determine whether. Here, when it is determined not to end the normal symbol variation display (step S415: NO), the process proceeds to the electric tulip process of step S5.

  When the main CPU 101 determines to end the normal symbol fluctuation display (step S415: YES), the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 45, and is set in the main RAM 103 by the process of step S407. The winning symbol or the lost symbol set in the main RAM 103 in the process of step S408 is stopped and displayed (step S416). And the elapsed time which started measurement by the process of step S413 is reset (step S417). Then, similarly to the process of step S406, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the normal symbol determination is correct (step S418). Here, when it is determined that the determination result of the normal symbol determination is a win (step S418: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S419). Thus, the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON”, whereby the auxiliary game for operating the electric tulip 17 is started.

[Electric tulip processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 73 is a detailed flowchart of the electric tulip process in step S5 of FIG. Following the normal symbol process in step S4, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 73 (step S501). If it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is not set to “ON” (step S501: NO), the process proceeds to the specific area release control process in step S6.

  When determining that the auxiliary game flag is set to “ON” (step S501: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the electric tulip 17 is operating (step S502). If it is determined that the electric tulip 17 is not operating (step S502: NO), it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S503), as in the process of step S406. Here, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S503: YES), as the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17, the operation of opening the second start port 12 for 0.1 second is performed once. The pattern is set in the main RAM 103 (step S504). On the contrary, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (step S503: NO), that is, when it is the short-time gaming state, the second start port 12 is set as the operation pattern of the electric tulip 17 for 0.3 seconds. An operation pattern for performing the opening operation five times is set in the main RAM 103 (step S505).

  After setting the operation pattern in step S504 or step S505, the main CPU 101 causes the electric tulip opening / closing unit 113 to start the operation of the electric tulip 17 in the set operation pattern (step S506).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S506 or determines that the electric tulip 17 is operating (step S502: YES), has the operation of the electric tulip 17 started in the process of step S506 been completed? It is determined whether or not (step S507). If it is determined that the operation of the electric tulip 17 has been completed (step S507: YES), the auxiliary game flag is set to “OFF” (step S508). Thereby, the auxiliary game is ended.

[Specific Area Open / Close Control Processing by Game Control Board 100]
When the result of the second special symbol determination is a small hit, the small hit game is executed by the specific area release control process in step S6. Hereinafter, the specific area release control process executed in the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. 74 and 75 are detailed flowcharts of the specific area release control processing in step S6 of FIG.

  Subsequent to the electric tulip process in step S5, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small hit game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIGS. 74 and 75 (step S601). Here, if it is determined that the small hit game flag is not set to “ON” (step S601: NO), the process proceeds to the big winning opening release control process of step S7.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the small hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S601: YES), for example, the elapsed time since the opening command related to the small hit game is set in the process of step S3203. Based on whether or not has reached a preset opening time, it is determined whether or not a small hit game is being opened (step S602). If it is determined that the opening is in progress (step S602: YES), it is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed (step S603). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S603: NO), the process proceeds to the special winning opening release control process of step S7.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), the main CPU 101 resets the number X of winning game balls to the specific winning port 19 stored in the main RAM 103 (step S604), and opens / closes the specific area. The opening control of the specific winning opening 19 by the unit 119 is started (step S605), and the measurement of the elapsed time since the opening control is started is started (step S606). By performing the processing of step S605, the blade member 90 performs the operation of closing the specific winning opening 19 after opening it for 3.2 seconds once.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not opening in the small hit game (step S602: NO), for example, based on the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game, it is determined whether or not the small hit game is ending. Determination is made (step S608). Here, when it is determined that the ending in the small hit game is not in progress (step S608: NO), the specific winning opening switch 118 is turned “ON” based on the presence / absence of the detection signal input from the specific winning opening switch 118. It is determined whether or not (step S609). Here, when it is determined that the specific winning opening switch 118 is “ON” (step S609: YES), it is determined that one gaming ball has won the specific winning opening 19, and the winning number X of the gaming balls is calculated. The value updated by “1” is updated (step S610).

  When the process of step S610 is executed, the main CPU 101 determines that the specific winning opening switch 118 is not “ON” (step S609: NO), or if the process of step S606 is executed, the process of step S606 is performed. It is determined whether or not the elapsed time when the measurement is started matches a preset time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (step S611). Here, when it is determined that the set time has been reached (step S611: YES), the V winning opening opening / closing unit 122 is operated to operate the slide member 94 to open the V winning opening 92 (step S612). Thereby, the above-mentioned two types of big hits can be generated.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S612 or determines that the elapsed time does not coincide with the set time (step S611: NO), based on the presence or absence of the detection signal input from the V winning opening switch 120, It is determined whether or not the V prize opening switch 120 is “ON” (step S613). Here, when it is determined that the V prize opening switch 120 has been turned “ON” (step S613: YES), the V prize flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” (step S614). This V winning flag is a flag indicating whether or not a game ball is won at the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game and two kinds of big wins are generated, and no gaming ball is won at the V winning opening 92 Is set to “OFF”, and is set to “ON” when a game ball wins the V winning opening 92.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S614, or determines that the V winning opening switch 120 is not “ON” (step S613: NO), whether or not it is the closing timing of the V winning opening 92 Is determined (step S615). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (0.2 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the V winning opening 92 was opened. Here, when it is determined that it is the closing timing (step S615: YES), the V winning opening 92 is closed by the V winning opening / closing unit 122 (step S616).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S616 or determines that it is not the closing timing of the V winning opening 92 (step S615: NO), the main CPU 101 determines the blades based on the elapsed time when the measurement is started by the process of step S606. It is determined whether or not the specified opening operation of the member 90 (one operation of opening the specific winning opening 19 for 3.2 seconds in this embodiment) has been completed (step S618).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the specified release operation has not ended (step S618: NO), the main ball 102 stores the number X of game balls won in the specific winning opening 19 in the current small hit game in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the number of game balls Xmax (for example, “6”) that defines the closing timing of the specific winning opening 19 (step S619). Here, when it is determined that the number X of winning prizes does not coincide with the number of gaming balls Xmax (step S619: NO), the process proceeds to the big prize opening opening control process of step S7.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning number X matches the number of game balls Xmax (step S619: YES), or when it is determined that the prescribed release operation has ended (step S618: YES), the process of step S605 is performed. The opening control of the started specific winning opening 19 is ended (step S620), the elapsed time at which the measurement was started in step S606 is reset (step S621), and the ending time measurement is started (step S622). Here, the ending refers to a period from the end of opening the specific winning opening 19 to the end of the small hit game.

  If the main CPU 101 determines in step S608 that the ending is in progress (step S608: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 75, the ending time at which the measurement was started in the process of step S622 is preset. It is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed based on whether or not the ending time for the game has been reached (step S625). Here, when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S625: NO), the process proceeds to the special winning opening release control process of step S7.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the preset ending time has elapsed (step S625: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the small hit game flag to “OFF” in order to end the small hit game (step S626), and receives a V prize. It is determined whether or not the flag is set to “ON” (step S627). If it is determined that the V winning flag is not set to “ON” (step S627: NO), it is determined that the game ball has not won the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game, and step S7. The process proceeds to the special prize opening opening control process. In this case, the special game ends only with the small hit game.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the V winning flag is set to “ON” (step S627: YES), the main CPU 101 sets the V winning flag to “OFF” (step S628) and follows the small hit game. In order to start the long open round game, the long winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S629), and the short-time game flag is set to “OFF” (step S630).

[Large winning opening opening control processing by game control board 100]
Hereinafter, the special winning opening opening control process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a detailed flowchart of the special winning opening opening control process in step S7 of FIG. Following the specific area release control processing in step S6, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the long winning game flag is set to “ON” as illustrated in FIG. 76 (step S71). Here, when it is determined that the long winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S71: YES), the long winning game control process is executed (step S72). This long hit game control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the long winning game flag is not set to “ON” (step S71: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the short winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S75). . Here, when it is determined that the short hit game flag is “ON” (step S75: YES), a short hit game control process is executed (step S76). The short hit game control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When the process of step S76 is executed, when the process of step S72 is executed, or when it is determined that the short hit game flag is not set to “ON” (step S75: NO), the process of step S8 Processing proceeds to award ball processing.

[Outline of opening pattern of special prize opening 13 and production during special game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the opening pattern of the special winning opening 13 and the effects during the special game will be described.

  FIG. 77 (A) shows the relationship between the opening pattern of the big prize opening 13 and the performance during the game per 4R length when the game per 4R length is performed for "4R without time limit" or "per 4R with time limit". FIG. When an opening command related to a long hit game of 1 type jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130, an opening effect is started as illustrated in FIG. 77 (A). Then, as the long open round game in which the grand prize opening 13 is opened for a maximum of 29 seconds is repeatedly executed with a predetermined interval time between them, an effect during the round is executed each time the long open round game is started. Is done. This in-round effect includes, for example, an effect that displays the number of times that the special game has been performed continuously from the short-time game state to the normal game state, and an effect that informs the current number of rounds. When all the long open round games are finished and the ending command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, the ending effect is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses.

  FIG. 77 (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening pattern of the big winning opening 13 and the effect during the 15R short win game when the 15R short win game is played for “suddenly short win”. When the opening command related to the short hit game of 1 type jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130, the short win effect is started. In this case, a short open round game that opens the grand prize winning opening 13 for 0.2 seconds is executed 15 times at a predetermined time interval (for example, every 1 second), but the time required for the short win game is relatively short. A series of the above short win effects is executed until a predetermined ending time elapses after all short open round games are finished and an ending command is transmitted.

  FIG. 77 (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening pattern of the big winning opening 13 and the effect during the game per 15R length when a game per 15R length is performed for “per 15R with time reduction”. When a game ball wins the V winning opening 92 during the small hit game, from the second round, a long open round game in which the large winning opening 13 is opened long is repeatedly executed with a predetermined interval time interposed therebetween. During the 15R long game, in addition to the in-round effect described with reference to FIG. 77 (A), a music effect is performed. Specifically, a music selection screen (not shown) is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 in the second round (during the first long open round game after the end of the small hit game). The music selected by the player using the effect key 27 before the third round is started is continuously played during the third and subsequent rounds. That is, the music selected by the player is output from the speaker 24 and the video of the music is reproduced on the main liquid crystal 5. The music reproduction selected by the player in this way may be performed when the game is controlled in the short-time game state after the game is finished per 15R length.

  In this embodiment, the case where music selection is performed in the second round of the game per long game will be described. However, a configuration in which music selection can be performed at any time during the game per long game may be employed. Or you may employ | adopt the structure which can perform music selection, when the game is controlled in a short-time game state. Moreover, you may employ | adopt the structure which can perform a music selection during a short hit game.

  Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment also has a feature that the number of songs that can be selected by the player increases every time a new song is first announced. Specifically, during the game per 15R length before the first performance performance of the new song A is performed, a song selection screen capable of selecting only the default song is displayed. On the other hand, during the game per 15R length after the first performance performance of the new song A is performed, a song selection screen capable of selecting the default song or the new song A is displayed. Then, when the first performance performance of the new song B is performed, a song selection screen capable of selecting the default song, the new song A, or the new song B is displayed. If the selected performance cannot be played immediately because the performance has started even though the player has selected the music, or if the playback of the music has been interrupted, the performance will be After finishing, the selected music is played from the beginning.

[Game control processing per long by the game control board 100]
FIG. 78 is a detailed flowchart of the long hit game control process in step S72 of FIG. When the main CPU 101 determines that the long winning game flag is set to “ON” (step S71: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 78, for example, the opening command related to the long winning game by the process of step S3203 Based on whether or not the elapsed time from setting has reached a predetermined opening time, it is determined whether or not a long hit game is being opened (step S721). Here, when it is determined that the opening is being performed (step S721: YES), it is determined whether the opening time has passed based on whether the elapsed time has reached the predetermined opening time (step S722). ). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S722: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S722: YES), the main CPU 101 determines the number of rounds Rmax of the special game, the operation pattern of the big prize control unit 116, and the like, and stores these pieces of information in the main RAM 103. (Step S723). By executing the processing of step S723, various times related to the long game such as the interval time between rounds and the next round, and the ending time after the end of the final round are also set.

  Following the processing of step S723, the main CPU 101 resets the winning number Y of game balls to the big winning opening 13 stored in the main RAM 103 (step S724), and the long hit game also stored in the main RAM 103. The round number R in the middle is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S725). The number of rounds R is set to “0” before the start of the game per long and is incremented by “1” every time the process of step S725 is performed.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S725, the main CPU 101 starts the opening control of the special winning opening 13 by the special winning opening control unit 116 (step S726), and the opening time that is an elapsed time from the start of the release control. Measurement is started (step S727). Then, a round start command for notifying that the long open round game has started is set in the main RAM 103 (step S728).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening in the long hit game is not in progress (step S721: NO), for example, based on the information indicating the time point in the long hit game in which the current state is stored in the main RAM 103, for example. Then, it is determined whether or not the ending immediately after the end of the final round is in progress (step S729). If it is determined that ending is in progress (step S729: YES), the process proceeds to step S744 described later.

  If the main CPU 101 determines that ending in the long hit game is not in progress (step S729: NO), for example, based on information indicating the current point in the long hit game stored in the main RAM 103. Then, it is determined whether or not it is during the interval (between the round and the next round) (step S730). Here, when it is determined that it is during the interval (step S730: YES), it is determined whether or not the interval time set by the process of step S723 has elapsed since the big winning opening 13 was closed at the end of the previous round. Determination is made (step S731). If it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S731: YES), the process proceeds to step S724 because the timing for starting the next round is reached. Conversely, if it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S731: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not in the interval (step S730: NO), the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the round and determines whether or not the big winning opening is based on the presence or absence of the detection signal input from the big winning opening switch 115. It is determined whether or not the switch 115 is “ON” (step S733). Here, when it is determined that the big prize opening switch 115 is “ON” (step S733: YES), it is judged that one game ball has won the big prize opening 13, and the number Y of game balls won is calculated. The value is updated to the value obtained by adding “1” (step S734).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S728, executes the process of step S734, or determines that the big prize opening switch 115 is not “ON” (step S733: NO), the main CPU 101 It is determined whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed from the opening start (step S735). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time at which measurement is started by the process of step S727 has reached a specified opening time (29 seconds in the present embodiment) stored in advance in the main ROM 102.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the specified opening time has not elapsed (step S735: NO), the winning number Y of the game balls in the current round stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls Ymax (for example, “9”) defining the closing timing of the special winning opening 13 coincides (step S736). If it is determined that the winning number Y does not match the gaming ball number Ymax (step S736: NO), the process proceeds to a winning ball process in step S8.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning number Y matches the number of gaming balls Ymax (step S736: YES), or when it is determined that the specified opening time has elapsed (step S735: YES), the big winning opening control unit 116 terminates the opening control of the special winning opening 13 (step S737).

  Subsequent to the process in step S737, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current round number R of the game per long stored in the main RAM 103 matches the round number Rmax set in the process in step S723. (Step S738). Here, when it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S738: NO), this is the elapsed time since the big winning opening 13 is closed in order to control the start timing of the next round. Measurement of the interval time is started (step S739). The interval time when the measurement is started by the process of step S739 is used for the process of step S731.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the round number R matches the round number Rmax (step S738: YES), the main CPU 101 starts measuring the ending time (step S740) and resets the round number R stored in the main RAM 103. Then, an ending command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S742). This ending command is a command for notifying that the final opening of the special winning opening 13 has been completed, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process of step S9.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S742 or determines that the ending is being performed (step S729: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed (step S744). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time at which measurement is started by the process of step S740 has reached the set ending time set by the process of step S723. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S744: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the set ending time has elapsed (step S744: YES), the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the long hitting game (step S745). Then, in order to end the long winning game, the long winning game flag is set to “OFF” (step S746). The gaming state setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

[Short hit game control processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 79 is a detailed flowchart of the short hit game control process in step S76 of FIG. When the main CPU 101 determines that the short hit game flag is set to “ON” (step S75: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 79, for example, the opening command related to the short win game is executed by the process of step S3203. Whether or not the short hit game is being opened is determined based on whether or not the elapsed time since setting has reached a predetermined opening time (step S761). Here, when it is determined that the opening is being performed (step S761: YES), it is determined whether the opening time has passed based on whether the elapsed time has reached the predetermined opening time (step S762). ). Here, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S762: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S762: YES), the main CPU 101 determines the number Rmax of special games, the operation pattern of the special winning prize control unit 116, and stores these pieces of information in the main RAM 103. (Step S763). By executing the process of step S723, various times related to the short hit game such as the interval time between rounds and the next round, and the ending time after the end of the final round are also set.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S763, the main CPU 101 updates the round number R in the short hit game stored in the main RAM 103 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S764). The round number R is set to “0” before the start of the short hit game, as in the case where the long hit game is performed, and is incremented by “1” every time the process of step S764 is performed.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S764, the main CPU 101 starts the opening control of the special winning opening 13 by the special winning opening control unit 116 (step S765), and the opening time which is an elapsed time since the opening control is started. Measurement is started (step S766).

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the opening in the short win game is not in progress (step S761: NO), for example, based on information indicating the time point in the short hit game in which the current state is stored in the main RAM 103, for example. Then, it is determined whether or not the ending immediately after the end of the final round is in progress (step S767). When the main CPU 101 determines that the ending in the short hit game is not being performed (step S767: NO), for example, based on information indicating the time point in the short hit game in which the current state is stored in the main RAM 103, for example. Then, it is determined whether or not it is during the interval (step S768). Here, if it is determined that the interval is in progress (step S768: YES), it is determined whether or not the interval time set by the process of step S763 has elapsed since the big winning opening 13 was closed at the end of the previous round. Determination is made (step S769). If it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S769: YES), the process proceeds to step S764 because it is time to start the next round. On the other hand, when it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S769: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the interval is not in progress (step S768: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a specified opening time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 13 (step S771). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time at which the measurement is started by the process of step S766 has reached a specified opening time (0.2 seconds in this embodiment) stored in the main ROM 102 in advance. . Here, when it is determined that the specified opening time has not elapsed (step S771: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the specified opening time has elapsed (step S771: YES), the main CPU 101 causes the special winning opening control unit 116 to end the opening control of the special winning opening 13 (step S772).

  Following the process of step S772, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current round number R of the short hit game stored in the main RAM 103 matches the round number Rmax set by the process of step S763. (Step S773). Here, when it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S773: NO), this is the elapsed time since the big winning opening 13 is closed in order to control the start timing of the next round. Measurement of the interval time is started (step S774). The interval time when the measurement is started by the process of step S774 is used for the process of step S769.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the round number R matches the round number Rmax (step S773: YES), the main CPU 101 starts measuring the ending time (step S775), and resets the round number R stored in the main RAM 103. Then, the ending command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S777). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S9, similarly to the ending command related to the long hit game.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S777 or determines that the ending is being performed (step S767: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the set ending time has elapsed (step S779). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time at which measurement is started by the process of step S775 has reached the set ending time set by the process of step S763. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S779: NO), the process proceeds to a prize ball process in step S8.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the set ending time has elapsed (step S779: YES), the main CPU 101 executes a game state setting process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the short hit game (step S780). Then, in order to end the short hit game, the short hit game flag is set to “OFF” (step S781).

[Game state setting process by game control board 100]
FIG. 80 is a detailed flowchart of the gaming state setting process in step S745 in FIG. 78 and step S780 in FIG. This gaming state setting process is a process for setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the long winning game or the short winning game is ended to the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state.

  First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special game played this time is a long hit game based on, for example, whether the long hit game flag or the short hit game flag is set to “ON” ( Step S7451). Here, if it is determined that the game is not long hit (step S7451: NO), that is, if the short hit game flag is set to “ON”, the process proceeds to step S7452.

  In the present embodiment, since the short hit game is played only when the result of the first special symbol determination is suddenly short hit, the short time is always given after the short hit game is played. Therefore, the main CPU 101 sets the time-saving game flag to “ON” in step S7452. Then, the short time remaining game count W is set to “100” (step S7453).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the game is a long winning game (step S7451: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current long winning game is a long winning game following the small hit game (step S7454). In the present embodiment, when a long hit game is performed following the small hit game, that is, in the case of two types of big hits, the long hit game flag is set to “ON” by the process of step S629 (see FIG. 75). On the other hand, in the case where only the long hit game is played without playing the small hit game, that is, in the case of one kind of big hit, the long hit game flag is set to “ON” by the process of step S3193 (see FIG. 71). . Therefore, based on which processing step the long hit game flag is set to “ON”, it can be determined whether or not the current long hit game is a long hit game following the small hit game.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the game is not a long winning game following the small winning game (step S7454: NO), the main CPU 101 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 at the start of the long winning game. Based on the jackpot symbol, it is determined whether or not there is a short time after the end of the long hit game (step S7455). On the contrary, when it is determined that the game is a long hit game following the small hit game (step S7454: YES), the long hit is based on the small hit symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 at the start of the small hit game. It is determined whether or not there is a short time after the game is over (step S7456).

  Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result in step S7455 or step S7456 is a short time (step S7457). If it is determined that there is a short time (step S7457: YES), step S7452 and step The process of S7453 is executed. Thus, the game is controlled in the short game state when the second start port 12 is easily opened until the special symbol determination is executed 100 times after the long hit game is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no time saving (step S7457: NO), the processing of step S7452 and step S7453 is not performed, and therefore the second start port 12 is difficult to be opened after the long hit game is completed. The game is controlled in the normal game state.

  When the series of game state setting processes is completed, the process proceeds to step S746 (see FIG. 78) when the long hit game ends, and when the short hit game ends, the process proceeds to step S781 (see FIG. 79). ) Will proceed.

[Timer interrupt processing by production control board 130]
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets a CTC cycle, which is a cycle for performing timer interrupt processing to be described later. And sub CPU131 repeats the random number update process which updates the production random number etc. which are used in order to determine the content of production with the predetermined period shorter than a CTC period. That is, the sub CPU 131 repeats the timer interrupt process at the CTC cycle while repeating the random number update process at a predetermined cycle while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated.

  Hereinafter, the timer interruption process executed in the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the effect control board 130. The sub CPU 131 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 81 every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds), similarly to the timer interrupt process performed in the game control board 100. Note that the processing performed on the effect control board 130 described based on the flowchart in FIG. 81 and the subsequent steps is performed according to a command issued by the sub CPU 131 based on a program stored in the sub ROM 132.

  First, when receiving a command as game information from the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 executes a command reception process (step S10). Details of this command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Subsequent to the process of step S10, the sub CPU 131 executes a command transmission process (step S12). Specifically, the command set in the sub RAM 133 by the process of step S10 is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. By performing this command transmission process, execution of effects by image display, audio output, etc. is instructed to the image sound control board 140, and execution of effects by turning on various lamps, etc. Is done.

  Then, the sub CPU 131 executes a data transfer process (step S12). Specifically, since the data regarding the image sound control is transmitted from the image sound control unit 140, the data is transferred to the lamp control unit 150. As a result, the lamp control unit 150 causes an effect by the effect medium such as the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, and the rotating light device 8 so as to synchronize with the effect performed by the main liquid crystal 5, the sub liquid crystal 6, and the speaker 24. Be controlled.

[Command reception processing by effect control board 130]
Hereinafter, the command reception process executed in the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. Here, FIGS. 82 to 84 are detailed flowcharts of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG.

  The sub CPU 131 determines whether or not a hold command transmitted from the game control board 100 has been received (step S101). If it is determined that a hold command has been received (step S101: YES), the number of holds for the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 133 is updated to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S102). Then, the predetermination information included in the received hold command is stored in the sub-RAM 133 (step S103), and the hold icon related to the first special symbol determination is different from the normal hold icon based on the predetermination information. It is determined whether or not to execute a so-called hold prefetch effect displayed in the display mode (step S104). Specifically, for example, a table in which different numbers of pre-reading effect execution random numbers are assigned to the execution of the pre-reading effect for each variation pattern is stored in the sub ROM 132, and the sub CPU 131 performs random number update processing. With respect to the pre-reading effect execution random number that is appropriately updated every time, a value when the hold command is received is acquired. And based on whether or not the acquired pre-reading effect execution random number matches any of the random number values assigned in the table with respect to the variation pattern indicated by the prior determination information included in the received hold command, It is determined whether or not a prefetch effect is executed.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines not to execute the hold prefetch effect (step S104: NO), the sub CPU 131 sets a normal hold display command for instructing display of the hold icon in the normal display mode in the sub RAM 133 (step S105). On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the hold prefetch effect (step S104: YES), a special hold display command for instructing display of a hold icon having a display form different from the normal display form is set in the sub RAM 133 (step S106). . These hold display commands are transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process of step S11.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S105, executes the process of step S106, or determines that the hold command has not been received (step S101: NO), the sub CPU 131 issues a change start command from the game control board 100. It is determined whether or not it has been received (step S108). Here, when it is determined that the change start command has been received (step S108: YES), the change start command is analyzed (step S109).

  In the variation start command, as described above, the determination symbol setting information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination processing, the setting information indicating whether the effect with reach or the effect without reach is performed, and the setting information of the variation pattern , Information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is included. Therefore, by analyzing the variation start command, the result of the special symbol determination is identified, whether it is necessary to perform the effect with reach or the effect without reach, and the variation time during which the special symbol is variably displayed is identified. In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be specified.

  When the change start command is analyzed, the sub CPU 131 executes a change effect pattern setting process based on the analysis result (step S110). By executing this variation effect pattern setting process, the decoration pattern variation mode, presence / absence of reach effect, reach establishment timing, the type of the decoration pattern constituting the reach symbol, the content of the reach effect, the decorative pattern to be stopped display The type and the like are determined.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 executes a notice effect pattern setting process for setting the contents of various notice effects to be executed when the decorative symbol is variably displayed with the fluctuating effect pattern set in the process of step S110 (step S111). . Although detailed description is omitted, by executing the processing of step S111, for example, various types of notification such as a speech advance notice effect in which a character emits a speech, a step up notice effect in which a display of a production image develops in stages, and the like. It is determined whether or not to execute the notice effect. Moreover, when performing these notice effects, the effect aspect is determined together. For example, when it is determined to execute the speech advance notice effect, the type of character to appear in the speech advance notice effect, the content of the speech emitted by the character, the character color, and the like are determined.

  Next, the sub-CPU 131 sub-commands a change effect start command for instructing start of change effect with the change effect pattern set in the process of step S110 and start of notice effect with the notice effect pattern set in the process of step S111. It is set in the RAM 133 (step S112).

  This variable effect start command includes information indicating the variable effect pattern set by the process of step S110 and information indicating the notice effect pattern set by the process of step S111. The command transmission process of step S11 Is transmitted to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150. As a result, the fluctuating effect and the notice effect for which the effect pattern is determined by the effect control unit 130 are realized by the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

  On the other hand, the type of new song (music) to be played in the above performance production, the time during which the performance production is performed, the screen configuration of the main liquid crystal 5 during various RTC productions, etc. are independent of the above game information. The image sound control board 140 is set, and execution of these RTC effects is controlled by the image sound control board 140.

  Subsequent to step S112, the sub CPU 131 updates the number of suspensions of the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 133 to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S113).

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S113 or determines that the change start command is not received (step S108: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not a symbol determination command is received from the game control board 100. (Step S114). If it is determined that the symbol confirmation command has not been received (step S114: NO), the process proceeds to step S116.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the symbol confirmation command has been received (step S114: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets a variation effect end command for instructing the end of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol in the sub RAM 133 (step S115).

  This variation effect end command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process of step S11. Thereby, the fluctuating effect started in accordance with the process of step S112 ends, and the decorative symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the main liquid crystal 5.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S115 or determines that the symbol determination command has not been received (step S114: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether an operation command has been received from the lamp control board 150 (step S114: NO). Step S116). Here, the operation command is a command for notifying that the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 has been operated.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the operation command has been received (step S116: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets an operation notification command for notifying that the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 has been operated in the sub RAM 133 (step S117). This operation notification command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the process of step S11.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S117 or determines that the operation command is not received (step S116: NO), the sub CPU 131 receives the opening command from the game control board 100 as illustrated in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S121).

  When it is determined that the opening command has been received (step S121: YES), the sub CPU 131 analyzes the opening command (step S122). Specifically, based on information included in the opening command, a process of determining whether the opening performed this time is related to a long hit game or a short hit game is performed.

  Based on the analysis result of step S122, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the current opening is related to a long hit game (step S123). Here, when it is determined that the game pertains to a long hit game (see FIGS. 77A and 77C) (step S123: YES), an effect pattern of an opening effect performed during the opening is selected (step S124). Then, an opening effect start command for instructing execution of the opening effect of the selected effect pattern is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S125).

  This opening effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process of step S11. As a result, an opening effect including an effect of notifying that the long hit game is started and an effect of prompting a right strike are performed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, an effect using the latest song announced in the performance effect is performed as the opening effect. Specifically, for example, when the performance of the new song A has already been performed, but the performance of the new song B has not yet been performed, an opening production using a part of the video of the new song A reproduced in the performance production is performed. Done. For example, if the performance of the new song D has already been performed, but the performance of the new song E has not yet been performed, the opening performance is performed using a part of the video of the new song D reproduced in the performance.

  In this way, since the opening effect is configured based on the video of the new song that was played in the performance effect that was performed independently of the normal effect, the player will have the contents of the opening effect every time the first new song is announced You can enjoy watching it change. The processing performed by the image sound control board 140 in order to realize such a change in opening effect will be described in detail later.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the current opening does not relate to the long win game (step S123: NO), that is, relates to the short win game (see FIG. 77B), An effect pattern of a short hit effect performed between the opening and the end of the ending is selected (step S126), and a short hit effect start command for instructing execution of the short hit effect of the selected effect pattern is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S126). S127).

  This short hit effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command transmission process in step S11, and a short hit effect including an effect for prompting a right strike is performed.

  As for the short win effect, as with the long hit game opening effect, each time the first performance effect is performed, the effect is switched so that the video corresponding to the latest song is used, but in order to realize this Processing performed on the image sound control board 140 will also be described in detail later.

  When it is determined that the opening command has not been received (step S121: NO), when the process of step S125 is executed, or when the process of step S127 is executed, the game control is performed at the start of the long open round game. It is determined whether or not a round start command transmitted from the substrate 100 has been received (step S129).

  When determining that the round start command has been received (step S129: YES), the sub CPU 131 analyzes the received round start command (step S130), and based on the analysis result, the current long open round game is 15R long. It is determined whether or not it is the first long open round game (2R in FIG. 77C) in the winning game (step S131).

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that it is the first long open round game (step S131: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets a music selection screen display command for instructing the image sound control board 140 to display a music selection screen in the sub RAM 133. (Step S132). Here, the music selection screen is a screen that displays the music to be played during the period from the start of the 3R of the long hit game to the start of the ending effect, and the player operates the effect key 27. Thus, a desired new song can be selected. The music selection screen display command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S13, whereby the music selection screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S132 or determines that it is not the first long open round game (step S131: NO), the round start command received this time is the next long open round game (FIG. 77). It is determined whether or not the start of 3R) in (C) is to be notified (step S133). Here, when it is determined that the round start command notifies the start of the next long open round game (step S133: YES), the player operates the effect key 27 during the first long open round game. A music playback command for instructing to start playback of the selected music is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S134).

  This music reproduction command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S11. Thereby, the music selected by the player is played from the third round of the game per 15R length.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S134 or determines that it is not the next long open round game (step S133: NO), the special game continuation count (number of consecutive churn times) or the round start command received this time The number of rounds corresponding to is determined and an effect pattern during the round is selected (step S135), and an effect start command during round instructing the image sound control board 140 to execute the effect during the round of the selected effect pattern is sent to the sub-RAM 133. Set (step S136). As a result, the display indicating the current number of rounds displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 is updated.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the round start command has not been received (step S129: NO), or when the process of step S136 is executed, an ending command is issued from the game control board 100 as illustrated in FIG. It is determined whether or not it has been received (step S138). Here, when it is determined that an ending command has been received (step S138: YES), the received ending command is analyzed (step S139), and it is determined whether or not the ending is related to the end of the long hit game (step S139). Step S140). Here, when it is determined that the game pertains to a long hit game (step S140: YES), an effect pattern for the ending effect is selected (step S141), and an ending for instructing execution of the ending effect of the selected effect pattern. An effect start command is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S142).

  This ending effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S11. Thus, as will be described in detail later, an ending effect using the same music image as the music used in the opening effect is performed.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 131 determines that the ending is not related to the long hit game (step S140: NO), that is, if the ending is related to the short hit game, the sub CPU 131 performs the process in step S127 (see FIG. 83) Then, the short hit effect end command for instructing the end of the short hit effect started in step S143 is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S143).

  This short win effect end command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S11. As a result, the short win effect ends after the ending time has elapsed.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the ending command has not been received (step S138: NO), when the process of step S142 is executed, or when the process of step S143 is executed, a waiting-for-customer command is issued from the game control board 100. It is determined whether or not it has been received (step S144). Here, when it is determined that the customer waiting command has been received (step S144: YES), measurement of the elapsed time since the customer waiting command was received is started (step S145), and the measurement flag stored in the sub RAM 133 is received. Is set to “ON” (step S146). This measurement flag is a flag indicating whether or not the elapsed time since reception of the customer waiting command is being measured.

  When determining that the customer waiting command has not been received (step S144: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the measurement flag is set to “ON” (step S147). Here, when it is determined that the measurement flag is not set to “ON” (step S147: NO), a series of command reception processing ends, and the processing proceeds to step S11.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the measurement flag is set to “ON” (step S147: YES), or when the process of step S146 is executed, the customer waiting determination time that defines the start timing of the customer waiting effect is determined. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed (step S148). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time when measurement is started in the process of step S145 has reached a customer waiting determination time (for example, 30 seconds) stored in the sub ROM 132. If it is determined that the customer waiting determination time has not elapsed (step S148: NO), the process proceeds to step S11.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the customer waiting determination time has elapsed (step S148: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets the measurement flag to “OFF” (step S149), resets the elapsed time (step S150), and performs the customer waiting effect. A customer waiting effect start command for instructing the start is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S151).

  This customer waiting effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 by the command transmission process of step S11. Thereby, the customer waiting effect is started.

  Examples of the waiting-for-customer effects include a menu screen display for displaying a menu screen for a player to select a desired operation item from a menu, and a movie playback for playing an introduction movie introducing features of the model. Can be mentioned.

  The customer waiting effect may be such that only a menu screen is displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting command. Alternatively, the introductory movie may only be played after a predetermined time has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting command. In addition, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting command, the introduction movie reproduction and the menu screen display may be alternately repeated. In this case, either the playback of the introduction movie or the display of the menu screen may be performed first.

[Configuration Example of Control ROM 144]
FIG. 85 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the control ROM 144. As illustrated in FIG. 85, the control ROM 144 stores a public management table, a presentation order management table, a display list creation table, and the like in addition to programs executed by the overall CPU 141.

  The release management table is a table that defines the date and time for each new song to shift to a state in which execution of the first performance performance of the new song is permitted. This disclosure management table is as described above with reference to FIG.

  The presentation order management table is a table that is referred to in order to perform performances while switching the songs every hour after completion of performance performances of all new songs performed weekly (two weeks for new song A). . The presentation order management table is as described above with reference to FIG.

  The display list creation table is an effect pattern table used for processing to determine an effect pattern of effects to be executed by the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 6. Here, the process of determining the effect pattern is to determine what image data is actually used to realize the effect when the effect of the effect content set on the effect control board 130 is executed. It is processing.

  The display list creation table is a table used to create a display list stored in the display list storage area 1491. The display list creation table mainly controls normal effects performed using the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 6. Referenced for. In this embodiment, the display list creation table is a default table, a new song A main table, a new song B main table, a new song C main table, a new song D main table, a new song E main table, a new song F main table, a new song G main table, A new song H main table, a new song I main table, a new song J main table, a new song K main table, a new song L main table, and a slot effect table.

  The default table is a table used before the first performance performance of the new song A is performed. The new song A main table is a table that is used after the first performance performance of the new song A is performed until the first performance performance of the new song B is performed. The new song B main table is a table that is used after the first performance performance of the new song B is performed until the first performance performance of the new song C is performed. The new song C main table is a table that is used after the first performance performance of the new song C is performed until the first performance performance of the new song D is performed. The new song E main table is a table used until the first performance performance of the new song F is performed after the first performance performance of the new song E is performed. The new song F main table is a table that is used after the first performance performance of the new song F is performed until the first performance performance of the new song G is performed. The new song G main table is a table that is used after the first performance performance of the new song G is performed until the first performance performance of the new song H is performed. The new song H main table is a table used until the first performance performance of the new song I is performed after the first performance performance of the new song H is performed. The new song I main table is a table that is used after the first performance performance of the new song I is performed until the first performance performance of the new song J is performed. The new song J main table is a table that is used after the first performance performance of the new song J is performed until the first performance performance of the new song K is performed. The new song K main table is a table used until the first performance performance of the new song L is performed after the first performance performance of the new song K is performed. The new song L main table is a table used for one week after the first performance performance of the new song L is performed until all songs are released. Thus, the new song A main table to the new song L main table are tables that are used for a predetermined week. In the all-music release state, a normal performance is performed while switching these display list creation tables every hour.

  The slot effect table is a table used when a slot effect using the sub liquid crystal 6 is performed with respect to a normal effect (here, a variable effect). That is, the slot effect table is a table used when a normal effect is performed using the sub liquid crystal 6 when various RTC effects are performed on the main liquid crystal 5.

  The general CPU 141 creates a display list using one of the 14 tables constituting the public management table and the display list creation table with respect to the normal performance before all songs are released. In the state where all songs are released, the display list is created using either the presentation order management table or the 14 tables. A method for creating such a display list will be described in detail later.

  In addition to these tables, in the control ROM 144, the effect sound data selection table before release of all songs (see FIG. 20A), the effect sound data selection table after release of all songs (see FIG. 20B), practice. Landscape effect data selection table (see FIG. 21), performance start notice effect data selection table (see FIG. 22), performance effect data selection table (see FIG. 23), next performance notice effect data selection table (see FIG. 24), new song A Loop group table (see FIG. 26), performance end effect schedule table for all songs before release (see FIG. 28), performance end effect schedule table for all songs after release (see FIG. 29), delay time table (see FIG. 35), game Holding order pattern table (see FIG. 42), pattern number selection table (see FIG. 43), playback start point selection table (see FIG. 43) 4 Although reference), and the like, in FIG. 85, the illustration of these tables are omitted.

[Main processing by image sound control board 140]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, main processing executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described. This main process is started when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, and is continuously executed while the image sound control board 140 is activated. Although not shown in the figure, the overall CPU 141 of the image sound control board 140 sets a CTC cycle in this main process, and repeats the main process, and a timer interrupt process described later in the CTC period (see FIG. 106). repeat.

  As illustrated in FIG. 86, the overall CPU 141 executes an initial setting process for initial setting of the image sound control board 140 (step S2000). This initial setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the initial setting process in step S2000, the overall CPU 141 executes an installation position information setting process for setting installation position information used for some RTC effects (step S2100). The installation position information setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the installation position information setting process in step S2100, the overall CPU 141 executes an elapsed time counting process for counting the elapsed time from the power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S2200). The elapsed time counting process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the elapsed time counting process in step S2200, the overall CPU 141 executes a drop effect control process for controlling execution of the drop effect (see FIG. 34) (step S2300). This drop effect control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the drop effect control process in step S2300, the overall CPU 141 executes a game sequence effect control process for controlling the execution of the game sequence effect (see FIG. 41) (step S2400). The game series effect control process will be described later in detail based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the game series effect control process in step 2400, the overall CPU 141 executes a performance series effect control process for controlling execution of the performance series effect (see FIG. 13) (step S2500). This performance series effect control process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the performance series effect control process in step S2500, the overall CPU 141 executes an RTC effect prohibition control process for prohibiting the execution of the RTC effect under specific conditions (step S2700). The RTC effect prohibition control process will be described later in detail based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the RTC effect prohibition control process in step S2700, the overall CPU 141 creates a display list based on the setting information set in the control RAM 145 in the processes in steps S2300 to S2700, and stores the created display list in the display list. Image output control processing to be set in the area 1491 is executed (step S2800). The image output control process will be described later in detail based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the image output control process in step S2800, the overall CPU 141 outputs music, audio, and the like from the speaker 24 so as to synchronize with the display effect performed using either or either of the main liquid crystal 5 and the sub liquid crystal 6. Effect sound output control processing is executed (step S2900). This effect sound output control process will be described later in detail based on FIG.

[Initial setting process by image acoustic control board 140]
Next, the initial setting process executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 87 is a detailed flowchart of the initial setting process in step S2000 of FIG.

  As illustrated in FIG. 87, the overall CPU 141 first determines whether or not the current state is an initial set state (step S2001). If it is determined that the initial setting has been completed (step S2001: YES), the process proceeds to step S2100.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the initial setting has not been completed (step S2001: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not execution of the initial setting has been instructed (step S2002). Specifically, based on whether or not a command instructing execution of the initial setting transmitted from the game control board 100 in response to the process of step S908 (see FIG. 59) is received via the effect control board 130. Then, it is determined whether or not execution of initial setting is instructed. If it is determined that the execution of the initial setting is not instructed (step S2002: NO), the process proceeds to step S2004.

  When the overall CPU 141 determines that execution of initial setting is instructed (step S2002: YES), the overall CPU 141 starts predetermined initial setting (step S2003).

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2003 or determines that the execution of the initial setting is not instructed (step S2002: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the initial setting is being performed (step S2004). If it is determined that initialization is not in progress (step S2004: NO), the process proceeds to step S2100.

  When determining that the initial setting is being performed (step S2004: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the initial setting being executed has been completed (step S2005). If it is determined that the initial setting has not been completed (step S2005: NO), the process proceeds to step S2100.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the initial setting has been completed (step S2005: YES), the overall CPU 141 permits interrupt processing (step S2006). As a result, it becomes possible to execute an interrupt process to be described later based on FIG.

  As is apparent from the description so far, the process proceeds to step S2200 and subsequent steps even when the initial setting of the image acoustic control board 140 is not completed, and thus interrupt processing is not permitted. In addition, it is possible to perform processing for counting the elapsed time since the power is turned on, and to execute various RTC effects.

  However, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the power recovery screen (see FIG. 33A) and the installation position setting screen (see FIG. 33 (FIG. 33)) by the RTC effect prohibition control process (see FIG. 103) in step S2700 described later. When B) and (C) are displayed, the execution of the RTC effect is prohibited.

[Installation Position Information Setting Process by Image Sound Control Board 140]
Next, the installation position information setting process executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a detailed flowchart of the installation position information setting process in step S2100 of FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2000, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not there is an instruction to display the power recovery screen as illustrated in FIG. 88 (step S2101). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the power supply restoration screen display command transmitted from the game control board 100 in response to the process of step S904 (see FIG. 59) has been received via the effect control board 130 (step S2101). ). If it is determined that a power restoration screen display instruction has been received (step S2101: YES), setting information for displaying the power restoration screen on the main liquid crystal 5 is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2102). Based on this setting information, an image output control process in step S2800, which will be described later, is executed, whereby a power restoration screen (see FIG. 33A) is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5.

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2102, or determines that there is no instruction to display the power recovery screen (step S2101: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the power recovery screen is being displayed (step S2103). ). Specifically, for example, after a display list for displaying the power restoration screen on the main liquid crystal 5 is set in the display list storage area 1491 (see FIG. 58), a display for displaying other images on the main liquid crystal 5 is displayed. Based on whether or not the list is in a state before being set in the display list storage area 1491, it is determined whether or not the power recovery screen is being displayed. If it is determined that the power recovery screen is being displayed (step S2103: YES), the effect button 26 transmitted from the effect control board 130 is operated in accordance with the process of step S117 (see FIG. 82). It is determined whether or not an operation notification command for notifying is received.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that an operation notification command for notifying that the effect button 26 has been operated is received (step S2104: YES), the general CPU 141 uses the control information for displaying the installation position setting screen on the main liquid crystal 5 The RAM 145 is set (step S2105). An installation position setting screen (see FIG. 33B) is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 by executing an image output control process in step S2800 described later based on the setting information.

  The overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2105, determines that the power recovery screen is not being displayed (step S2103: NO), or has not received an operation notification command for notifying the operation of the effect button 26. If it is determined (step S2104: NO), it is determined whether the installation position setting screen is being displayed. Specifically, for example, after a display list for displaying the installation position setting screen on the main liquid crystal 5 is set in the display list storage area 1491, a display list for displaying other images on the main liquid crystal 5 is displayed in the display list. Whether or not the installation position setting screen is being displayed is determined based on whether or not the storage area 1491 is in a state before being set.

  When determining that the installation position setting screen is being displayed (step S2106: YES), the overall CPU 141 receives an operation notification command for notifying the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 as in the process of step S2104. Whether or not (step S2107).

  When determining that the operation notification command has been received (step S2107: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the operation corresponding to the operation notification command is an operation for determining the installation position by operating the effect button 26. (Step S2108). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the effect button 26 has been operated in a state where the determination button (see FIG. 33B) included in the installation position setting screen is highlighted.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is not an installation position determination operation (step S2108: NO), it sets setting information for updating the display of the installation position setting screen in the control RAM 145 (step S2109). Specifically, for example, in the case of an operation for moving the second cursor indicated by the upward white triangle shown in FIG. 33C to the right side, the second cursor is moved to the right side and the pachinko game is performed. Setting information for increasing the numerical value indicating the position of the machine 1 from the left by “1” is set.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the operation is an installation position determination operation (step S2108: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets the installation position information in the FeRAM 1451 (step S2110). Specifically, a numerical value indicating the number of units arranged in one column displayed on the installation position setting screen when the installation position determining operation is performed, and a numerical value indicating the position from the left Is stored in the FeRAM 1451 as installation position information. Then, setting information for returning the installation position setting screen to the power recovery screen is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2111).

  When the process of step S2111 is performed, when the process of step S2109 is performed, when it is determined that the installation position setting screen is not being displayed (step S2106: NO), or an operation notification command is received. If it is determined that there is not (step S2107: NO), the process proceeds to the elapsed time counting process of step S2200.

  Thus, the overall CPU 141 sets the installation position information stored in the FeRAM 1451 based on a predetermined operation.

[Elapsed time counting process by image acoustic control board 140]
Next, the elapsed time counting process executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a detailed flowchart of the elapsed time counting process in step S2200 of FIG.

  Subsequent to step S2100, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not power supply to the image sound control board 140 has been started, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 89 (step S2201). If it is determined that the power supply has not started (not the power supply start timing) (step S2201: NO), the process proceeds to the drop effect control process of step S2300.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that power supply has been started (step S2201: YES), the overall CPU 141 calculates a power interruption time (step S2202). Specifically, for example, the general CPU 141 acquires RTC information (information indicating the current date and time) from the RTC 134 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, and uses the RTC information as first time information as the FeRAM 1451. To store. Thereafter, if the overall CPU 141 determines “YES” in step S2201, it acquires RTC information from the RTC 134 again and stores the RTC information in the FeRAM 1451 as second time information. Then, the power interruption time is calculated by subtracting the date and time indicated by the first time information from the date and time indicated by the second time information.

  Next, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the calculated power interruption time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (5 minutes in the present embodiment) (step S2203). If it is determined that the power interruption time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (step S2203: YES), the elapsed time information stored in the FeRAM 1451 is reset to “0” (step S2204), and the elapsed time count is started. (Step S2205). That is, the elapsed time count is restarted from “0”.

  On the other hand, when the overall CPU 141 determines that the calculated power interruption time is not the predetermined time (step S2203: NO), the power supply is temporarily cut off, for example, to clear the RAM, and the power supply is resumed in a short time. If so, the elapsed time counting is restarted (step S2206). That is, the elapsed time counting is restarted from the time indicated by the elapsed time information stored in the FeRAM 1451.

  When the process of step S2206 is performed, when the process of step S2205 is performed, or when it is determined that power supply is not started (step S2201: NO), the process is performed in the drop effect control process of step S2300. It is advanced.

[Drop effect control processing by the image sound control board 140]
Next, the drop effect control process executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 90 is a detailed flowchart of the drop effect control process in step S2300 of FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2200, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not it is a reference timing that is a timing at which a drop effect is started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the reference position, as illustrated in FIG. (Step S2301). Specifically, the time indicated by the elapsed time information stored in the FeRAM 1451 is a time when 30 minutes have elapsed since the power-on illustrated in FIG. 12, and N hours (N is an integer) 15 minutes have elapsed since the power-on. Whether or not it is the reference timing is determined based on whether or not the time coincides with any of the time when N hours and 45 minutes have elapsed since the power-on. If it is determined that it is the reference timing (step S2301: YES), the process proceeds to step S2303 described later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the reference timing (step S2301: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether it is the game effect end timing (step S2302). Specifically, for example, after the display list related to the game effect is set in the display list storage area 1491, the game effect is determined based on whether or not the drawing process of the VDP 142 based on the display list is completed. It is determined whether it is the end timing. Here, when it is determined that it is not the game effect end timing (step S2302: NO), the process proceeds to step S2315 described later.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the game effect end timing (step S2302: YES) or determines that it is the reference timing (step S2301: YES), the installation position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (own device) is the reference. It is determined whether or not it is a position (step S2303). Specifically, referring to the installation position information stored in FeRAM 1451, it is determined whether or not the installation position of the own device is the reference position. For example, when installation position information indicating the first position from the left is stored, it can be determined that the own device is installed at the reference position. On the other hand, when the installation position information indicating any of the second to eighth positions from the left is stored, the device is not installed at the reference position, that is, installed at a position other than the reference position. Can be determined.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the installation position of the own device is the reference position (step S2303: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets the start timing of the drop effect to the reference timing or the game end timing (step S2304).

  When the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the reference timing in step S2301 and executes the process of step S2304 in response to determining that the installation position of the own device is the reference position in step S2303, the start timing of the drop effect Is set in the control RAM 145 indicating that is the reference timing. In this case, the drop effect is given at any of the timing when 30 minutes have elapsed since the power was turned on, the timing when N hours (N is an integer) 15 minutes have passed since the power was turned on, and the timing when N hours 45 minutes have elapsed since the power was turned on. Will be started. That is, in this embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A in which installation position information indicating that it is installed at the reference position is stored, the start timing of the drop effect is set as the reference timing in this way.

  The overall CPU 141 determines that it is the game end timing in step S2302, and executes the processing of step S2304 in response to determining that the installation position of the own device is the reference position in step S2303. Setting information indicating that the start timing is the game end timing is set in the control RAM 145. In this case, the drop effect is immediately started at the timing when the game effect ends. That is, in this embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A in which installation position information indicating that it is installed at the reference position is stored, the start timing of the drop effect is set as the game effect end timing in this way. .

  In another embodiment, the timing when M hours (M is a natural number) 30 minutes have passed since power-on may be used as the reference timing of the drop effect. In this case, the reference timing of the drop effect coincides with the start timing of the game effect. In such a case, in order to give priority to the game effect over the drop effect, the start timing of the drop effect may be set to a time delayed by the effect execution time of the game effect with respect to the reference timing.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the installation position of the own device is not the reference position (step S2303: NO), the start timing of the drop effect is determined according to the installation position information with respect to the reference timing or the game end timing. Is set to a time delayed by (step S2305).

  When the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the reference timing in step S2301 and executes the process of step S2305 in response to determining that the installation position of the own device is not the reference position in step S2303, first, The delay time with respect to the reference timing of the start time of the drop effect is specified. Specifically, the delay time is read by reading the delay time corresponding to the installation position indicated by the installation position information stored in the FeRAM 1451 from the delay time table (see FIG. 35) stored in the control ROM 145. . For example, in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1C, since the installation position information indicating that it is installed at the third position from the left with respect to the reference position is stored, it is specified that the delay time is 1.0 second. The Then, the overall CPU 141 sets the timing when the delay time specified from the reference timing has elapsed as the start timing of the drop effect, and sets the setting information in the control RAM 145. In this case, the timing when 30 minutes + delay time has elapsed since power-on, N time (N is an integer) 15 minutes + time after power-on, timing when N-hour 45 minutes + delay time has elapsed since power-on The drop effect is started at any of the timings. That is, in this embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machines 1B to 1H in which the installation position information indicating that the installation is at a position different from the reference position is stored, the start timing of the drop effect is thus the reference timing. Is set to a delayed time.

  The overall CPU 141 determines that it is the game end timing in step S2302, and executes the process of step S2305 in response to determining that the installation position of the own device is not the reference position in step S2303. As described above, based on the delay time table stored in the control ROM 144 of the own device and the installation position information stored in the FeRAM 1451 of the own device, the start time of the drop effect on the own device with respect to the game end timing Specify the delay time. Then, the overall CPU 141 sets the timing at which the specified delay time has elapsed from the game end timing as the start timing of the drop effect, and sets the setting information in the control RAM 145. In this case, the drop effect is started at a timing delayed by a delay time from the game end timing. That is, in the present embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machines 1B to 1H in which the installation position information indicating that the game machine is installed at a position different from the reference position is stored, the start timing of the drop effect is thus the end of the game. It is set to a time delayed with respect to the timing. The game end timing is common to the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H. For this reason, after the drop effect is first started at the game end timing in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the drop effect is started later in the other pachinko gaming machines 1B to 1H.

  If the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2304, executes the process of step S2305, or determines that it is not the game effect end timing (step S2302: NO), is the start timing of the drop effect set? It is determined whether or not (step S2307). Specifically, whether or not the start timing of the drop effect is set based on whether or not the information indicating the start timing of the drop effect set by the processing of step S2304 or step S2305 is stored in the control RAM 145. Determine whether. If it is determined that the start timing of the drop effect has not been set (step S2307: NO), the process proceeds to step S2318 described later.

  When determining that the start timing of the drop effect has been set (step S2307: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether it is the start timing of the drop effect (step S2308). Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the drop effect based on the setting information indicating the start timing of the drop effect stored in the control RAM 145 and the elapsed time information stored in the FeRAM 1451. To do. If it is determined that it is not the start timing of the drop effect (step S2308: NO), the process proceeds to step S2318.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the start timing of the drop effect (step S2308: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the current state is a customer waiting state (step S2309). Specifically, for example, whether or not it is a state before receiving another command from the effect control board 130 after receiving the customer waiting effect start command transmitted from the effect control board 130 in accordance with the process of step S151. Whether or not the customer is waiting is determined. Here, the customer waiting state means that after the customer waiting command is transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the processing in step S322 (see FIG. 69), the sub CPU 131 performs processing in step S148 (see FIG. 84). This is a state after it is determined that a customer waiting determination time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, and a so-called customer waiting effect is being performed.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is in a customer waiting state (step S2309: YES), that is, if a customer waiting effect is being performed, the customer waiting point determination table (see FIG. 40) is read from the control ROM 144 and controlled. Is set in the RAM 145 (step S2310).

The change effect start command related to the first special symbol determination transmitted from the effect control board 130 includes information indicating the result of the first special symbol determination. For this reason, when the overall CPU 141 is displaying the variation of the symbol related to the first special symbol determination based on the variation rendering start command received from the rendering control board 130, the overall CPU 141 is a big hit when the variation display of the symbol is terminated. It is possible to execute the result determination process for determining whether or not the symbol is to be stopped and displayed.
In addition, the hold display command transmitted from the effect control board 130 includes advance determination information related to the first special symbol determination. For this reason, when the first special symbol determination is held based on the hold display command received from the effect control board 130, the general CPU 141 may determine that the hold is a big hit. For example, whether or not there is a big hit, but for example, whether or not there is a high-reliability loss hold in which a loss is notified after an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is performed. Can be executed.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is not in the customer waiting state (step S2309: NO), based on the change effect start command received from the effect control board 130 and the hold display command, the result determination process (the result determination process and Hold result determination processing). Then, the overall CPU 141 sets the point determination table as follows based on the results of these two result determination processes.

  In other words, when the general CPU 141 determines that it is not in the customer waiting state (step S2309: NO), it determines whether or not there is a big hit based on the result of the result determination process (step S2311). If it is determined that there is a big hit (step S2311: YES), the big hit point determination table (see FIG. 40) is read from the control ROM 144 and set in the control RAM 145 (step S2312).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that there is no jackpot (step S2311: NO), based on the result of the result determination process, whether or not there is a high reliability loss hold in the hold of the first special symbol determination. Is determined (step S2313). If it is determined that there is a high-reliability loss (step S2313: YES), the high-reliability loss point determination table (see FIG. 40) is read from the control ROM 144 and set in the control RAM 145 (step S2314). ). Conversely, when it is determined that there is no high-reliability loss (step S2313: NO), the low-reliability loss point determination table (see FIG. 40) is read from the control ROM 144 and set in the control RAM 145 (step S2315). ).

  The overall CPU 141 refers to the point determination table set in the control RAM 145 by the process of step S2310, the process of step S2312, the process of step S2314, or the process of step S2315, and determines the drop point to be dropped by the drop effect ( Step S2316).

  In the point drop effect in the present embodiment, the effect mode is set based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination. Specifically, when a determination result (including a result of prior determination) indicating that it is determined to execute the jackpot game is obtained, the drop point is determined with reference to the jackpot point determination table. . When this jackpot point determination table is referenced, the drop point is easily determined to be 480 points, but may be determined to be less than 480 points. Therefore, the effect mode of the drop effect is controlled to the effect mode of dropping a 480-point heart image that suggests the presence of a jackpot or the effect mode of dropping a heart image of less than 480 points that does not suggest the presence of a jackpot Is done.

  On the other hand, when the determination result (including the result of the prior determination) indicating that it is determined not to execute the jackpot game is obtained, the loss point determination table is referred to when determining the drop point. For this reason, the effect mode of the drop effect is controlled to the effect mode of dropping a heart image of less than 480 points that does not suggest the presence of a jackpot, and is not controlled to the effect mode of dropping a heart image of 480 points. .

  Thus, when a point less than 480 points is dropped due to the drop effect, a game privilege (for example, selection of music can be selected) according to the point is given to the player. On the other hand, when 480 points are dropped due to the drop effect, in addition to a gaming privilege corresponding to the point (for example, music can be selected), another game of acquiring a game ball by jackpot game A privilege will be given.

  That is, the player is more likely to set the effect mode of the drop effect to 480 points than to set the effect mode to drop the points less than 480 points. On the other hand, a larger game privilege is given.

  In addition, since the process which determines a dropping point is as having mentioned above based on FIG. 40, detailed description here is abbreviate | omitted.

  When determining the drop point, the overall CPU 141 sets setting information regarding the drop effect including information indicating the determined drop point in the control RAM 145 (step S2317). A drop effect using the main liquid crystal 5 is started by executing an image output control process in step S2800 described later based on the setting information.

  The overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2317, determines that the start timing of the drop effect is not set (step S2307: NO), or determines that it is not the start timing of the drop effect (step) S2308: NO), it is determined whether or not the drop effect is ended (step S2318). Specifically, for example, it is determined whether or not the drop effect is ended based on whether or not the time required to execute the drop effect has elapsed since the process of step S2317.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the drop effect is to be ended (step S2318: YES), the overall CPU 141 executes a point information update process for updating the points so that the drop point determined in the process of step S2316 is added. (Step S2319). Specifically, the point information stored in the control RAM 125 is updated so that the dropping point included in the setting information set in the process of step S2317 becomes the added value. Then, point information for updating the display of the point information so that the point information displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 becomes a value obtained by adding the dropping point included in the setting information set in the process of step S2317. Update process is executed.

  When the drop effect is completed in this way, the setting information related to the drop effect stored in the control RAM 145 is discarded.

  When the process of step S2319 is executed, or when it is determined that the drop effect is not finished (step S2318: NO), the process proceeds to step S2400.

  In this way, each pachinko gaming machine 1 (1A to 1H) is configured to be able to execute an effect (here, a drop effect) based on the installation position information, and the general CPU 141 is specified by an elapsed time from power-on. The start timing is set based on the reference timing and the installation position information stored in the FeRAM 1451, and when it is determined that the start timing is reached, the drop effect is started.

  In this embodiment, the reference timing of the drop effect is 30 minutes later, N hours after the power is turned on, so that the reference timing of the drop effect does not overlap with the start timing of the performance effect and the start timing of the game effect. The case where (N is an integer) 15 minutes later, N hours 45 minutes later, and the game effect end timing have been described. On the other hand, in other embodiments, the timing after 15 × M minutes (M is an integer) after power-on may be used as the reference timing of the drop effect. That is, the reference timing of the drop effect may arrive every 15 minutes after the power is turned on.

  However, when such a configuration is adopted, the reference timing of the drop effect overlaps with the start timing of the performance effect, and also overlaps with the start timing of the game effect. For this, the following control is considered. That is, with respect to the performance effect, a series of effects such as the next performance notice effect and the performance end effect are performed following the performance effect, and therefore it takes a long time from the start of the performance effect to the end of the performance end effect. For this reason, for example, if a configuration in which a drop effect is performed after the performance end effect ends, the time interval from the end of the drop effect until the next drop effect is considerably shortened. There is a problem that it ends up. For this reason, when the reference timing of the drop effect overlaps with the start timing of the performance effect, it is conceivable to perform control such that the performance is not performed in order to prioritize the performance effect over the drop effect.

  On the other hand, the time required for the game effect is shorter than the time from the start of the performance effect until the end of the performance effect. Therefore, when the reference timing of the drop effect overlaps with the start timing of the game effect, the reference timing of the drop effect is delayed by shifting the reference timing of the drop effect by the same time as the execution time of the game effect. It is conceivable to perform such control.

[Game Sequence Effect Control Processing by Image Sound Control Board 140]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, a game series effect control process executed on the image sound control board 140 will be described. FIG. 91 is a detailed flowchart of the game sequence effect control process in step S2400 of FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S2300, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the announcement regarding the game effect as illustrated in FIG. 91 (step S2401). In the present embodiment, regardless of the type of game effect, the effect execution time of the event announcement is fixed to 30 seconds, and the game execution time + countdown effect execution time is fixed to 60 seconds. In addition, the game effect is started at the timing when the elapsed time from power-on is M hours (M is a natural number) 30 minutes. For this reason, the event announcement is started at the timing when the elapsed time from power-on is M hours (M is a natural number) 30 minutes to 90 seconds (= 30 seconds + 60 seconds). For this reason, the general CPU 141 is the start timing of the event announcement based on whether or not the elapsed time indicated by the elapsed time information stored in the FeRAM 1451 is M hours (M is a natural number) 30 minutes to 90 seconds. It is determined whether or not.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the start timing of the event announcement (step S2401: YES), the overall CPU 141 identifies the type of game that is started 90 seconds after the current event announcement (step S2402). Specifically, the overall CPU 141 first acquires RTC information from the RTC 134 and specifies the current date. Next, the pattern number corresponding to the current date is read from the pattern number selection table (see FIG. 43) stored in the control ROM 144. Then, the overall CPU 141 determines how many times the current game production is today, and based on the determination result, the read pattern number, and the game opening order pattern table stored in the control ROM 144. To identify the type of game this time.

  For example, when the current date is 5/13, the pattern number read from the pattern number selection table is “6”. As is apparent from the notation of FIG. 42, the day when this pattern number “6” is selected is a ring-throw game, bingo game, obstacle race, quiz game, ring-throw game, bingo game, obstacle race, quiz game,.・ ・ Game types are to be switched in this order. Therefore, when the current game is the sixth game, it can be specified that the bingo game is held this time.

  When the general CPU 141 specifies the type of game, the general CPU 141 sets the setting information of the event announcement including information indicating the specified type of game in the control RAM 145 (step S2403). Based on this setting information, the image output control process of step S2800 is executed, whereby the event announcement using the main liquid crystal 5 is started.

  If the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2403 or determines that it is not the start timing of the holding notification (step S2401: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether it is the end timing of the holding notification (step S2404). Specifically, for example, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the holding notification based on whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the holding notification is 60 seconds.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the end timing of the announcement (step S2404: YES), it sets the game description and the countdown setting information in the control RAM 145 (step S2405). Specifically, the control RAM 145 stores setting information for performing a game description relating to the same type of game as the type of game specified in step S2402 and counting down the remaining time until the game effect is started. Store.

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2405 and determines that it is not the end timing of the announcement (step S2404: NO), the overall time since the power-on is determined based on the elapsed time information stored in the FeRAM 1451. Is M hours (M is a natural number) 30 minutes (step S2406). Here, if it is determined that the elapsed time from power-on is not M hours 30 minutes (step S2406: NO), the process proceeds to step S2500.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the elapsed time from power-on is M hours 30 minutes (step S2406: YES), for example, based on the specific result of step S2402, whether the game to be held this time is a bingo game or not Is determined (step S2407). If it is determined that the game is a bingo game (step S2407: YES), a bingo game start process for starting the bingo game is executed (step S2410). This bingo game start process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When determining that the game to be held this time is not a bingo game (step S2407: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the game to be held this time is a quiz game (step S2421). If it is determined that the game is a quiz game (step S2421: YES), a quiz game start process for starting the quiz game is executed (step S2430). The quiz game start process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When determining that the game to be held this time is not a quiz game (step S2421: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the game to be held this time is an obstacle race (step S2441). If it is determined that the race is an obstacle race (step S2441: YES), an obstacle race start process for starting the obstacle race is executed (step S2450). The obstacle race start process will be described later in detail based on FIG.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the game to be held this time is not an obstacle race (step S2441: NO), the overall CPU 141 executes a ring throw game start process for starting the ring throw game (step S2460). This ring-throwing game start process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  As is apparent from the above description, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if a predetermined time condition that the elapsed time from power-on is M hours 30 is satisfied, regardless of the type of game, Production begins.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the elapsed time since power-on is not M hours 30 minutes (step S2406: NO), if the process of step S2410 is executed, if the process of step S2430 is executed, the process of step S2450 Is executed, or when the process of step S2460 is executed, the setting information of the next game notice is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2471). Specifically, first, RTC information is acquired from the RTC 134, and the current date is specified. Next, the pattern number corresponding to the current date is read from the pattern number selection table (see FIG. 43), and the information indicating the game holding order corresponding to the pattern number is read from the game holding order pattern table (see FIG. 42). To specify the next game type. Then, setting information for the next game notice including information indicating the type of the identified game is set in the control RAM 145. By executing the image output control process in step S2800 based on the setting information, the next game notice using the main liquid crystal 5 is started.

  As is apparent from the above description, in the present embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H, four types of game effects are performed at a timing when a predetermined time condition (M time 30 minutes have elapsed since power-on) is satisfied. Any one of the games is started simultaneously, and the type of game is switched every time a game effect is performed.

[Bingo game start processing]
FIG. 92 is a detailed flowchart of the bingo game start process in step S2410 of FIG. If the overall CPU 141 determines that the game to be held this time is a bingo game (step S2407: YES), first, as illustrated in FIG. 92, the overall CPU 141 selects a scenario for the current bingo game (step S2411). Regarding the bingo game, a plurality of scenarios with different combinations of lottery balls selected in eight lotteries are prepared, and control data (for example, a table) for changing the scenario each time the bingo game is played is controlled. It is stored in the ROM 144 for use. On the other hand, the general CPU 141 holds, for example, information indicating the scenario used in the previous bingo game in the FeRAM 1451, and selects the scenario of the current bingo game based on the information and the control data.

  The control ROM 144 of each pachinko gaming machine 1 stores the same control data (for example, a table) for appropriately switching the bingo game scenario. In the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H, the bingo game is played. When starting at the same time, the same scenario is selected.

  Next, the overall CPU 141 executes a result determination process at the start of the current bingo game, similarly to the result determination process performed at the start of the drop effect, and selects the current bingo card based on the result. That is, when the overall CPU 141 selects a bingo scenario, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not there is a jackpot based on the results of the two result determination processes (step S2412). If it is determined that there is a big hit (step S2412: YES), a bingo card that finally becomes a bingo for the scenario selected in the process of step S2411 is selected (step S2413). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no big hit (step S2412: NO), a bingo card that will ultimately fail bingo is selected at random (step S2414).

  In other embodiments, a bingo card with no bingo may be selected based on the result of the result determination process when there is no big hit. For example, if the result of the hold result determination process is a result indicating that there is a hold of high reliability loss, the bingo is not finally established, but the lottery balls and the numbers are valid and become effective. If a bingo card that has a relatively large number of effective squares is selected and, on the contrary, the result indicates that there is no high-reliability loss hold, a bingo is not finally established, and lottery It is conceivable to select a bingo card that has a relatively small number of effective squares that are valid when the balls and numbers match.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the reliability for the jackpot based on the number of effective squares.

  The overall CPU 141 sets the bingo game setting information when the process of step S2413 is executed or when the process of step S2414 is executed (step S2415). Specifically, the bingo game setting information including information indicating the bingo scenario selected in the process of step S2411 and the type of bingo card selected in the process of step S2413 or step S2414 is set in the control RAM 145. The bingo game using the main liquid crystal 5 is started by executing the image output control process in step S2800 based on the setting information.

  Thus, each pachinko gaming machine 1 (1A to 1H) can execute an effect (here, a bingo game) that is not based on the installation position information.

[Quiz game start processing]
FIG. 93 is a detailed flowchart of the quiz game start process in step S2430 of FIG. When determining that the game to be held this time is a quiz game (step S2421: YES), the overall CPU 141 first selects a quiz problem scenario as illustrated in FIG. 93 (step S2431). In other words, select the quiz problem scenario so that the problem that was presented in the previous quiz game is not the same as the problem that was presented in this quiz game, and that the same problem is not presented on the same day. . The scenario selection for the quiz problem is performed in the same manner as the scenario selection for bingo (step S2411 in FIG. 92), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The control ROM 144 of each pachinko gaming machine 1 stores the same control data (for example, a table) for appropriately switching the quiz problem scenario. In the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H, a quiz game is played. When starting at the same time, the same scenario is selected.

  Next, the overall CPU 141 sets a point determination table for determining points to be given to the player for the correct answer when the player corrects the question presented during the quiz game. Process. That is, when selecting the quiz problem scenario, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not there is a jackpot, similarly to the process of step S2412 (step S2432). If it is determined that there is a jackpot (step S2432: YES), a jackpot point determination table regarding the quiz game is read from the control ROM 144 and set in the control RAM 145 (step S2433). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no big hit (step S2432: NO), the point determination table for losing about the quiz game is read from the control ROM 144 and set in the control RAM 145 (step S2434).

  Then, the overall CPU 141 sets quiz game setting information in the control RAM 145 (step S2435). Specifically, quiz game setting information including information indicating the scenario selected in the process of step S2431 and information indicating the set point selection table is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2435). The quiz game using the main liquid crystal 5 is started by executing the image output control process in step S2800 based on the setting information.

  Although detailed description is omitted, during the quiz game, every time the player answers the quiz correctly, a point determination process is performed to determine points to be given to the correct answer. Specifically, the points are determined with reference to the jackpot point determination table or the loss point determination table set in the control RAM 145. At this time, when the jackpot point determination table is set, the point is easily determined to be a high point and is not easily determined to be a low point. The final total points are likely to be 480 points or more. In addition, when the point determination table for losing is set, the point is easily determined to be a low point and is not easily determined to be a high point. Then, points for each correct answer are determined so that the final total points do not exceed 480 points.

  Note that here, when either the jackpot point determination table or the lose point determination table is set at the start of the quiz game, and points are determined with reference to the point determination table during the quiz game As described above, the point determination table may be switched during the quiz game. For example, in the middle of a quiz game, if the right to determine the first special symbol that will be determined to be a big win is held with the point determination table for losing being set, You may make it switch to the point determination table for use.

  Further, here, the case where there is one point determination table for losing has been described, but a plurality of point determination tables for losing may be prepared. For example, when a high-reliability loss hold exists, a point determination table for high-reliability loss is set, and when only a low-reliability loss hold exists, a point determination table for a low-reliability loss An example is to set.

  Thus, each pachinko gaming machine 1 (1A to 1H) can execute an effect (here, a quiz game) that is not based on the installation position information.

  Note that in a quiz game, points are awarded if the player does not answer the problem correctly, and points are awarded if the player answers the question correctly. This is a technical intervention type production. For this reason, the content of the quiz game changes in accordance with the operation by the player (such as the display of the number of points and the answer result).

[Obstacle race start processing]
FIG. 94 is a detailed flowchart of the obstacle race start process in step S2450 of FIG. When determining that the game to be held this time is an obstacle race (step S2441: YES), the overall CPU 141 first selects an obstacle race scenario as illustrated in FIG. 94 (step S2451). In other words, the character that was ranked first in the previous obstacle race is the same as the character that was ranked first in this obstacle race, and the same character should not be ranked first more than once on the same day. Select an obstacle race scenario. Since the scenario selection for the obstacle race is performed in the same manner as the scenario selection for bingo (step S2411 in FIG. 92), detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The control ROM 144 of each pachinko gaming machine 1 stores the same control data (for example, a table) for appropriately switching the obstacle race scenario. In the pachinko gaming machines 1A to 1H, the obstacles The same scenario is selected when starting the race simultaneously.

  Next, the overall CPU 141 executes a result determination process at the start of the current obstacle race, similarly to the result determination process performed at the start of the drop effect, and determines whether or not there is a jackpot based on the result. (Step S2452). If it is determined that there is a jackpot (step S2452: YES), the character that is ranked first in this obstacle race is automatically determined as a support character based on the selection result of step S2451 (step S2453). . That is, when there is a big hit, the character that becomes the first place in this obstacle race is selected as the support character regardless of the installation position information.

  On the other hand, when determining that there is no big hit (step S2452: NO), the overall CPU 141 automatically determines a support character based on the installation position information stored in the FeRAM 1451 (step S2454). Specifically, a support character determination table that associates the installation position indicated by the installation position information with the identification information of the character that is second or lower in the current obstacle race is stored in the control ROM 144. If there is no jackpot, the overall CPU 141 reads the support character corresponding to the installation position indicated by the installation position information from the support character determination table, and determines the second or lower character as the support character.

  The overall CPU 141 sets the obstacle race setting information in the control RAM 145 when the process of step S2453 is executed or when the process of step S2454 is executed (step S2455). Specifically, the obstacle RAM setting information including the information indicating the scenario selected in step S2451 and the information indicating the support character determined in step S2453 or step S2454 is set in the control RAM 145. To do. By executing the image output control process of step S2800 based on this setting information, the obstacle race using the main liquid crystal 5 is started.

  As described above, each pachinko machine 1 (1A to 1H) executes both the effect of the obstacle race not based on the installation position information and the effect based on the installation position information depending on whether or not there is a big hit. Is possible. In other words, the obstacle races in the game effects are characterized by the fact that the same effects may be based on the installation position information or not based on the installation position information, depending on whether or not the jackpot.

  In addition, although the performance of the obstacle race can change the support character (pointer position) based on the installation position information, if there is a big hit at the start of the obstacle race, the performance based on the installation position information Changes are made differently than if the character is changed. That is, a cheering character different from the cheering character selected based on the installation position information is selected.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the structure which supports the support character determined at the time of the start of an obstacle race to the last (a support character is not changed on the way) is employ | adopted. For this reason, as for the obstacle race, as in the bingo game, the result determination process is performed only at the start of the game. That is, the result determination process is not performed during the game. On the other hand, in other embodiments, in the middle of an obstacle race, for example, when a result determination process is executed at the timing when a variable effect start command or a hold display command is received, and the presence of a jackpot can be confirmed, You may employ | adopt the structure which changes a support character to the character which becomes the 1st place on the way.

[Ring throw game start processing]
FIG. 95 is a detailed flowchart of the ring-throw game start process in step S2460 of FIG. When determining that the game to be held this time is not an obstacle race (step S2441: NO), the overall CPU 141 selects a playback start point based on the installation position information as illustrated in FIG. 95 (step S2461). ). Specifically, a reproduction start point selection table (see FIG. 54) is stored in the control ROM 144, and the overall CPU 141 reproduces a reproduction start point corresponding to the installation position indicated by the installation position information stored in the FeRAM 1451. By reading from the start point selection table, the playback start point in the ring-throwing effect data is selected.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the time condition that the elapsed time from the power-on is M hours 30 minutes is satisfied, the reproduction of the ring-throwing effect data is started regardless of the installation position information. The playback start point of the ring-throwing effect data depends on the installation position information. This is as described above with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54.

  Next, when the player succeeds in the ring-throwing in the ring-throw game, the overall CPU 141 performs a process for setting a point determination table for determining points to be given to the player for the success. That is, when the overall CPU 141 selects a reproduction start point, it determines whether or not there is a big hit, similarly to the process of step S2412 (step S2462). If it is determined that there is a jackpot (step S2462: YES), the jackpot point determination table regarding the ring-throw game is read from the control ROM 144 and set in the control RAM 145 (step S2463). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no big hit (step S2462: NO), the point determination table for loss related to the ring-throw game is read from the control ROM 144 and set in the control RAM 145 (step S2464).

  Then, the overall CPU 141 sets the ring throw game setting information in the control RAM 145 (step S2465). Specifically, the setting information of the ring-throw game including information indicating the reproduction start point selected in the process of step S2461 and information indicating the point determination table set in the process of step S2463 or step S2464 is set in the control RAM 145. (Step S2465). The ring-throw game using the main liquid crystal 5 is started by executing the image output control process of step S2800 based on this setting information.

  Note that this setting information includes information indicating the playback start point in ring-throwing effect data (see FIG. 53), and each pachinko gaming machine 1 has a different playback start point corresponding to the installation position information. Therefore, the reproduction of the same ring-throwing effect data is started at the same time.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, during the ring-throwing game, every time the player succeeds in ring-throwing, a point determination process for determining points to be given for the success is performed. Specifically, the points are determined with reference to the jackpot point determination table or the loss point determination table set in the control RAM 145. At this time, when the jackpot point determination table is set, the point is easily determined to be a high point and is not easily determined to be a low point. The final total points are likely to be 480 points or more. In addition, when the point determination table for losing is set, the point is easily determined to be a low point and is not easily determined to be a high point. The points for each success are then determined so that the final total points do not exceed 480 points.

  Note that here, when either the jackpot point determination table or the lose point determination table is set at the start of the ring-throwing game, and points are determined with reference to the point determination table during the ring-throwing game. As described above, the point determination table may be switched during the ring-throw game. For example, in the middle of a ring-throwing game, if the right to determine the first special symbol that will be determined to be a big win is held with the point determination table for lose being set, You may make it switch to the point determination table for use.

  Further, here, the case where there is one point determination table for losing has been described, but a plurality of point determination tables for losing may be prepared. For example, when a high-reliability loss hold exists, a point determination table for high-reliability loss is set, and when only a low-reliability loss hold exists, a point determination table for a low-reliability loss An example is to set.

  Thus, each pachinko gaming machine 1 (1A to 1H) can execute an effect (here, a ring-throw game) based on the installation position information.

  In the ring-throwing game, if the player does not succeed in ring-throwing, points are not awarded, and conversely, if the ring-throw is successful, points are awarded, so whether or not points are given to the player's operation. This is a technical intervention-type production that depends on them. For this reason, in the ring-throw game, the content of the presentation (the number of acquired points, the movement of the wheel, etc.) changes according to the operation by the player.

[Performance Series Effect Control Processing by Image Sound Control Board 140]
Hereinafter, the performance series effect control process executed on the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 96 is a detailed flowchart of the performance series effect control process in step S2500 of FIG.

  The overall CPU 141 executes the sound effect control process for controlling the execution of the sound effect, as illustrated in FIG. 96, following the process in step S2400 (step S2510), and the practice scenery for controlling the execution of the practice landscape effect. An effect control process is executed (step S2530), a performance start notice effect control process that controls the execution of the performance start notice effect is executed (step S2550), and a performance effect control process that controls the execution of the performance effect is executed (step S2550). S2570), the next performance notice effect control process for controlling the execution of the next performance notice effect is executed (step S2590), and the performance end effect control process for controlling the execution of the performance end effect is executed (step S2610).

[Audio production control processing]
FIG. 97 is a detailed flowchart of the sound effect control process in step S2510 of FIG. As is clear from the notation of FIG. 20, the effect sound data used for the sound effect has different playback times, and therefore the sound effect effect execution time is variable. On the other hand, with respect to the practice scenery effect, although the effect content changes according to the type of new song used for the performance effect, the effect execution time is fixed to 20 seconds (see FIG. 21). In this way, because the production execution time changes depending on which production sound data is used for the audio production, how many minutes and seconds before the performance production start timing is used to start the audio production. Prior to this, it is necessary to set in advance based on the type of effect sound data to be used. For this reason, in each pachinko gaming machine 1, the following processing is performed prior to the start of the sound effect.

  That is, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the start timing of the sound effect has been set based on whether or not the setting information indicating the start timing of the sound effect is stored in the control RAM 145 (step S2511). . Here, when it is determined that the start timing of the sound effect has been set (step S2511: YES), the process proceeds to step S2526 described later.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the start timing of the sound effect has not been set (step S2511: NO), first, it acquires RTC information from the RTC 134 and specifies the current date and time based on the RTC information. (Step S2512).

  Next, the overall CPU 141 specifies the start timing of the next performance effect based on the elapsed time information stored in the FeRAM 1451 (step S2513). In the present embodiment, the performance performance is started when the elapsed time from power-on becomes M hours (M is a natural number) (see FIG. 12). On the other hand, for example, when the elapsed time indicated by the elapsed time information is 38 minutes, the start timing of the next performance effect is specified as the timing one hour after the power is turned on. For example, when the elapsed time indicated by the elapsed time information is 3 hours 49 minutes, the start timing of the next performance effect is specified as the timing 4 hours after the power is turned on.

  Subsequently, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the current state is the all songs open state based on whether or not the current date and time specified in the process of step S2512 is a date and time later than the date and time when shifting to the all songs release state. Is determined (step S2514).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are not released (step S2514: NO), it reads the public management table (see FIG. 17) from the control ROM 144 and sets it in the control RAM 145 (step S2515). Then, the overall CPU 141 specifies a new song used for the next performance effect (step S2516). Specifically, based on the date and time specified in the process of step S2512 and the initial release permission date and time of each new song specified in the disclosure management table, the latest among the new songs that have passed the initial release permission date and time. Identify new songs. For example, if the current date and time is 11:20 am on June 10, 2014, it is the new song A to D that has passed the initial release permission date and time, and in this case, the new song D is the next performance. It is specified as a new song used for production.

  Subsequently, the overall CPU 141 reads out the all-song-release effect sound data selection table (see FIG. 20A) from the control ROM 144 and sets it in the control RAM 145 (step S2517). Then, the overall CPU 141 reads the effect sound data type corresponding to the new song specified in the process of step S2516 and the date of the current date and time specified in the process of step S2512 from the pre-release effect sound data selection table. Thus, one effect sound data is selected (step S2518). For example, when the specified new song is the new song C and the current date is June 1, 2014, the second effect sound data for the new song C is selected.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are released (step S2514: YES), the overall CPU 141 reads the presentation order management table (see FIG. 19) from the control ROM 144 and sets it in the control RAM 145 (step S2520). Then, the overall CPU 141 identifies a new song used for the next performance production (step S2521). Specifically, the date of the current date and time specified in the process of step S2512 and the start timing of the next performance effect specified in the process of step S2513 (the next performance effect starts after several hours from power-on) The new song used for the next performance production is specified by reading out the type of the new song corresponding to “)” from the presentation order management table.

  Subsequently, the overall CPU 141 reads the post-release effect sound data selection table (see FIG. 20B) from the control ROM 144 and sets it in the control RAM 145 (step S2522). Then, the overall CPU 141 stores information indicating the effect sound data used in the previous sound effect in advance in the FeRAM 1451 for the new song specified in the process of step S2521, and selects the next effect sound data (step). S2523). For example, the new song used for this performance production is new song B, and information indicating that the fourth production sound data for new song B after the release of all songs (see FIG. 20B) is used in the previous audio production. When stored in the FeRAM 1451, the first effect sound data for the new song B after the release of all songs is selected as effect sound data.

  Next, the overall CPU 141 specifies the reproduction time corresponding to the effect sound data selected in the process of step S2518 or step S2523 (step S2525). Specifically, when the effect sound data is selected by executing the process of step S2518, the reproduction of the effect sound data is performed by reading the reproduction time corresponding to the effect sound data from the effect sound data selection table before releasing all songs. Identify time. Further, when the effect sound data is selected by executing the process of step S2523, the reproduction time of the effect sound data is specified by reading the reproduction time corresponding to the effect sound data from the effect sound data selection table after all songs are released. To do.

  Subsequently, the overall CPU 141 specifies the audio production start timing (step S2526). With respect to the audio production, the production execution time of the audio production (variable), the production execution time of the practice scenery production (fixed to 20 seconds in the present embodiment), and the performance start notice production, based on the start timing of the performance production. It is necessary to start the sound effect at a timing preceding the execution time (fixed to 90 seconds in this embodiment). For this reason, the overall CPU 141 first adds these three effect execution times in step S2526. That is, the total production execution time of the three productions is calculated by adding the reproduction time specified in the process of step S2525, 20 seconds, and 90 seconds. Subsequently, a time preceding the total performance execution time with respect to the start timing of the next performance effect specified in the process of step S2513 is determined as the start timing of the sound effect. Then, the effect sound data information indicating the effect sound data selected in the process of step S2518 or step S2523 and the sound effect start timing information indicating the sound effect start timing determined in the process of step S2526 are set in the control RAM 145 ( Step S2527).

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2527 or determines that the audio effect start timing has been set (step S2511: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether it is the audio effect start timing (step S2528). . Specifically, the audio production start timing information set by the process of step S2527 is stored in the control RAM 145, and whether or not it is the audio production start timing based on whether or not the time indicated by the information has come. Determine whether. Here, when it is determined that it is the voice production start timing (step S2528: YES), the setting information of the voice production is set (step S2529). Specifically, sound production setting information including the production sound data information set in the process of step S 2527 is set in the control RAM 145. Based on this setting information, the effect sound output control process of step S2900 (see FIG. 86) is executed, so that the sound effect using the speaker 24 is started.

  In the present embodiment, the execution execution time of the practice scenery effect is fixed to 20 seconds and the execution execution time of the performance start notice effect is fixed to 90 seconds, whereas the sound effect is The production execution time is variable. For this reason, when the production sound data used for the audio production is switched, the start time of the performance series production changes.

[Practice scenery direction control processing]
FIG. 98 is a detailed flowchart of the practice scenery effect control process in step S2530 of FIG. Subsequent to the processing of step S2510, the overall CPU 141 determines whether it is the start timing of the practice scenery effect, as illustrated in FIG. 98 (step S2531). In this embodiment, the performance execution time of the practice scenery effect is fixed to 20 seconds, and the performance execution time of the performance start notice effect is fixed to 90 seconds. For this reason, the general CPU 141 indicates that the elapsed time from the power-on indicated by the elapsed time information stored in the FeRAM 1451 is 110 seconds before the performance production start timing (the timing at which M hours (M is a natural number) has elapsed). It is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the practice scenery effect based on whether or not it coincides with this time. If it is determined that it is not the start timing of the practice scenery effect (step S2531: NO), the process proceeds to step S2550 described later.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the start timing of the practice scenery effect (step S2531: YES), it identifies the current date and time as in step S2512 (see FIG. 97) (step S2532), and step S2513 ( Similar to the process of FIG. 97), the start timing of the next performance effect is specified (step S2533). Then, similarly to the processing in step S2514 (see FIG. 97), it is determined whether or not the current state is the all-track open state (step S2534). If it is determined that the all-track is not open (step S2534: NO), the disclosure management table is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2535), and if it is determined that all songs are released (step S2534: YES), the presentation order management table is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2536). ).

  Next, the overall CPU 141 identifies a new song used for the performance production corresponding to the current practice scenery production (step S2537). Since the processing in step S2537 is performed in the same manner as the processing in step S2516 and step S2521 in FIG. 97, description thereof is omitted here.

  When the general CPU 141 specifies a new song to be used for this performance performance, the general CPU 141 reads the practice scenery performance data selection table (see FIG. 21) from the control ROM 144 and sets it in the control RAM 145 (step S2538). Subsequently, one practice scenery effect data is selected by reading the practice scenery effect data corresponding to the new song identified in the process of step S2537 from the practice landscape effect data selection table (step S2539). Then, setting information of practice scenery effects including information indicating the selection result is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2540). By executing the image output control process in step S2800 based on this setting information, the practice scenery effect using the main liquid crystal 5 is started.

[Performance start notice effect control processing]
FIG. 99 is a detailed flowchart of the performance start notice effect control process in step S2550 of FIG. Subsequent to the processing in step S2530, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the performance start notice effect as illustrated in FIG. 99 (step S2551). Specifically, since the start timing of the performance start notice effect is fixed at a time 90 seconds before the start timing of the performance effect (the timing when M time has elapsed since the power is turned on), the general CPU 141 includes the FeRAM 1451. It is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the performance start notice effect based on whether or not the elapsed time indicated by the elapsed time information stored in is coincident with the time of M time-90 seconds from power-on. If it is determined that it is not the start timing of the performance start notice effect (step S2551: NO), the process proceeds to step S2570, which will be described later.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the start timing of the performance start announcement effect (step S2551: YES), the overall CPU 141 reads the performance start announcement effect data selection table (see FIG. 22) from the control ROM 144 and sets it in the control RAM 145 ( In step S2552, the performance start notice effect data is read from the performance start notice effect data selection table to select one performance start notice effect data (step S2553). Then, the setting information of the performance start notice effect including information indicating the selection result is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2554). By performing the image output control process in step S2800 based on this setting information, the performance start notice effect using the main liquid crystal 5 is started.

[Performance production control processing]
FIG. 100 is a detailed flowchart of the performance effect control process in step S2570 of FIG. Subsequent to the process of step S2550, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not it is the performance start timing as illustrated in FIG. 100 (step S2571). Specifically, whether or not it is the performance production start timing based on whether or not the elapsed time since power-on is M hours (M is a natural number) with reference to the elapsed time information stored in FeRAM 1451 Is determined (step S2571). Here, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the performance performance (step S2571: NO), the process proceeds to step S2590 described later.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the start timing of the performance performance (step S2571: YES), it determines whether or not the entire song is open (step S2571: see FIG. 97) (step S2514). S2572) If it is determined that the all songs are not released (step S2572: NO), the disclosure management table is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2573), and if it is determined that all songs are released (step S2572). : YES), the presentation order management table is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2574).

  Next, the overall CPU 141 specifies a new song used for the performance performance this time (step S2575). The processing in step S2575 is performed in the same manner as the processing in step S2516 and step S2521 in FIG. 97, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  Subsequently, the overall CPU 141 reads out the performance effect data selection table (see FIG. 23) stored in the control ROM 144, sets it in the control RAM 145 (step S2576), and corresponds to the performance music specified in the process of step S2575. The performance performance data to be used is selected from the performance performance data selection table to select one performance performance data to be used for the performance performance (step S2577).

  Then, the overall CPU 141 sets performance production setting information including the selection result of step S2577 in the control RAM 145 (step S2578). The performance production using the main liquid crystal 5 is started by executing the image output control process of step S2800 based on this setting information.

  Finally, the overall CPU 141 sets the start timing of the next performance notice effect (step S2579). This next performance notice effect will be performed following the current performance effect, but the execution time of the performance effect will change depending on the new song used for the performance effect. The start timing of the performance notice effect will change. For this reason, in step S2579, the general CPU 141 uses the current time, which is the start timing of the performance effect, as a reference, and the timing after the playback time of the performance effect data selected in the process of step S2577 has elapsed is the start timing of the next performance notice effect. And the setting information is set in the control RAM 145.

  For example, when performance performance data for new song B is selected, the playback time required for playback of this performance data is 5 minutes and 12 seconds (see FIG. 23). For this reason, the timing when 5 minutes and 12 seconds have elapsed from the present time is set as the start timing of the next performance notice effect. When performance performance data for new song H is selected, the playback time required for playback of this performance data is 4 minutes and 42 seconds (see FIG. 23). For this reason, the timing when 4 minutes and 42 seconds have elapsed from the present time is set as the start timing of the next performance notice effect.

  In this way, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the performance production start timing corresponding to the time condition that the elapsed time from the power-on is M hours (M is a natural number) is reached, and the performance production start timing is set. When it is determined that it has become, the main liquid crystal 5 is caused to start the performance effect.

  Before the new song B's initial release permission date, the performance performance of the new song A will be performed when the elapsed time from power-on becomes M hours (M is a natural number), and after the new song B's first release permission date is reached Performs the performance effect of the new song B when the elapsed time from power-on becomes M hours (M is a natural number). The same applies to other new songs.

[Next performance notice control processing]
FIG. 101 is a detailed flowchart of the next performance notice effect control process in step S2590 of FIG. Following the processing of step S2570, the overall CPU 141 determines whether it is the start timing of the next performance notice effect (step S2591). Specifically, information indicating the start timing of the next performance notice effect is set in the control RAM 145 in accordance with the process of step S2579, and the time indicated by the elapsed time information stored in the FeRAM 1451 indicates this start timing. It is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the next performance notice effect based on whether or not it matches the time corresponding to the information shown. If it is determined that it is not the start timing of the next performance notice effect (step S2591: NO), the process proceeds to step S2610 described later.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the start timing of the next performance notice effect (step S2591: YES), the overall CPU 141 identifies the next new song (step S2592). Specifically, the new song used in this performance production is specified, and the next new song of the new song is specified.

  Next, the overall CPU 141 reads the next performance notice effect data selection table (see FIG. 24) from the control ROM 144 and sets it in the control RAM 145 (step S2593), and corresponds to the next new song specified in the process of step S2592. By reading the next performance notice effect data type from the next performance notice effect data selection table, one next performance notice effect data is selected (step S2594).

  Subsequently, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not all songs are in the open state (step S2595), similarly to the process of step S2514 of FIG. If it is determined that all songs are in an open state (step S2595: YES), the process proceeds to step S2598 described later.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are not released (step S2595: NO), the presentation order management table is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2596), and this presentation order management table and the current date indicated by the RTC 134 are set. Based on the above, the number of days until the first performance of the next new song is performed is specified (step S2597).

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2597, and determines that all songs are released (step S2595: YES), both the selection result of step S2594 and the number of days specified by the process of step S2597, or only result information. Is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2598). By performing the image output control process in step S2800 based on this setting information, the next performance notice effect using the main liquid crystal 5 is started.

  If “YES” is determined in step S2595, the next new song will be performed one hour later, so the next new song will be performed one hour later along with the next new song name. The next performance notice effect is performed to notify that it will be performed. On the other hand, if “NO” is determined in step S2595, in addition to the name of the next new song, the number of days until the first performance of the next new song specified in the process of step S2597 is notified.

[Performance end effect control processing]
FIG. 102 is a detailed flowchart of the performance end effect control process in step S2610 of FIG. Subsequent to the processing in step S2590, the overall CPU 141 determines whether it is the end timing of the next performance notice effect as illustrated in FIG. 102 (step S2611). If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the next performance notice effect (step S2611: NO), the process proceeds to step S2700 (see FIG. 86).

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the main liquid crystal 5 is used for the practice scenery effect, the performance start notice effect, the performance effect, and the next performance notice effect among the performance series effects composed of a plurality of partial effects. The sub liquid crystal 6 is used for the performance end performance. On the other hand, while the main liquid crystal 5 is used for the four RTC effects, a normal effect is performed by a slot effect using the sub liquid crystal 6. For this reason, when the performance end effect is started, the normal effect is changed from the slot effect using the sub liquid crystal 6 to the normal effect in the normal effect mode using the main liquid crystal 5. Need to return.

  However, in the case where the slot effect is being executed in the sub liquid crystal 6 at the timing when the next performance notice effect is finished, if the performance end effect in the sub liquid crystal 6 is immediately started, the slot effect is interrupted, and as a result , There is a risk of reducing the interest of normal performance. For this reason, in the present embodiment, at the start timing of the performance end effect, the performance image of the performance end effect is reduced and superimposed on the effect image of the next performance notice effect displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 in full screen. Start the performance end production in the form of When the decorative display variation display and the slot effect are completed, the reduced display of the performance end effect effect image on the main liquid crystal 5 is switched to the full screen display of the performance end effect effect image on the sub liquid crystal 6. Along with this, the fluctuating effect performed in a state where the decorative design is displayed large on the main liquid crystal 5 is resumed.

  As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the interest of the normal performance from being reduced as the image display means used for the RTC effect is switched.

  On the other hand, in other embodiments, the following control may be performed. That is, when the normal performance using the sub liquid crystal 6 is being executed at the end timing of the next performance notice effect, the performance end effect is started at the switching timing of the normal effect after the normal effect ends, The display means used for the normal performance is returned from the sub liquid crystal 6 to the main liquid crystal 5.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 102, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the end timing of the next performance notice effect (step S2611: YES), as in the process of step S2514 (see FIG. 97), the entire song is in an open state. It is determined whether or not (step S2613).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that all songs are released (step S2613: YES), the overall performance release effect schedule table (see FIG. 29) is read from the control ROM 144 and set in the control RAM 145 (step S2614). . Next, RTC information is acquired from the RTC 134, and the execution date of the current performance is specified based on the RTC information (step S2615). Further, based on the elapsed time information stored in the FeRAM 1451, the elapsed time from the power-on when the performance performance is started in the current performance series performance is specified (step S2617). For example, when the elapsed time from the power-on indicated by the elapsed time information is 3 hours 7 minutes 30 seconds, the elapsed time from the power-on when the performance performance is started is specified as 3 hours. Further, for example, when the elapsed time from the power-on indicated by the elapsed time information is 7 hours 6 minutes 57 seconds, the elapsed time from the power-on when the performance performance is started is specified as 7 hours.

  Subsequent to the process of step S2616, the overall CPU 141 stores information indicating the type of performance end effect data corresponding to the execution date specified in the process of step S2615 and the elapsed time from the power-on specified in the process of step S2616. One performance end effect data is selected by reading from the performance end effect schedule table after all songs are released (step S2617). Then, setting information indicating the selection result is set in the control RAM 145 (step S2618). The performance output effect using the sub liquid crystal 6 is started by executing the image output control process of step S2800 based on the setting information.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that all the songs are not released (step S2613: NO), the general CPU 141 acquires the RTC information from the RTC 134 and specifies the current date based on the RTC information. It is determined whether or not only the new song A has been released based on whether or not it is a date prior to the date of the first presentation permission date (see FIG. 17) (step S2619).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that only the new song A has not been released (step S2619: NO), the overall CPU 141 identifies a new song (performance song) used for the performance performance in the current performance series performance (step S2620). Specifically, for example, when the performance effect ends, information indicating a new song used for the performance effect is stored in the control RAM 145, and based on this information, the information is used for the current performance effect. Identify new songs.

  Next, the overall CPU 141 reads out the performance completion effect schedule table before the release of all songs from the control ROM 144 and sets it in the control RAM 145 (step S2621). Then, performance end effect data corresponding to the current performance song is selected (step S2622).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that only the new song A has been released (step S2619: YES), the overall CPU 141 identifies a loop group corresponding to the execution date (step S2623). Specifically, a table in which the execution date when the performance end effect is executed and the loop group type of any one of the first group to the sixth group is stored in the control ROM 144, The CPU 141 specifies the loop group corresponding to the execution date by reading the loop group type corresponding to the current date indicated by the RTC information acquired from the RTC 134 from this table.

  Next, the overall CPU 141 identifies performance end data for the new song A that was used last time (step S2624). Specifically, when the performance end effect of the new song A ends, information indicating the performance end effect data used for the performance end effect is stored in the control RAM 145, and the previous use is based on the information. The performance end effect data for the new song A is specified (step S2624).

  Subsequently, the overall CPU 141 selects the performance completion effect data for new song A to be used this time (step S2625). Specifically, the group configuration of the loop group identified in the process of step S2623 is read from the loop group table for new song A (see FIG. 26), and this group configuration is referred to for the new song A identified in the process of step S2624. Select the performance end effect data next to the performance end effect data.

  When the central CPU 141 executes the process of step S2622, or executes the process of step S2625, the general CPU 141 sets performance end effect setting information including information indicating the selection result of the process of step S2622 or step S2625 in the control RAM 145. . The performance output effect using the sub liquid crystal 6 is started by executing the image output control process of step S2800 based on the setting information.

[RTC effect prohibition control processing by the image sound control board 140]
Next, the RTC effect prohibition control process executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a detailed flowchart of the RTC effect prohibition control process in step S2700 of FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S2500, the overall CPU 141 first determines whether or not the setting information of the RTC effect is set in the control RAM 145 as illustrated in FIG. 103 (step S2701). That is, the processing in step S2317 (see FIG. 90), the processing in step S2403 (see FIG. 91), the processing in step S2405 (see FIG. 91), the processing in step S2471 (see FIG. 91), and the processing in step S2415 (see FIG. 92). Processing, step S2435 (see FIG. 93), step S2455 (see FIG. 94), step S2465 (see FIG. 95), step S2529 (see FIG. 97), step S2540 (see FIG. 98) Processing, step S2554 (see FIG. 99), steps S2578 and S2579 (see FIG. 100), step S2598 (see FIG. 101), step S2618 (see FIG. 102), or step S2626 (see FIG. 102) It is determined whether or not any one of the processes is executed. If it is determined that the setting information for the RTC effect is not set (step S2701: NO), the process proceeds to step S2800 described later.

  On the other hand, when the overall CPU 141 determines that the setting information of the RTC effect is set (step S2701: YES), a predetermined setting screen (in this embodiment, the power recovery screen or the installation position setting screen: see FIG. 33). Whether or not is being displayed is determined (step S2702). If it is determined that the predetermined setting screen is not being displayed (step S2702: NO), the process proceeds to step S2800.

  When determining that the predetermined setting screen is being displayed (step S2702: YES), the overall CPU 141 discards the setting information relating to the RTC effect set in the control RAM 145 (step S2703).

  By performing the process of step S2703, it is possible to effectively suppress the start of the RTC effect when the power recovery screen or the installation position setting screen is displayed.

  Thus, when the predetermined time condition regarding the start of the RTC effect is satisfied while the setting screen is displayed, the setting screen is displayed without executing the RTC effect. On the other hand, when the predetermined time condition regarding the start of the RTC effect is satisfied when the setting screen is not displayed, the RTC effect is executed.

  In other embodiments, the processing in steps S2300, S2400, and S2500 in FIG. 86 may not be performed while the setting screen is displayed. In this case, the process of step S2701 in FIG. 103 is not necessary.

[Image Output Control Processing by Image Acoustic Control Board 140]
Next, the image output control process executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a detailed flowchart of the image output control process in step S2800 of FIG.

  Subsequent to the RTC effect prohibition control process in step S2700, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not setting information regarding the main liquid crystal 5 is stored in the control RAM 145 as illustrated in FIG. 104 (step S2801). In the present embodiment, a normal effect (fluctuation effect or winning effect), a drop effect, a practice scenery effect, a performance start notice effect, a performance effect, a next performance notice effect, four types of game effects, a setting screen (a power recovery screen or an installation position) Since the setting screen is displayed using the main liquid crystal 5, it is determined in step S2801 whether or not at least one piece of setting information related to these is stored in the control RAM 145.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the setting information related to the main liquid crystal 5 is stored (step S2801: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines what screen configuration should be constructed based on the stored setting information. Based on the determination result, a display list for the main liquid crystal is created (step S2802). The created display list is set in the display list storage area 1491 (step S2803).

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2803 or determines that the setting information about the main liquid crystal 5 is not stored (step S2801: NO), is the setting information about the sub liquid crystal stored in the control RAM 145? It is determined whether or not (step S2804). In this embodiment, since the slot effect and the performance end effect are performed using the main liquid crystal 5, it is determined in step S2804 whether or not at least one setting information related to these is stored in the control RAM 145.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the setting information related to the sub liquid crystal 6 is stored (step S2804: YES), the overall CPU 141 creates a display list for the sub liquid crystal (step S2805), and displays the created display list in the display list storage area 1491. (Step S2806). When the process of step S2806 is executed, or when it is determined that the setting information regarding the sub liquid crystal 6 is not stored (step S2804: NO), the process proceeds to the effect sound output control process of step S2900.

[Production sound output control processing by the image sound control board 140]
Next, the effect sound output control process executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a detailed flowchart of the effect sound output control process in step S2900 of FIG.

  Subsequent to the image output control process in step S2800, the overall CPU 141 synchronizes the sound output from the speaker 24 with the display effect executed by the main liquid crystal 5 (or the sub liquid crystal 6) according to the image output control process. First, the following processing is executed.

  That is, the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the display of the normal effect image related to the normal effect is started based on whether or not the display list including the start instruction of the normal effect is set in the display list storage area 1491 ( Step S2901). If the overall CPU 141 determines that the display of the normal effect image has been started (step S2901: YES), the general CPU 141 outputs a control signal instructing the output start of the effect sound corresponding to the normal effect image to the sound DSP 143, thereby generating the normal effect. The output of the effect sound related to the image is started (step S2902).

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2902 or determines that the display of the normal effect image is not started (step S2901: NO), the display list including an instruction to start the RTC effect (excluding the sound effect) Based on whether or not is set in the display list storage area 1491, it is determined whether or not the display of the RTC effect image related to the RTC effect is started (step S2903). When determining that the display of the RTC effect image has been started (step S2903: YES), the overall CPU 141 outputs a control signal instructing the output start of the effect sound corresponding to the RTC effect image to the sound DSP 143, thereby causing the RTC effect to be displayed. Output of the effect sound related to the image is started (step S2904).

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2904, or determines that the display of the RTC effect image is not started (step S2903: NO), whether the setting information of the sound effect is set in the control RAM 145 or not. Is determined (step S2905). That is, it is determined whether or not the sound effect setting information is stored in the control RAM 145 by the process of step S2529 (see FIG. 97). If it is determined that the audio production setting information has been set (step S2905: YES), the audio DSP 143 outputs the audio production sound by outputting a control signal instructing to start the production of the production sound related to the audio production. Start (step S2906).

  The overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the RTC effect is started during the normal effect when the process of step S2906 is executed or when it is determined that the setting information of the sound effect is not set (step S2905: NO). (Step S2907). Specifically, when setting information related to the RTC effect is set in the control RAM 145, the setting information related to the normal effect stored in the control RAM 145 is compared with the setting information related to the RTC effect, and the normal effect is executed. It is determined whether or not the RTC effect is started during the period (for example, during symbol variation or during a round game).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the RTC effect is to be started during the normal effect (step S2907: YES), for example, the general CPU 141 outputs a control signal instructing a decrease in the output level of the normal effect sound to the audio DSP 143, thereby producing the normal effect. The sound output level is lowered (step S2908).

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2908 or determines that the RTC effect is not started during the normal effect (step S2907: NO), for example, the general CPU 141 stores the setting information related to the normal effect stored in the control RAM 145. Based on the determination, it is determined whether or not the reach effect has been developed while the output level of the normal effect sound is reduced (whether or not it is reach development timing) (step S2909). Here, if it is determined that the reach effect has been developed while the output level of the normal effect sound is reduced (step S2909: YES), a control signal instructing to cancel the decrease in the output level of the normal effect sound is output to the acoustic DSP 143, The output level of the normal effect sound is restored (step S2910).

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S2910, or determines that it has not developed into a reach effect during a decrease in the output level of the normal effect sound (step S2909: NO), for example, the VDP 142 is associated with the customer waiting effect. It is determined whether or not the current state is the customer waiting effect execution period based on whether or not the command is received from the effect control board 130 after the drawing process is instructed (step S2911). . Here, the customer waiting effect execution period is the customer waiting determination time (see step S148 in FIG. 84: for example, 30 seconds) after the customer waiting command is transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the processing in step S322 (see FIG. 69). ) Elapses at the start time. At this start time, a customer waiting effect is generated according to a customer waiting effect start command transmitted from the effect control board 130 according to the process of step S151 (see FIG. 84). It is a period to be executed. For this reason, the end time of the customer waiting effect execution period is, for example, a timing at which a change start command is transmitted from the game control board 100 in a state where the customer waiting effect is being executed, and the change effect is started accordingly. is there.

  When determining that it is the customer waiting effect execution period (step S2911: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the RTC effect sound is being output (step S2912). Specifically, for example, based on whether or not the output of the RTC effect sound instructed to the sound DSP 143 is completed, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect sound is being output. If it is determined that the RTC effect sound is being output (step S2912: YES), the output level of the RTC effect sound is set to 40% (step S2913). Specifically, a control signal instructing to suppress the output level of the RTC effect sound to 40% is output to the acoustic DSP 143.

If a customer waiting effect start command is transmitted from the effect control board 130 during execution of the RTC effect, the RTC effect is continued without starting the customer waiting effect at the start time of the customer waiting effect execution period. The output level of the production sound related to the RTC production is lowered to 40%.
In addition, when the start timing of the RTC effect is reached during execution of the customer waiting effect, the customer waiting effect is interrupted at the start timing, and the RTC effect is set with the output level of the RTC effect sound set to 40%. Be started. Then, when this RTC effect ends and 30 seconds elapse, the customer waiting effect is resumed.

  In the case where the RTC effect is an audio effect performed using only the speaker 24, it is less necessary to immediately interrupt the customer waiting effect when starting the sound effect during the customer waiting effect. For this reason, in such a case, the customer waiting effect without output of the effect sound and the sound effect using only the speaker 24 are simultaneously executed, and the practice scenery effect that is executed following the sound effect is started. Then, the customer waiting effect may be interrupted.

[Timer interrupt processing by image sound control board 140]
Next, a timer interrupt process executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the image sound control board 140. The image acoustic control board 140 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 106 at regular intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. To do.

  First, the overall CPU 141 determines whether a command transmitted from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S3001). If it is determined that the command from the effect control board 130 has not been received (step S3001: NO), the process proceeds to step S3071 described later.

  When determining that the command from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S3001: YES), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the command is a customer waiting effect start command (step S3002). If it is determined that the command is a customer waiting effect start command (step S3002: YES), setting information for starting display of a predetermined customer waiting effect image is set in the control RAM 145 (step S3003). However, when the RTC effect is executed at the timing when the image sound control board 140 receives the customer waiting effect start command, the overall CPU 141 sets setting information related to the customer waiting effect after the RTC effect ends. .

  In addition, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where a predetermined | prescribed customer waiting effect was performed, it is used for the customer waiting effect every time the first performance performance of a new song is performed, like the opening effect and the ending effect of the long hit game. The video to be displayed may be appropriately changed to one based on the latest song, or the latest song may be output from the speaker 24 during the customer waiting effect. Thereby, before the player starts the game, it is possible to grasp to which new song a new song has been announced or to predict a new song to be released next.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command from the effect control board 130 is not a customer waiting command (step S3002: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether or not the command is a hold display command (step S3004). If it is determined that the received command is a hold display command (step S3004: YES), a hold icon display process is executed (step S3010). The hold icon display process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command received from the effect control board 130 is not a hold command (step S3004: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the command is a variable effect start command (step S3021). Here, when it is determined that the command from the effect control board 130 is a change effect start command (step S3021: YES), a change effect start process is executed (step S3030). This variation effect start process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command received from the effect control board 130 is not a change effect start command (step S3021: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the command is a change effect end command (step S3041). Here, when it is determined that the received command is a variation effect end command (step S3041: YES), a variation effect end process for ending the variation effect performed in the main liquid crystal 5 or the sub liquid crystal 6 is executed (step S3041). S3042). By executing this variation effect end process, the decorative symbols displayed on the main liquid crystal 5 are stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command received from the effect control board 130 is not the change effect end command (step S3041: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the command is an opening effect start command (step S3043). Here, when it is determined that the command received from the effect control board 130 is an opening effect start command (step S3043: YES), an opening effect start process for starting the opening effect is executed (step S3050). The opening effect start process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When determining that the command received from the effect control board 130 is not the opening effect start command (step S3043: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the command is an in-round effect start command (step S3061). . Here, when it is determined that the command received from the effect control board 130 is an in-round effect start command (step S3061: YES), an in-round effect start process for starting the in-round effect with the start of the round game. Is executed (step S3062). Specifically, setting information for starting an effect start command during a round is set in the control RAM 145.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command received from the effect control board 130 is not an in-round effect start command (step S3061: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the command is a music selection screen display command (step S3063). ). Here, when it is determined that the command from the effect control board 130 is a music selection screen display command (step S3063: YES), a music selection screen display start process for starting display of the music selection screen is executed (step S3063). S3064). Specifically, setting information for starting display of the music selection screen is set in the control RAM 145.

  When determining that the command received from the effect control board 130 is not the music selection screen display command (step S3063: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the command is a music playback command (step S3065). If it is determined that the command received from the effect control board 130 is a music playback command (step S3065: YES), setting information for starting playback of the music selected by the player is set in the control RAM 145. A selected music piece reproduction start process is executed (step S3066).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command received from the effect control board 130 is not a music reproduction command (step S3065: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the command is an ending effect start command (step S3067). Here, when it is determined that the command received from the effect control board 130 is an ending effect start command (step S3067: YES), an ending effect start process for setting setting information for starting the ending effect in the control RAM 145 is performed. It executes (step S3068).

  When determining that the command received from the effect control board 130 is not an ending effect start command (step S3067: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the command is a short hit effect start command (step S3069). . Here, when it is determined that the command received from the effect control board 130 is a short win effect start command (step S3069: YES), a short hit effect start process for starting the short win effect associated with the short win game is executed. (Step S3070). The short hit effect start process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  The overall CPU 141 executes a data transmission control process when each process illustrated in FIG. 106 is executed (step S3071). Specifically, data related to image sound control performed on the image sound control board 140 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. On the other hand, the effect control board 130 transfers the data received from the image sound control board 140 to the lamp control board 150 (step S12 in FIG. 81). Thereby, it is possible to control the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the rotating light device 8 and the like so as to synchronize with the effects performed by the main liquid crystal 5, the sub liquid crystal 6, and the speaker 24.

  As described above, in the image sound control board 140, processing for setting various setting information in accordance with the command received from the effect control board 130 is performed. Then, by executing the image output control process of step S2800 based on these setting information, the effect display according to the command from the effect control board 130 is realized.

[Hold icon display processing]
FIG. 107 is a detailed flowchart of the hold icon display process in step S3010 of FIG. If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command received from the effect control board 130 is a hold display command (step S3004: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 107, the overall CPU 141 determines whether the RTC effect is being executed. (Step S3011). Specifically, whether or not the RTC effect is being executed based on whether or not the drawing process for displaying the RTC effect image (for example, the effect image of the performance effect) is performed on the main liquid crystal 5 by the VDP 142. Determine. If it is determined that the RTC effect is being executed (step S3011: YES), setting information for displaying the hold icon on the sub liquid crystal 6 is set in the control RAM 145 (step S3012). Based on the setting information, the above-described image output control process in step S2800 is executed, so that the hold icon is displayed small on the sub liquid crystal 6.

  When the hold icon is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 6 in this way, the hold pre-reading effect using the hold icon is not performed.

  When determining that the RTC effect is not being executed (step S3011: NO), the overall CPU 141 determines whether the hold display command received from the effect control board 130 is a normal hold display command (step S3013). That is, the received hold display command is a normal hold display command transmitted from the effect control board 130 in accordance with the process in step S105 (see FIG. 82), or in accordance with the process in step S106 (see FIG. 82). Then, it is determined whether the command is a special hold display command transmitted from the effect control board 130.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the hold display command received from the effect control board 130 is a normal hold display command (step S3013: YES), the overall CPU 141 controls setting information for displaying a new normal hold icon on the main liquid crystal 5. Is set in the RAM 145 (step S3014). Conversely, when it is determined that the hold display command received from the effect control board 130 is not a normal hold display command (step S3013: NO), setting information for displaying a new special hold icon on the main liquid crystal 5 is used for control. It is set in the RAM 145 (step S3015). This special hold icon is a hold icon that is displayed differently from the normal hold icon, and is, for example, a hold icon that is different in color from the normal hold icon. Specifically, while the normal hold icon is a white hold icon, the special hold icons are white, such as blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors, arranged in descending order of reliability for the jackpot As an example, a hold icon of a different color from the above is given. The rainbow color is a color that can be selected only when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit. Red and green are colors that are easily selected when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, or when the variation time of the special symbol related to the first special symbol determination is relatively long although it is a loss It is. Blue and yellow are selected when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is lost, or when the variation time of the special symbol related to the first special symbol determination is relatively short. Easy color.

  When the RTC effect is not being executed, the normal hold icon or the special hold icon is displayed relatively large on the main liquid crystal 5. At that time, the first suggestion effect that suggests the reliability for the jackpot is performed by displaying the special hold icon. On the other hand, when the RTC effect is being executed, the hold icon is displayed relatively small on the sub liquid crystal 6 regardless of whether the command from the effect control board 130 is the normal hold icon display command. In this case, the first suggestion effect is not performed, and instead, a second suggestion effect that suggests the presence of a jackpot is performed using the rotary light device 8.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 108 is a detailed flowchart of the variable effect start process in step S3030 of FIG. If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command received from the effect control board 130 is the change effect start command (step S3021: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 108, all of the new songs A to L have been announced. It is determined whether or not there is no unpublished state (step S3031). Specifically, the RTC information is obtained from the RTC 134, and whether or not the current date and time indicated by the RTC information is before the initial release permission date and time of the new song A defined in the disclosure management table (see FIG. 17). Based on the above, it is determined whether or not an unpublished state.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is in an unpublished state (step S3031: YES), it sets a default table (see FIG. 85) in the control RAM 145 as a display list creation table (step S3032).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the current state is not an unpublished state (step S3031: NO), for example, the main liquid crystal 5 is set to the RTC based on whether the RDP effect image is being drawn by the VDP 142 or not. It is determined whether or not it is in use according to the effect (step S3033). If it is determined that the main liquid crystal 5 is used for the RTC effect (step S3033: YES), a slot effect table (see FIG. 85) is set in the control RAM 145 as a display list creation table (step S3034). ).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the main liquid crystal 5 is not used for the RTC effect (step S3033: NO), the overall CPU 141 specifies a new song used for the previous performance effect (step S3035). For example, if the new song information indicating the new song used for the performance performance is stored in the FeRAM 1451 and the new song information is updated every time the performance performance is performed, the new song used for the previous performance performance can be easily obtained. It is possible to specify.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S3035, the overall CPU 141 sets a main table corresponding to the specified new song in the control RAM 145 (step S3036). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 85, in the present embodiment, twelve main tables of the new song A main table to the new song L main table are stored in the control ROM 144, so these twelve main tables are stored. The main table of the new song identified by the processing in step S3035 is selected from the list and set in the control RAM 145.

  The overall CPU 141 acquires a random number for selection when the process of step S3032 is executed, when the process of step S3034 is executed, or when the process of step S3036 is executed (step S3037). Specifically, although not shown in the figure, the random number update process for updating the selection random number or the like is performed in the main process performed at a predetermined cycle shorter than the interrupt process in the image sound control board 140. The general CPU 141 acquires the value at the time of receiving the change effect start command from the effect control board 130 for the random number for selection.

  Then, the overall CPU 141 determines the display content in the normal effect based on the acquired selection random number and the set display list creation table (step S3038). In the display list creation table, a special symbol variation pattern and a plurality of effect patterns of normal effects are associated with each other. Then, for each of the plurality of effect patterns of the normal effect, the type of image data used as a material when generating images of each effect (decorative symbol effect, background image effect, character effect, etc.) constituting the normal effect, A random number for selection is associated. The general CPU 141 first analyzes the change effect start command and specifies the effect pattern of the current normal effect. Then, by specifying the type of image data corresponding to the selection random number acquired in step S3037 for the specified effect pattern, the type of image data used for the normal effect is determined. The types of image data include default, new song A, new song B, new song C, new song D, new song E, new song F, new song G, new song H, new song I, new song J, new song K, and new song L. For example, when the default is selected as the type of the image data for the background image effect, the default background image generated using the default image data is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5, and when the new song A is selected, the new song A A new song A background image generated using the image data is displayed on the main liquid crystal 5.

  The overall CPU 141 sets setting information for starting display of the normal effect image having the display content determined in the process of step S3038 in the control RAM 145 (step S3039). In the image output control process in step S2800, the display list generated based on the setting information is set in the display list storage area 1491, so that the normal effect using the main liquid crystal 5 is started.

  As described above, the overall CPU 141 causes the main liquid crystal 5 to execute the normal effect when the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. At that time, it is determined which performance performance of the new song has been executed by the main liquid crystal 5, and a display list creation table is selected based on the determination result.

  Here, a change in the background image during the normal production triggered by each display list creation table and the performance production will be described. Here, the change in the normal effect will be described by taking an example of the change in the background image triggered by the performance effect. However, the character displayed on the display screen of the main liquid crystal 5 and the BGM output from the speaker 24 also perform the performance effect. It changes as an opportunity.

  FIG. 109 is a schematic diagram of a default table. As illustrated in FIG. 109, the default table defines two types of image data for generating a background image: a first default background and a second default background. For example, when the selection random number is 100, in the default table, 50 different selection random numbers are assigned to these two types of backgrounds. For this reason, in step S3038, each is selected at a rate of 50%. This default table is used until the first performance performance of the new song A is performed after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is introduced into the pachinko hall, and thereafter, it is not used even when all songs are released.

  FIG. 110 is a schematic diagram of the new song A main table. As illustrated in FIG. 110, the new song A main table defines three types of image data for generating a background image: a first default background, a second default background, and a new song A background. . For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song A main table, 25 selection random numbers are assigned to the first default background, and 25 similarly to the second default background. Random numbers for selection are assigned, and 50 random numbers for selection are assigned to the background of the new song A. Therefore, in step S3038, the new song A background is selected at a rate of 50%, the second default background is selected at a rate of 25%, and the first default background is selected at the rate of 25%.

  This new song A main table is used for two weeks from the start of the first performance production of the new song A to the start of the first performance production of the new song B before the transition to the state of opening all songs. When the first performance performance of the new song A is performed, the background image of the new song A is most likely to appear at 50% for two weeks, so the player enjoys the performance of the new song A even after the performance performance of the new song A is performed. You can also enjoy the performance of the new song A after the first time.

  The new song A main table is different from the default table in that the new song A background can be newly selected. Here, for example, if the selection ratios of the first default background, the second default background, and the new song A background are set to be the same, the appearance rate of the normal effect based on the new song A is lowered. As a result, the opportunity for the player to enjoy the normal performance based on the new song A is reduced, and it is not possible to clearly recognize that the normal performance has been switched due to the first performance performance of the new song A (the production related to the new song A has been newly added). There is a possibility that. Thus, in the present embodiment, the selection rate of the new song A background is increased by lowering the selection rates of the first default background and the second default background compared to the default table.

  As is clear from the above description, the general CPU 141 selects the default table until the first performance performance of the new song A is performed, and uses the normal performance data stored in the CGROM 148 as the main performance. The liquid crystal 5 is executed. On the other hand, after the first performance performance of the new song A is performed, the selection rates of the first default background and the second default background are set lower than the default table, and instead, the selection rate of the new song A background is set. The new song A main table set highest is selected. Thereby, the main liquid crystal 5 is caused to execute an effect using the special effect data (here, the image data of the new song A) stored in the CGROM 148 as a normal effect.

  FIG. 111 is a schematic diagram of the new song B main table. As illustrated in FIG. 111, the new song B main table defines three types of image data for generating a background image: a second default background, a new song A background, and a new song B background. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song B main table, 15 selection random numbers are assigned to the second default background, and 35 selections are made for the new song A background. A random number for use is assigned, and 50 selection random numbers are assigned to the background of the new song B. Therefore, in step S3038, the new song B background is selected at a rate of 50%, the new song A background is selected at a rate of 35%, and the second default background is selected at a rate of 15%.

  This new song B main table is used for one week from the start of the first performance production of the new song B to the start of the first performance production of the new song C before the transition to the all songs open state. When the first performance performance of the new song B is performed, the background image of the new song B is most likely to appear at 50%, so the player can enjoy the performance of the new song B even after the performance performance of the new song B is performed, In addition, before the transition to the all songs open state, the performance performance of the new song B after the first time can be enjoyed more.

  The new song B main table is different from the new song A main table in that the new song B can be newly selected and the first default background is excluded. Here, if the first default background is not excluded, the selectable backgrounds are the first default background, the second default background, the new song A background, and the new song B background. The problem arises that the background selection rate cannot be set too high. Further, when trying to further increase the selection rate of the new song B background, there arises a problem that not only the default background but also the selection rate of the new song A background must be lowered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the new song B is excluded by excluding the first default background included in the new song A main table (the selection rate is “0”) and lowering the selection rate of the second default background. While the background selection rate is increased, the selection rate of the new song A background is suppressed from being unnecessarily low.

  FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram of the new song C main table. As illustrated in FIG. 112, in the new song C main table, three types of new song A background, new song B background, and new song C background are defined as types of image data for generating a background image. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song C main table, 20 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song A background, and 30 selection random numbers are used for the new song B background. A random number is assigned, and 50 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song C background. Therefore, in step S3038, the new song C background is selected at a rate of 50%, the new song B background is selected at a rate of 30%, and the new song A background is selected at a rate of 20%.

  This new song C main table is used for one week from the start of the first performance production of the new song C to the start of the first performance production of the new song D before the transition to the all songs release state. When the first performance performance of the new song C is performed, the background image of the new song C is most likely to appear at 50%. Therefore, the player can enjoy the performance of the new song C even after the performance performance of the new song C is performed. In addition, before the transition to the full song release state, the performance performance of the new song C after the first time can be enjoyed more.

  The new song C main table is different from the new song B main table in that the new song C is newly selectable and the second default background is excluded. That is, the second default background is excluded in order to set the appearance rate of the new song C background image to the highest and set the appearance rate of the new song A and the new song B as high as possible. In other words, when the new song C main table is used, the normal effect data stored in the CGROM 148 is not used, and only the special effect data is used.

  FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram of the new song D main table. As illustrated in FIG. 113, the new song D main table defines four types of image data for generating a background image: new song A background, new song B background, new song C background, and new song D background. ing. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song D main table, 10 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song A background, and 20 selections are used for the new song B background. Random numbers are assigned, 30 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song C background, and 40 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song D background. Therefore, in step S3038, the new song D background is selected at a rate of 40%, the new song C background is selected at a rate of 30%, the new song B background is selected at a rate of 20%, and the remaining 10% rate. The new song A background is selected.

  This new song D main table is used for one week from the start of the first performance production of the new song D to the start of the first performance production of the new song E before the transition to the all songs release state. When the first performance performance of the new song D is performed, the background image of the new song C is most likely to appear at 40%, so the player can enjoy the performance of the new song D even after the performance performance of the new song D is performed. In addition, before the transition to the full song release state, the performance performance of the new song D after the first time can be enjoyed more.

  The new song D main table is different from the new song C main table in that the new song D can be newly selected. In addition, when comparing by the selection rate, the selection rate of the first default background and the second default background is set to 0% in both main tables, so that the appearance rate of the default background is lowered in the new song D main table. Instead of the method, the selectivity of the new song D is set to the highest value by lowering the selectivity of the previously released new song (here, new songs A to C). The same applies to the tables after the new song E main table.

  FIG. 114 is a schematic diagram of the new song E main table. As illustrated in FIG. 114, in the new song E main table, 5 types of new song A background, new song B background, new song C background, new song D background, and new song E background are used as the types of image data for generating the background image. The type is specified. For example, if the selection random number is 100, in the new song E main table, five selection random numbers are assigned to the new song A background, and ten selection random numbers are used for the new song B background. Random numbers are assigned, 20 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song C background, 25 selection random numbers are assigned to the new song D background, and 40 selections are assigned to the new song E background. Random numbers are assigned. Therefore, in step S3038, the new song E background is selected at a rate of 40%, the new song D background is selected at a rate of 25%, the new song C background is selected at a rate of 20%, and at a rate of 10%. The new song B background is selected and the remaining 5% of the new song A background is selected.

  FIG. 115 is a schematic diagram of the new song L main table. As illustrated in FIG. 115, in the new song L main table, twelve types of new song A background to new song L background are defined, and as with other main tables, the selection rate of the latest song is the highest. A random number for selection is assigned (20% in the example shown in FIG. 115). In this new song L main table, since background images of all new songs used for performance performance are defined, until one week has passed since the first performance performance of new song L was performed (all songs open state) Until then, the player can enjoy the normal effects of all new songs, centering on the normal effects using the new song L.

  FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a change in image data used for drawing a background image. FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a change in the appearance rate of various background images. In FIGS. 116 and 117, “背景” indicates the background that is most likely to appear, “◯” indicates the background that may not appear to have the highest appearance rate, but “×” indicates the possibility that it may appear. There is no background.

  Until the first performance performance of the performance A is performed with the pachinko gaming machine 1 on 5/10 (Saturday) illustrated in FIG. 16 as the first day, the default table (see FIG. 109) described above is used for the normal performance. A display list is created. That is, when the normal performance is performed before 7 am on 5/10 (for example, the previous day or the day before the previous day), the display list is created using the default table. For this reason, the background image that appears in the normal performance before the first performance of the new song A is the first default background or the second default background. In the first and second weeks of introduction, a display list is created using the above-described new song A main table (see FIG. 110). For this reason, in the normal effects of the first and second weeks after introduction, the new song A background is most likely to appear, the second default background is likely to appear next, and the first default background is least likely to appear.

  In the third week of introduction, a display list is created using the new song B main table (see FIG. 111). For this reason, in the normal performance in the third week of introduction, the new song B background appears newly at the highest appearance rate, and the first default background does not appear. In the fourth week after the introduction, a display list is created using the new song C main table (see FIG. 112). For this reason, in the normal performance in the fourth week of introduction, the new song C background newly appears at the highest appearance rate, and the second default background also does not appear. Thereafter, every time one week elapses, a background image of a new new song is added and the number of types of background images finally becomes twelve. Therefore, variations of normal effects increase.

  Up to this point, the background image in the normal performance before the release of the entire song has been described. However, when the release of the entire song, the type of the performance song that is performed every hour on the basis of power-on is performed. It is changed every time (see FIG. 19). For this reason, the selection switching of the display list creation table was performed every week before the release of all songs, but the selection switching of the display list creation table is performed every hour when the release of all songs is performed. become.

  By the way, the main table (for example, the new song L main table or the new song K main table) corresponding to the new song used for the last performance performance before the release of all songs corresponds to the new song used for the initial performance production. The appearance rate of the background image of the initial new song is extremely low compared to the main table (the new song A main table or the table on the new song B side) (see, for example, FIGS. 110 and 115). For this reason, for example, during the first week after the first performance performance of the new song L, the background images of the new song A and the new song B are very unlikely to appear, and there are players who cannot see these background images. Is also possible.

  On the other hand, in the all-music release state, the selection switching of the display list creation table is performed every hour. For this reason, for example, the new song A main table and the new song B main table are used. As a result, it is possible to enjoy a background image that has been limited to only one hour of the day, but has been less visible.

[Modified example of display list creation table]
FIG. 118 is a schematic diagram of an all-mode table. In the above-mentioned example, when the first performance performance of a new song is performed, a special selection for switching the display list creation table to be used is performed in the same way even when all songs are released in order to make a new performance based on the new song appear in the normal performance. Explained when to do. On the other hand, as another embodiment, a display list is created using an all-mode table in which the selection rate of the production pattern of all new songs is set to be equal as shown in FIG. You may make it do. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the normal production based on each new song appear in a balanced manner.

[Opening production start processing]
FIG. 119 is a detailed flowchart of the opening effect start process in step S3050 of FIG. When determining that the command received from the effect control board 130 is an opening effect start command (step S3043: YES), the overall CPU 141 is similar to the process of step S3031 (see FIG. 108) as illustrated in FIG. Next, it is determined whether or not the performance performance has never been performed (step S3051).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that it is in an unreleased state (step S3051: YES), it selects a default opening effect image that is not based on any of the new songs A to L (step S3052). When it is determined that it is not in the announcement state (step S3051: NO), an opening effect image based on the new song used for the last performance effect is selected (step S3053).

  Then, the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for performing an opening effect for displaying the opening effect image selected in the process of step S3052 or step S3053 in the control RAM 145 (step S3054).

  When the general CPU 141 selects any of the 12 types of opening effect images corresponding to each of the new songs A to L and displays them on the main liquid crystal 5, if it is before the first announcement permission date and time of the new song B, An opening effect for displaying the opening effect image for the new song A is performed. If the opening effect image for the new song B is later than the date and time when the initial announcement of the new song B is permitted, an opening effect for displaying the opening effect image for the new song B is performed. The same applies to other new songs.

[Short hit production start processing]
FIG. 120 is a detailed flowchart of the short hit presentation start process in step S3070 of FIG. If the overall CPU 141 determines that the command received from the effect control board 130 is a short hit effect start command (step S3069: YES), the processing in step S3031 (see FIG. 108) is performed as illustrated in FIG. Similarly, it is determined whether or not the performance performance has not been performed yet (step S3071).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the unreleased state is present (step S3071: YES), the overall CPU 141 selects a default opening effect image that is not based on any of the new songs A to L (step S3072). When it is determined that it is not in the announcement state (step S3071: NO), an opening effect image based on the new song used for the last performance effect is selected (step S3073).

  Then, the overall CPU 141 sets setting information for performing a short hit effect for displaying the opening effect image selected in the process of step S3072 or step S3073 in the control RAM 145 (step S3074).

[Light effect control processing by lamp control board 150]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the light effect described above based on FIGS. 30 to 32 is performed in a period (see FIG. 13) from the start of the performance start notice effect to the end of the performance effect.
Hereinafter, a light effect control process executed in the lamp control board 150 in order to realize this light effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of the light effect control process executed on the lamp control board 150.

  As illustrated in FIG. 121, the lamp CPU 151 in the lamp control board 150 performs, for example, based on the data relating to the image sound control transferred from the effect control board 130 by the data transfer process in step S12 (see FIG. 81). It is determined whether it is the start timing of the start notice effect (step S4000). If it is determined that it is not the start timing of the performance start notice effect (step S4001: NO), the process proceeds to step S4008 described later.

  When the lamp CPU 151 determines that it is the start timing of the performance start notice effect (step S4001: YES), the lamp CPU 151 specifies the current performance song to be played in the performance effect performed following this performance start notice effect (step S4002). ). Specifically, for example, the current performance song is specified based on data relating to image sound control transferred from the effect control board 130.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, twelve performances of new songs A to L having different playback times and production contents are facilitated. On the other hand, in the lamp ROM 152 of the lamp control board 150, the operation pattern data indicating the operation pattern of the rotating body 80 (see FIG. 6) of the rotary light device 8 and the color LEDs 811 and 821 (see FIG. The light emission pattern data indicating the light emission patterns of (A) and (C) are individually stored for each of these new songs A to L.

  When the lamp CPU 151 identifies the current performance song in the process of step S4002, the light emission pattern data of the color LEDs 811 and 821 corresponding to the performance song is read from the lamp RMO 152 and set in the lamp RAM 153, thereby emitting light from the color LEDs 811 and 821. A pattern is set (step S4003). Then, light emission control of the color LEDs 811 and 821 based on the setting is started (step S4004).

  Further, following the process of step S4004, the lamp CPU 151 reads out the operation pattern data of the rotating body 80 corresponding to the current performance song specified in the process of step S4002 from the lamp ROM 152 and sets it in the lamp RAM 153, thereby rotating the lamp CPU 151. An operation pattern of the body 80 is set (step S4005). Then, operation control of the rotating body 80 (drive control of the rotary light motor 85) based on the setting is started (step S4006).

  The lamp CPU 151 causes the rotary light device 8 to start the light effect (see FIGS. 30A and 31) of the basic pattern described above by executing the processing of step S4004 and step S4006 in this way. This basic pattern exists for each of the new songs A to L.

  When the lamp CPU 151 executes the process of step S4006 or determines that it is not the start timing of the performance start notice effect (step S4001: NO), the lamp CPU 151 determines whether the light effect is being performed (step S4008). Specifically, for example, based on whether or not the light emission control started in the process of step S4004 and the operation control started in the process of step S4006 are completed, it is determined whether or not the light effect is being performed. If it is determined that the light effect is not being performed (step S4008: NO), the series of light effect control processing ends and the process returns to step S4001.

  When the lamp CPU 151 determines that the light effect is being performed (step S4008: YES), the lamp CPU 151 determines whether it is the stage development timing (step S4009). As described above with reference to FIG. 31, the light effect in the present embodiment is configured to develop from the first stage to the eighth stage, and the stage development timing to develop to the next stage is predetermined. Information indicating the stage development timing is stored in the lamp ROM 152. On the other hand, in step S4009, the lamp CPU 151 is based on the elapsed time since the start of the light effect by the processing in steps S4004 and S4006 and information indicating the stage development timing stored in the lamp ROM 152. It is determined whether or not it is a stage development timing.

  When the lamp CPU 151 determines that it is the stage development timing (step S4009: YES), the lamp CPU 151 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (step S4010). Specifically, based on the change effect start command and the hold display command received from the effect control board 130, the result determination process described above is executed to determine whether or not there is a big hit.

  When the lamp CPU 151 determines that there is a big hit (step S4010: YES), the lamp CPU 151 executes a pattern change process for changing either or both of the light emission pattern and the operation pattern of the rotary light device 8 (step S4011).

In this embodiment, outside the performance performance execution period, there is a reservation pre-reading effect that suggests that there is a possibility of jackpot by displaying the hold icon on the main liquid crystal 5 in a display mode different from the normal display mode. Done.
On the other hand, during the performance effect execution period, the hold icon is displayed small on the sub liquid crystal 6, so that the above-described hold prefetch effect cannot be executed. An effect suggesting that there is an effect is performed using the rotary light device 8.

[Operational effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, an effect based on the installation position information (for example, a normal effect, a performance series effect, a part of the game effect), and an effect based on the installation position information (a drop effect, a part) Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly interesting performance.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, an effect may be started at the start timing according to the installation position information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a drop effect). For this reason, when the same production as the other pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, the start timing of the production can be shifted, and the production with high interest can be executed.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, since the effect mode of the effect based on the installation position information (for example, the drop effect) is set based on the determination result of whether or not to execute the special game, the determination result can be suggested. It is possible to perform a production that is highly interesting.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, since the reproduction start point in the effect data changes depending on the installation position information, it is possible to execute an effect that is not interesting and has a high interest. In addition, since the playback from the playback start point corresponding to the installation position information is started for the same presentation data, there is no need to store a plurality of presentation data with different playback start points. It is possible to effectively suppress an increase in storage capacity.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the production mode of the production based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination (including the pre-determination result) is the first production mode (for example, the hold icon) during the performance production execution period. May be changed from a hold pre-reading effect using) to a second effect mode (light effect by the rotating light device 8). For this reason, the performance effect of a performance performance increases and it is possible to perform a production with high interest.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, a part (pointer position) of a predetermined effect (for example, obstacle race) may change based on the installation position information. For this reason, it is possible to produce a highly interesting performance.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the production mode of the audio production and the production mode of the performance production change at different timings. For this reason, it is possible to execute a highly interesting effect as compared to the case where the effect mode of these effects is fixed.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, among the plurality of partial effects constituting the performance series effect, the effect execution time of the sound effect, the performance effect, and the performance end effect changes. For this reason, it is possible to execute performance series effects that are highly interesting compared to the case where the performance execution times of these partial effects are fixed.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, for example, in the practice scenery effect, the content of the effect changes when a predetermined time condition is satisfied while the effect execution time is fixed. For this reason, it is possible to execute an effect that is more interesting than the conventional effect in which the effect execution time and the effect content change simultaneously.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, since the game effect can be executed after the first performance effect is performed, it is possible to effectively suppress the game effect being performed before the performance effect. Is possible.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, since the performance effect performed at intervals of 1 hour and the drop effect performed at intervals of 15 minutes can be executed, the time interval is fixed regardless of the type of effect. As compared with the case, it is possible to execute an effect that is highly interesting.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, since the execution time of the sound effect changes, the start time of the performance series effect changes based on the start timing of the performance effect. For this reason, it becomes impossible for a player to specify the start timing of a performance series production easily, and as a result, it can suppress effectively that the interest property of a performance series production falls.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, since the performance execution time of the sound production, performance production, and performance end production changes, it becomes impossible for the player to easily specify the performance time of the performance series production, and the execution time is easy. It is possible to effectively prevent the interest of the production from being reduced due to the fact that it can be specified.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the performance aspect of the performance start notice effect is unchanged, while the effect aspects such as the sound effect, the practice scenery effect, and the performance effect that are performed before and after that can be changed. For this reason, it is possible to suppress effectively that the interest property of a production falls because all the production aspects of these productions are being fixed.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, since the RTC effect is executed on the condition that the setting screen is not being displayed, there is an advantage that the RTC effect can be executed without hindering the display of the setting screen. .

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, for example, if the first announcement permission date and time of the new song B has not passed, the opening effect for the new song B related to the performance effect of the new song B selected after the permitted date and time is executed. It will not be done. Therefore, it is effective that the opening effect for the new song B is executed before the performance effect of the new song B is executed, and as a result, the player can recognize the contents of the performance effect of the new song B in advance. Can be suppressed.

[Modified example of performance series production]
FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram for describing a modification of the performance series performance. In this embodiment, when the elapsed time from turning on the power becomes the time corresponding to the start timing of the audio production, the performance series production is started, but this performance series production is an audio production, a practice scenery production, a performance start notice production, It consists of six partial effects: a performance effect, a next performance notice effect, and a performance end effect. With regard to the performance series effect composed of the six partial effects in this way, focusing on the practice scenery effect (first partial effect), the performance start notice effect (second partial effect), and the performance effect (third partial effect), The practice scenery effect and the performance effect are characterized in that the effect mode can be changed (see FIG. 122A). Specifically, although the practice scenery effect has a fixed effect execution time, the effect content can be changed (see FIG. 21), and the performance effect can change both the effect execution time and the effect content. (See FIG. 23). On the other hand, the performance start notice effect is characterized in that both the effect execution time and the effect content are unchanged (see FIG. 22).

  In contrast, in other embodiments, the following configuration may be employed. That is, when the performance start notice effect (first partial effect), the performance effect (second partial effect), and the next performance notice effect (third partial effect) among the six partial effects are noted, the performance start notice effect is given. As described above, the production mode is unchanged. As for the performance performance, the performance mode is variably configured as described above. On the other hand, for the next performance notice effect, in this embodiment, the effect mode is variable (the effect execution time changes while the effect execution time is fixed), but in other embodiments May change the production mode (see FIG. 122B). For example, by using one type of next performance announcement performance data that does not suggest the type of the next performance song and simply displays a message such as “The performance will start in one hour”, the performance of the next performance announcement performance The embodiment can be fixed.

  Thus, in other embodiments, for example, when the elapsed time from power-on satisfies a predetermined time condition, the specific effect executed in the order of the first partial effect, the second partial effect, and the third partial effect. In the configuration that can execute the first partial effect and the third partial effect, the effect mode is made unchanged (both effect execution time and effect content are fixed), while the effect mode of the second partial effect (effect execution time) And / or the contents of the effects may be changed.

[Other variations]
In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, For example, the following forms may be sufficient. That is, in the above embodiment, the case where the start timing of various RTC effects is controlled based on the elapsed time with the pachinko gaming machine 1 being turned on as a reference has been described. Instead of the elapsed time, the RTC effect may be executed on condition that the current date and time indicated by the RTC 134 satisfies a predetermined time condition. However, in this configuration, the current date and time indicated by the RTC 134 with respect to other adjacent pachinko gaming machines 1 causes a shift in the timing of the RTC effect that is simultaneously started in the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1. May occur. For this reason, as described in the above embodiment, it is preferable to control the execution of the RTC effect based on the elapsed time from the power-on.

In another embodiment, the elapsed time from power-on is 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 45 minutes, 60 minutes, 75 minutes, 90 minutes,. You may employ | adopt the structure which starts the drop effect mentioned above whenever it does. However, in this case, the start time of the drop effect will be reached while the performance effect is being executed. However, when these two effects are compared, the performance effect that is performed only once per hour than the drop effect is better. The priority is high. For this reason, when the start time of the drop effect is reached during execution of the performance effect, it is preferable to continue the performance effect without executing the drop effect.
In addition, when the above configuration is adopted, the start time of the drop effect is reached during the execution of the game effect. In this case, it is only necessary to delay the start timing of the drop effect and execute the drop effect after the game effect ends.

  Moreover, although the case where this invention was applied to the 1 type 2 type mixed pachinko gaming machine was explained as an example in the above embodiment, the present invention is, for example, a 1 type pachinko gaming machine or a revolving type game. It can also be applied to other gaming machines such as machines.

  In addition, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operation modes. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the screen diagrams and the like exemplified in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be screens of other display modes.

  As another embodiment, the effect control board 130 may execute part of the processing executed in the image sound control board 140. Further, the effect control board 130 and the image sound control board 140 are integrally configured so that the process executed on the effect control board 130 and the process executed on the image sound control board 150 are executed by one control board. May be.

1 Pachinko machine (an example of a game machine)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 4 Display 5 Main liquid crystal display device 6 Sub liquid crystal display device 8 Rotating light apparatus 10 Game area 11 1st starting opening 12 2nd starting opening 13 Big winning opening 16 Gate 17 Electric tulip 19 Special winning opening 24 Speaker 41 First special design Indicator 42 Second special symbol indicator 43 First special symbol hold indicator 80 Rotating body 100 Game control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
104 RAM clear switch 130 Production control board 131 Sub CPU
132 Sub ROM
133 Sub RAM
134 RTC
140 Image Sound Control Board 141 General CPU
142 VDP
143 Acoustic DSP
144 ROM for control
145 RAM for control
146 ROM for sound
147 SDRAM
148 CGROM
149 VRAM
150 Lamp control board 151 Lamp CPU
152 Lamp ROM
153 Lamp RAM
600 Island power supply device 811 and 821 Color LED
1451 FeRAM
1491 Display list storage area 1492 Expanded storage area 1493 Full screen frame buffer 1494 Reduced image frame buffer 1495 Main liquid crystal frame buffer 1496 Sub liquid crystal frame buffer

Claims (1)

A game machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player, and executes the special game according to the determination result,
A setting screen display means for displaying a setting screen based on a predetermined operation;
When it comes to a predetermined specific timing, it comprises a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect composed of a first partial effect and a second partial effect performed after the first partial effect,
The specific effect executing means is
If the specific timing comes when the setting screen is displayed, the specific effect is not executed,
A gaming machine, wherein the specific effect is executed when the specific timing is reached when the setting screen is not displayed.

Images